Home

Mercedes-Benz 2006 SLR McLaren Operator`s manual

1. eeesseeeenssessseeeeeess 181 Headlamp cleaning system 181 Rear view MILTOMS ccceeeeceeeees 181 DUN VIGON S saor nN 182 Rear window defroster 0 183 Automatic climate control 184 Deactivating the automatic climate control SYSTEM secccceeeeeeeeeeees 188 Operating the automatic climate control system in automatic mode 188 Contents Setting the temperature 189 Floormat drivers side 06 227 Control and operation of radio Adjusting air distribution 190 Floormats Only Mercedes Benz SLR transmitters ccceesecceeseeeceeeees 244 Adjusting air Volume 000 191 McLaren Roadster 722S 228 Catalytic converter cceeeeeee eee 245 Maximum cooling MAX COOL 191 Dust COVED cccccssssseteceeeesseseees 229 EMISSION control eeeeeeeee esses 245 Front Gefroster cccccsecccsseceeees 192 Roof and trunk lid racks 230 Coolant temperature 6085 246 Air recirculation mode 06 193 At the gas Station cccccseescceeeeeeees 247 Air CONCITIONING s00ccceeeeeceeeee 194 p RETUCIING c ccssececcccessescceeeeseees 247 Residual heat and ventilation 195 Operation 232 Check regularly and before a long trip OPE a N 196 The first 1000 miles 1500 km 234 248 Opening and closing the door windows J Drivin
2. Controls in detail Useful features ia Initializing pairing of Bluetooth inter face with mobile phone gt Switch on the ignition gt page 40 gt Open the storage compartment be tween the backrests gt page 210 gt D 213 Controls in detail a Useful features 1 Bluetooth interface 2 Button with indicator lamp 3 Pocket 214 gt Take Bluetooth interface C from pocket gt To initialize pairing press and hold button 2 on the Bluetooth interface Q until the indicator lamp in the button begins to flash rapidly in blue gt Let your mobile phone with Bluetooth capability conduct a search for Blue tooth devices until you find the Blue tooth interface with the symbol MB BTUM For information on how to search for Bluetooth devices refer to your mobile phone operating instructions Select the symbol MB BTUM gt Enter 0000 four zeros when prompted to enter the passkey The indicator lamp in the button 2 will stop flashing and remain illuminated in blue The pairing of the Bluetooth interface with your mobile phone was successful Pairing is only required once for each handset You will be able to make and receive hands free phone calls using the speakers and microphones installed in your vehicle You can also switch from hands free mode to privacy phone mode Please contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for the mos
3. ccceccccccccccccceeees 212 Standing WatEL ceecccceceeeceeeees 243 Loading the vehicle 00008 262 Telephone ccccsessescccesssseecesenes 212 Passenger compartment 244 Recommended tire inflation pressure Tele A eie 215 Driving abroad cceeeeeeeeeeeeees 244 268 Garage door Opene 0ecce 221 Checking tire inflation pressure 270 Contents Tire laDeling s cccssssccseeseseeees 276 Load identification ccecceeeeee 280 DOT Tire Identification Number TIN 28 1 Maximum tire load 0ccce eee 282 Maximum tire inflation pressure 283 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards U S vehicles cccssseeceeeeees 284 Tire ply material 286 Tire and loading terminology 286 Rotating tirS cccsccccsesseeeeees 289 Anti theft wheel nuts 290 Winter CTiVING ccsccccessccceeseeceseeees 292 Winter tir S cccssseesccsessseseees 292 SNOW CNAINS ccccreessssceeeeseseees 293 Maintenance 1 0 eeeeeecceeeeeecceeeeeeeees 294 Clearing the maintenance service indicator Message seeeeceeeeees 294 Maintenance service term exceeded 295 Calling up the maintenance service due AEC PETTITT ITT 295 Resetting the maintenance service indicator s 2 lt cncasssacesnonnsnteaiatecosciiens 296 Vehicle care ccssssescccsssseecceeeaseees 297 Cleaning and care of
4. Possible solution Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Left display O ows 1 Right display Turn Si gnal Left Mrror Turn Si gnal Ri ght M rror Li cense PI ate Lanp Left Li cense PI ate Lanp Ri ght AUTO Li ght I noper ati ve Practical hints What to do if ae Possible cause Possible solution consequence The turn signal in the left exteri gt Have the LEDs replaced as soon as possible or rear view mirror is malfunc tioning This message will only appear if all LEDs have stopped working The turn signal in the right exte gt Have the LEDs replaced as soon as possible rior rear view mirror is malfunctioning This message will only appear if all LEDs have stopped working The left license plate lamp is gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as malfunctioning possible The right license plate lamp is gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as malfunction
5. gt page 135 gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to position WJ or Mg When the engine is running the low beam headlamps are switched on In low ambient light conditions the following lamps will switch on additionally e Tail and parking lamps e License plate lamps e Side marker lamps Ge With the daytime running lamp mode activat ed and the engine running the low beam head lamps cannot be switched off manually 108 Canada only With the exterior lamp switch in position WJ or Egy you cannot switch on the high beam headlamps The high beam flasher is available at all times For nighttime driving you should turn the exterior lamp switch to position to permit activa tion of the high beam headlamps When the engine is running and you shift from a driving position to neutral position N or park position P with the vehi cle at a standstill the low beam head lamps will switch off with a delay of 3 minutes When the engine is running and you e turn the exterior lamp switch to position gj the low beam head lamps the tail and parking lamps the license plate and the side marker lamps switch on e turn the exterior lamp switch to position Jey the manual headlamp mode has priority over the daytime running lamp mode The corresponding exterior lamps switch on gt page 106 USA only a With the daytime running lamp mode activated and the exterior lamp switch in position WH you cannot switch
6. Lighting a Front fog lamps gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to posi tion or KJ gt page 106 Pull out the exterior lamp switch to first stop The front fog lamps switch on The green indicator lamp in the exterior lamp switch comes on gt page 106 Push in the exterior lamp switch The front fog lamps switch off The green indicator lamp in the exterior lamp switch goes out 109 Controls in detail ia Lighting Rear fog lamp driver s side only gt gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to position gt page 106 Pull out the exterior lamp switch to second stop The front fog lamps and rear fog lamp switch on The yellow indicator lamp in the exterior lamp switch comes on gt page 106 Push in the exterior lamp switch to first stop The rear fog lamp switches off The yellow indicator lamp in the exterior lamp switch goes out The front fog lamps remain lit 110 Combination switch The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column C High beam 2 High beam flasher High beam gt gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to position gt page 106 Push the combination switch in direction of arrow 1 to switch on the high beam The high beam headlamp indicator lamp E in the instrument cluster comes on gt page 29 Pull the combination switch in direction of arrow 2 to its original position to switch off the high be
7. Moving within a menu 3 Selecting the submenu or setting the Press button volume e Wag for next display E B for previous display E down to decrease 4 Telephone Press button to take a call to dial to redial to end a call P46 10 2898 31 to reject an incoming call 118 Depending on the selected menu pressing the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel will alter what appears in the multifunction display The information available in the multifunc tion display are arranged in menus and accompanying functions or submenus The individual functions are then found within the relevant menu radio or CD op erations under auo o for example These functions serve to call up relevant informa tion or to customize the settings for your vehicle It is helpful to think of the menus and the functions within each menu as being arranged in a circular pattern e If you press button or repeatedly you will pass through each menu one after the other e If you press button R or Ba repeatedly you will pass through each function display one after the other in the current menu Controls in detail Control system ia In the Setti ngs Menu instead of functions you will find a number of submenus for calling up and changing settings For instructions on using these submenus see Settings menu gt page 129 The number of menus available in the sys tem depends on which optional equipment is in
8. Your vehicle is equipped with two batteries e Starter battery in the trunk e Consumer battery in the trunk These batteries should always be suffi ciently charged in order to achieve its rat ed service life A flat battery must be fully recharged Refer to Maintenance Booklet for battery maintenance intervals If you use your vehicle mostly for short distance trips you will need to have the battery charge checked more frequently When replacing batteries always use bat teries approved by Mercedes Benz Have this work only carried out by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center If you do not intend to operate your vehicle for an extended period of time consult an authorized Mercedes Benz Center about steps you need to observe 256 Warning A N Observe all safety instructions and precau tions when handling automotive batteries A Risk of explosion A Fire open flames and smoking are prohibited when handling batteries Avoid creating sparks Battery acid is caustic Do not allow it to come into contact with skin eyes or clothing Wear suitable protective cloth ing especially gloves apron and faceguard Wear eye protection Rinse any acid spills immediate ly with clear water Contact a physician if necessary Keep children away Follow the instructions in this Operator s Manual T You must not jump start the vehicle other wise the vehicle electrical systems could be dam
9. e Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips over hip joint and not across the abdomen on the body 46 Getting started Driving Place the seat backrest in a nearly up Starting the engine right position Never use a Seat belt for more than one person at a time Do not fasten a seat belt around a per son and another object at the same time When using a seat belt to secure infant or toddler restraints or children in booster seats always follow the child seat manufacturer s instructions Check your seat belt during travel to make sure that it is properly positioned Make sure that the seat belt is always fitted snugly Take special care of this when wearing loose clothing Warning A N Do not pass belts over sharp edges They could tear Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in the door or in the seat adjustment mecha nism This could damage the seat belt Never attempt to make modifications to seat belts This could impair the effective ness of the seat belts Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection Damaged seat belts or seat belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Warning A N Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide CO and inhaling it can cause unconscio
10. e While driving ease up on the accelerator e Adapt your speed and driving style to the prevailing road conditions Failure to observe these guidelines could cause the vehicle to skid The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speed A The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded The ESP cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The ca pabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or danger ous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Warning Safety and Security Driving safety systems i Because the ESP operates automatically the engine must be shut off SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 when the parking brake is being tested on a brake test dynamometer Active braking action through the ESP may otherwise seriously damage the brake system which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty The ESP will only function properly if you use wheels of the recommended tire size gt page 385 For more information see the Practical hints section gt page 304 85 Safety and Security ie Driving safety systems Electronic traction system The electronic traction system is a compo nent
11. gt page 186 The indicator lamp on button WJ goes out Operating the automatic climate control system in automatic mode Air distribution and air volume can be adjusted automatically by the automatic climate control system You can also ad just the settings for air distribution and air volume manually Gp When operating the automatic climate control system in automatic mode you will only rarely need to adjust the temperature air volume and air distribution In automatic mode cooling with dehumiditica tion is switched on This function can be switched off if necessary gt page 194 Air distribution in automatic mode You can separately adjust the air distribu tion for each side of the passenger compartment Activating gt Press control button 4 or gt page 186 The control button is engaged The M0 symbol on the control button comes on Air distribution for the re spective side of the passenger com partment is adjusted automatically Deactivating gt Press control button or gt page 186 once more The control button sticks up slightly The A symbol on the control button goes out Automatic air distribution for the respective side of the passenger compartment is switched off Adjust the air distribution manually gt page 190 Air volume in automatic mode The air volume settings are the same for the entire passenger compartment Activating gt Press control butto
12. gt page 82 Cruise control Cruise control automatically maintains the speed you set for your vehicle Use of cruise control is recommended for driving at a constant speed for extended periods of time You can set or resume the cruise control at any speed over 20 mph 30 km h The cruise control function is operated by means of the cruise control lever The cruise control lever is the uppermost lever on the left hand side of the steering column gt page 30 Controls in detail Driving systems a A The Cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation The driver is and must always remain responsible for the vehicle s speed and for safe brake operation Warning Only use the cruise control if the road traffic and weather conditions make it advisable to travel at a steady speed e The use of the cruise control can be dan gerous on winding roads or in heavy traf fic because conditions do not allow safe driving at a steady speed e The use of the cruise control can be dan gerous on slippery roads Rapid changes in tire traction can result in wheel spin and loss of control e Deactivate the cruise control when driving in fog The Resume function should only be oper ated if the driver is fully aware of the previ ously set speed and wishes to resume this particular preset speed 205 Controls in detail a Driving systems 1 Sets curren
13. i 271M a P54 32 0484 3 i If only very little fuel is left in the tank a vehicle at the fuel pump is shown instead of the range Controls in detail Control system ia TEL menu i Which messages will appear in the right Never operate radio transmitters equipped l o i multifunction display field depends on with a built in or attached antenna i e with whether your telephone is switched on or out being connected to an external antenna Warning A N K a off from inside the vehicle while the engine is A driver s attention to the road must always running Doing so could lead to a malfunc e Ifthe telephone iS off the message in tion of the vehicle s electronic system pos the multifunction display is TEL F be his her primary focus when driving For your safety and the safety of others we rec ommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a tele sibly resulting in an accident and or e If the telephone is on personal injury The telephone will then search for a network During this time the right phone call If you choose to use the tele You can use the functions in the teL menu i i phone while driving please use the to operate your telephone provided it is multifunction display is empty hands free device and only use the tele connected to a hands free system and As soon as the telephone has found a phone when weather road and traffic con switched on
14. Combination switch 1 Single wipe Wiping with windshield washer fluid 2 Switching on windshield wipers gt Switch on the ignition gt page 40 52 T Do not operate the windshield wipers when the windshield is dry Dust that accumulates on a windshield might scratch the glass and or damage the wiper blades when wiping occurs on a dry windshield If it is necessary to operate the wipers in dry weather conditions always operate the windshield wipers with windshield washer fluid gt page 53 T If anything blocks the windshield wipers leaves snow etc switch them off immediately e For safety reasons stop the vehicle in a safe location remove the SmartKey from starter switch before attempting to remove any blockage e The hood must be opened gt page 250 be fore folding the wiper arms away from the windshield You could otherwise damage the hood and or the wiper arm e Remove the blockage e Turn the windshield wipers on again If windshield wipers fail to function at all in switch position I e set the combination switch to the next highest wiper speed e have the windshield wipers checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center Switching on windshield wipers gt Turn the combination switch in direc tion of arrow 2 to the desired position depending on the intensity of the rain O Windshield wipers off Intermittent wiping Il Normal wiper speed Ill Fast wiper speed Int
15. Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Left display O ows 1 Right display Reverse Lanp Ri ght Reverse Lanp Left Tail Lanp Left Auxiliary Bul b Tail Lanp Ri ght Auxiliary Bul b Li ghts Are Still n Sw tch off Ili ghts or renove key Possible cause consequence The right backup lamp is malfunctioning The left backup lamp is malfunctioning The left tail lamp is malfunc tioning This message will only appear if a critical number of LEDs have blown The right tail lamp is malfunc tioning This message will only appear if a critical number of LEDs have blown You have removed the Smart Key from the starter switch opened the driver s door and left the exterior lamps on The exterior lamp switch is set to R and you have forgotten to take out the SmartKey The parking lamps remain switched on Practical hints What to do if Foo Possible solution or Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Switch off the headlamps Switch off the headlamps Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch 349 Practical hints pe What to do if Left di
16. Filler hose Warning A Observe safety instructions on air pump label gt Unscrew the valve cap from tire valve Q Screw filler hose 0 onto tire valve 7 Close vent screw 9 on pressure gauge gt Insert electrical plug into vehicle cigarette lighter socket gt Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 gt page 40 gt Press I on electric air pump switch 8 The electric air pump should now switch on and inflate the tire T Do not operate the electric air pump longer than 8 minutes without interruption Otherwise it may overheat You may operate the air pump again after it has cooled off Practical hints Flat tire p After 5 minutes the pressure gauge must display at least 26 psi 1 8 bar The air hose can become hot during inflation Please exercise appropriate caution gt If this tire inflation pressure is not at tained turn off the electric air pump detach the filler hose from the tire valve and drive vehicle back and forth very slowly approximately 30 ft 10 m This serves to better distribute the TIREFIT sealant material inside the tire gt Unscrew the air pump s air hose from flange 6 of the TIREFIT container Screw air hose onto tire valve 7 Inflate the tire again gt D 367 b gt Practical hints Flat tire A If a tire inflation pressure of 26 psi 1 8 bar is not attained the tire is too severely damaged for TIREFI
17. Winter driving Snow chains Please observe the following guidelines T Use of snow chains is not permissible with when using snow chains tire sizes e Use of snow chains is not permissible 299 35 ZR19 96Y XL Summer tires only with all wheel tire combinations 295 30 ZR19 100Y XL Snow chains should only be driven on snow covered roads at speeds not to exceed 30 mph 50 km h Remove chains as soon as possible when driving on roads Snow chains should only be used on 295 35 ZR18 99 without snow the rear wheels Follow the manufac turer s mounting instructions a When driving with snow chains you may wish to deactivate the ESP gt page 86 before T If snow chains are mounted to the front setting the vehicle in motion This will improve wheels they may scrape against the body or axle the vehicle s traction components The tires or the vehicle could be damaged as a result e Only use snow chains that are approved by Mercedes Benz Any au thorized Mercedes Benz Center will be glad to advise you on this subject e Use of snow chains may be prohibited depending on location Always check local and state laws before installing snow chains 293 Operation fa Maintenance In order to maintain the performance and safety of your vehicle we strongly recom mend that you have your vehicle serviced by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center every 12 months even if the vehicle has covered less than 10000
18. a Suggested solution gt Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers Observe the traffic situation around you gt Read and observe messages in the multifunction display If the tire inflation pressure in the respec tive tire s has have been corrected the combination low tire pressure TPMS malfunction telltale goes out after a few minutes of driving gt Read and observe messages in the multifunction display gt Have the TPMS checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center After the malfunction has been remedied the combination low tire pressure TPMS malfunction telltale goes out after a few minutes of driving Continued on next page 315 Practical hints py What to do if Warning A N Each tire should be checked every other week when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle man ufacturer on the Tire and Loading Informa tion placard on the driver s door B pillar gt page 269 or if available the tire infla tion pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap If your vehicle has tires of a differ ent size than the size indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard or if avail able the tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires 316 As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitor ing system T
19. button 6 and the desired signal trans mitter button or Do not release the buttons until step 5 is completed Indicator lamp will flash first slowly and then rapidly Indicator lamp flashes immediately the first time the signal transmitter button is pro grammed If this button has already been programmed the indicator lamp will only start flashing after 20 seconds Controls in detail Useful features ia Step 5 gt After indicator lamp 1 changes froma slow to a rapidly flashing light release the hand held remote control button and the signal transmitter button Step 6 gt Press and hold the just trained signal transmitter button or and observe indicator lamp Q If the indicator lamp stays on constantly programming is complete and your device should activate when the respective signal transmitter button or is pressed and released a findicator lamp Q flashes rapidly for about 2 seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with programming steps 8 through 12 as your garage door opener may be equipped with the rolling code feature Step 7 gt To program the remaining two signal transmitter buttons repeat the steps above starting with step 3 223 Controls in detail ia Useful features Rolling code programming To train a garage door opener or other rolling code devices with the rolling code feature follow
20. e when the ignition is switched on e after about 30 minutes e if the battery voltage drops e if the coolant temperature is too low 195 Controls in detail a Open air Opening and closing the door windows The door windows are opened and closed electrically The switches for the door win dows are located on the door sill on the driver s side gt page 34 The switch for the passenger side is located on the door sill on the passenger side 1 Left window 2 Right window 196 Warning A N When closing the door windows make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure The closing of the door windows can be im mediately halted by releasing the switch or if switch was pulled past the resistance point and released by either pressing or pulling the respective switch If the window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you pulled the switch past the resistance point and released it to close the window the automatic reversal function will stop the window and open it slightly If the window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you are closing the window by pulling and holding the switch or by pressing and hold ing button on the SmartKey or by pressing and holding the button on the climate control panel the automatic reversal function will not operate When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey f
21. especially in wooded areas or on bridges The outside temperature is displayed in the left or right multifunction display gt page 117 depending on the setting for the standard display gt page 132 The temperature sensor is located in the front bumper area Due to its location the sensor can be affected by road or engine heat during idling or slow driving There fore the accuracy of the displayed temper ature can only be verified by comparison to a thermometer placed next the sensor not by comparison to external displays e g bank signs etc When moving the vehicle into colder ambi ent temperatures e g when leaving your garage you will notice a delay before the lower temperature is displayed A delay also occurs when ambient temper atures rise This prevents inaccurate tem perature indications caused by heat radiated from the engine during idling or slow driving Y Control system The control system is activated as soon as the SmartKey in the starter switch Is turned to position 1 The control system enables you to call up information about your vehicle and to change vehicle settings For example you can use the control sys tem to find out when your vehicle is next due for service to set the language for messages in the instrument cluster display and much more A A driver s attention to the road and traffic conditions must always be his her primary focus when driving Warning For you
22. mz Control system Redialing The control system stores the most recent ly dialed phone numbers This eliminates the need to search through your entire phone book gt Press button or repeatedly until you see the teL menu in the left multifunction display In the right multifunction display you will see the standby message 144 Press button F In the right multifunction display you see the first number in the redial memory Press button JA or Reg repeatedly until you see the desired name in the right multifunction display Press button F The control system dials the selected phone number Controls in detail Audio system a Vv Audio system Audio and telephone operation Operating safety Location of the audio system These instructions are intended to help The audio system control panel is located you become familiar with your Warning A N behind a cover in the upper part of the cen Mercedes Benz audio system They con ster console tain useful tips and a detailed description Any alterations made to electronic compo of the user functions nents can cause malfunctions The radio amplifier CD changer and Warning A N telephone are interconnected When one of the components is not operational or has In order to avoid distraction which could not been removed replaced properly the lead to an accident the driver should enter function of other components may be im system settings with the vehicle at
23. 1244 mm Vv Rims and tires Ba For safety reasons only use tires and rims which have been tested and approved by Mercedes Benz for use on SLR vehicles Tires approved by Mercedes Benz are developed to provide best possible performance in conjunc tion with the driving safety systems on your vehicle such as ABS or ESP T Using tires and rims other than those ap proved by Mercedes Benz can have detrimental effects such as e Poor handling characteristics e ncreased noise e ncreased fuel consumption Moreover tires and rims not approved by Mercedes Benz may under load exhibit dimen sional variations and different tire deformation characteristics that could cause them to come into contact with the vehicle body or axle parts This may result in damage to the tires or the vehicle Technical data Rims and tires i Further information on tires and rims is available at any authorized Mercedes Benz Cen ter A placard with the recommended tire infla tion pressures is located on the driver s door B pillar Some vehicles may have supplemental tire pressure information for driving at high speeds page 269 or for vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition If such information is provided it can be found on the placard located on the inside of the fuel filler flap The tire pressure should be checked regu larly and should only be adjusted on cold tires Follow tire manufacturer s maintenance recommend
24. 91 Safety and Security a Performance enhancement system Automatic mode This mode should be used for normal driv ing conditions gt Slide the Airbrake switch to position 2 With the ignition switched on the Airbrake swivels upwards to an angle of 5 and then returns to its initial position When the vehicle exceeds a speed of 60 mph 95 km h the Airbrake wing swivels up to an angle of 10 92 Rapid braking During hard braking at a speed of more than 60 mph 95 km h the Airbrake auto matically swivels up to an angle of 65 This allows you to achieve the best possi ble braking performance in an emergency This function is only available in manual and automatic mode Warning A N Hard braking activates the Airbrake which may block the view through the interior rear view mirror In this case monitor the traffic behind you through the exterior rear view mirrors Vv Anti theft systems Immobilizer The immobilizer prevents unauthorized persons from starting your vehicle When leaving the vehicle always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle The engine can be started by anyone with a valid SmartKey that is left inside the ve hicle Activating gt Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch Deactivating gt Switch on the ignition gt page 40 In case the engine cannot be started yet the vehicle s battery is charged the system is not operational Contact
25. Bass gt Regardless of operating mode press the aup key repeatedly until you see Bass on the display ae a ii min beer EXT P 2 60 4081 31 AUD gt Press or key to increase or decrease level or gt Press both and keys simultaneously to reset the Bass to its center flat level Treble gt Regardless of operating mode press the aupkey repeatedly until you see TREBLE ON the display ae TREBLE Ex AUD 4 P82 60 4082 31 gt Press or key to increase or decrease level or gt Press both and keys simultaneously to reset the Treble to its center flat level Controls in detail Audio system a Fader d Your vehicle may or may not have the fader function depending on the vehicle equipment and model gt Regardless of operating mode press the aupkey repeatedly until you see FADER ON the display FM FADER KEO UE AT AUD ORS P82 60 4083 31 gt Press F or r key to shift sound accord ingly to the front or rear speakers or gt Press both Fand rkeys simultaneously to reset the Fader to its center level 149 Controls in detail mz Audio system Balance gt Regardless of operating mode press the aupkey repeatedly until you see BALANcE On the display ExT AUD P82 60 4084 31 gt Press Lor r key to shift sound accord ingly to the left or right speakers or gt Press both Land rkeys simultaneously to reset the Balance to
26. For better orientation in the dark courtesy lamps will illuminate the interior of your vehicle in the following ways e When you open a door the driver s and passenger s footwell are illuminated e If the SmartKey is in starter switch position 1 the center console will be il luminated The center console is illuminated from the interior rear view mirror Controls in detail Lighting ia Trunk lamp The trunk lamp switches on if the trunk is opened If you leave the trunk open for an extended period of time the trunk lamp will switch off automatically after approximately 10 minutes cD The setting selected for the interior lighting is used for the trunk lighting as well 113 Controls in detail i Instrument cluster For a full view illustration of the instrument cluster see Instrument cluster gt page 28 1 Reset button The instrument cluster is activated when you e open a door e switch on the ignition e press the reset button Q e switch on exterior lamps 114 Opening a door will activate the instrument cluster only for about 30 seconds You can change the instrument cluster settings in the Instrument cluster submenu of the control system gt page 132 A No messages will be displayed if either the instrument cluster or the multifunction display is inoperative Warning As a result you will not be able to see infor mation about your driving conditions such
27. Instead of outside temperature 2 you can choose the digital soeedometer to be displayed in the left multifunction display by changing the setting in the sel ect Di s pl ay function of the instr menu gt page 132 gt Press button BV or BA to select the functions in the standard display menu ad uster SUb The following functions are available Function Page Calling up digitalspeedometeror 122 outside temperature Calling up maintenance service 294 display Checking tire inflation pressure 270 722 S menu The main screen of the 722S menu shows you the gear currently engaged as well as the engine oil temperature gt Press button or repeatedly until you see the 722S menu a gt ap P54 32 3899 3 C Engine oil temperature 2 Gear indicator l l Only Mercedes Benz SLR McLaren Roadster 72285 Q The engine oil temperature symbol flashes if the engine oil temperature has not yet reached 80 C During this time avoid driving at full engine speed i If the engine reaches the overspeed range and you are driving in the manual shift program MAN the menu will be shown in red In addition you will see up ext to gear indicator 2 as a reminder to upshift Use buttons RVA or EAN to select the fol lowing functions in the 722S menu Function Page 123 124 126 126 Vehicle supply voltage RACETIMER Overall analysis Lap analysis Controls in detail Control system a Vehicle supp
28. Unlocking in an emergency 358 Door windows see Power windows DOT 287 Drinking and driving 235 Driving 45 50 Abroad 244 Hints Electro hydraulic brake system 89 Hydroplaning 241 In winter 242 Instructions 45 235 Problems 54 Safety systems 82 systems 205 Through standing water 243 Tips Automatic transmission 173 Driving safety systems 82 ABS 82 BAS 84 Electro hydraulic brake system 87 Electronic traction system 86 ESP 84 Driving systems Cruise control 205 Dust cover 229 E Electric air pump 356 Electrical fuses 376 Electrical outlet see Power outlet Index Electrical system Technical data 390 Electro hydraulic brake system 82 87 406 Activation 88 Deactivation 89 Driving hints 89 Emergency operating mode 88 Messages in the multifunction display 334 Self check 89 339 Warning lamp 87 Electronic Stability Program see ESP Emergency calls 911 166 Tele Aid 216 Emergency operations Automatic transmission Limp Home Mode 180 Remote door unlock Tele Aid 220 Trunk lid Releasing from inside 104 Unlocking the vehicle 357 Emergency Tensioning Device see ETD Emergency In case of 413 index First aid kit 356 Flat tire 365 Hazard warning flasher 111 Instrument cluster Indicator lamps 304 Roadside Assistance 16 218 Towing the vehicle 373 Emission control 245 Information label 382 System warranties 14 Engine Break in recommendations 234 Cleaning 299 Compartment 250 M
29. adversely affect handling and fuel economy and are more likely to fail from being overheated Do not overinflate tires Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort wear unevenly increase stopping distance and result in sudden deflation blowout because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris potholes etc Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit or vehicle capacity weight as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver s door B pillar Overloading the tires can overheat them possibly causing a blowout Overload ing the tires can also result in handling or steering problems or brake failure Checking tire inflation pressure manually Follow the steps below to achieve correct tire inflation pressure gt Remove the cap from the valve on one tire gt Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve gt Read tire inflation pressure on tire gauge and check against the recom mended tire inflation pressure on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver s door B pillar gt page 269 If necessary add air to achieve the recommended tire inflation pressure If you have overfilled the tire release tire in flation pressure by pushing the metal stem of the valve with e g a tip of a pen Then recheck the tire inflation pressure with the tire gauge gt Install the valve cap gt Repeat this procedure for e
30. as speed or outside temperature warn ing indicator lamps malfunction warning messages or the failure of any systems Driving characteristics may be impaired If you must continue to drive do so with added caution Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Adjusting instrument cluster illumination Use the reset button to adjust the illu mination brightness for the instrument cluster and the switches on the center console a The instrument cluster illumination is dimmed or brightened to suit ambient light conditions To brighten illumination gt Turn the reset button 1 clockwise The instrument cluster illumination will brighten To dim illumination gt Turn the reset button Q counterclock wise The instrument cluster illumination will dim Coolant temperature gauge Warning UN e Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire You could be seriously burned e Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from other traffic Turn off the engine get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down Controls in detail Instrument cluster ia BE Excessive coolant temperature triggers the Resetting t
31. assistance must be summoned by other means The indicator lamp in SOS button 2 will flash until the emergency call is concluded 217 Controls in detail ia Useful features Roadside Assistance button The Roadside Assistance button is located in the center armrest cover gt Open the storage compartment be tween the backrests gt page 210 p gt Press and hold the button Q for longer than 2 seconds A call to a Mercedes Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher will be initiated The button will flash while the call is in progress The message Connecting Cal will appear in the multifunction display 218 When the connection is established the message cal Connect ed appears in the multifunction display The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number model color and lo cation subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals A voice connection between the Roadside Assistance dispatcher and the occupants of the vehicle will be established gt Describe the nature of the need for assistance The Mercedes Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified Mercedes Benz technician or arrange to tow your vehicle to the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center For services such as labor and or towing charges may apply Refer to the Roadside Assistance Manual for more information These programs are only available in the USA e Sign and Driv
32. dicated in the multi Roadside Assistance If tire cannot be temporarily repaired using function display TIREFIT contact Roadside Assistance gt Have the damaged wheel repaired or replaced at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center The tire inflation pres gt Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt avoiding abrupt steering and sure in one or more braking maneuvers Observe the traffic situation around you tires is already below S Check the tires If no damage visible check and adjust tire pres the minimum value sure as required The respective tire is in dicated in the multi function display Temporarily repair tire using TIREFIT gt page 365 or contact Roadside Assistance If tire cannot be temporarily repaired using TIREFIT contact Roadside Assistance gt Have the damaged wheel repaired or replaced at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center 351 Practical hints py What to do if Warning A N Do not drive with a flat tire A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle You may lose control of the vehicle Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build up and possibly a fire 352 Warning A N Have worn or damaged tires replaced in pairs front pair or rear pair and make sure the tires rotate in the direction specified gt page 262 Otherwise the driving stabili ty of the vehicle will be adversely affected especially when driving at high speeds Left disp
33. gt page 304 40 When you switch on the ignition the indicator and warning lamps except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indica tor lamps unless activated in the instrument cluster come on The indicator and warning lamps except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps if activated should go out when the engine is running This indicates that the respective systems are operational BE if the SmartKey is left in the starter switch position O for an extended period of time it can no longer be turned in the starter switch e Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch and reinsert If the SmartKey can still not be turned in the starter switch the starter battery may not be sufficiently charged e Have the starter battery checked and charged if necessary gt page 371 Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center To prevent accelerated battery discharge and a possible dead battery always remove the Smart Key from the starter switch when the engine is not in operation Vv Adjusting Warning A N All seat steering wheel and rear view mirror adjustments as well as fastening of seat belts must be done before the vehicle is put into motion Seats Warning VAN Do not adjust the driver s seat while driving Adjusting the seat while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat back in an excessi
34. interface Unless otherwise speci fied the descriptions refer to the audio system head unit Consult the separate telephone operating instructions that came with your mobile phone for information on how to place a 911 emergency call on the mobile phone A The 911 emergency call system is a public service Using it without due cause is a criminal offense Warning 166 The following conditions must be met for a 911 emergency call e Telephone must be switched on e The corresponding mobile communica tions network must be available ap Emergency calls may not be possible with all telephone networks or if certain network servic es and or telephone functions are active Check with your local service providers If you cannot make an emergency call you will have to initiate rescue measures yourself Placing a 911 emergency call using audio head unit with the phone locked gt Press button to switch to telephone operation You see cove in the audio display gt Press button J on the audio head unit until you see 911 In the audio display You see 911 in the audio display while the telephone establishes the connec tion gt Wait until the emergency call center answers then describe the emergency Placing a 911 emergency call using audio head unit with the phone unlocked gt Press button to switch to telephone operation gt Enter 911 using the number keypad on
35. safety and improved braking comfort Warning A N Never ignore a brake malfunction indicated in the speedometer display for example by the USA only or Canada only warning lamp Refer to the Practical hints section gt page 307 Also read and ob serve the messages in the instrument cluster multifunction display gt page 334 87 Safety and Security Eo Driving safety systems A The electro hydraulic brake system requires electrical power to operate Warning A malfunction in the vehicle s power supply or electrical system may impair brake sys tem operation and switch it into its emer gency operation mode In such a case the red brake warning lamp gt page 307 comes on and warning messages gt page 334 appear in the multifunction display while driving To brake the driver must then apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and depress the pedal much further to obtain the expected braking ef fect If necessary apply full pressure to the brake pedal Stopping distance is increased If there is a malfunction in the electro hy draulic brake system we recommend that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift dolly equipment A tow bar must be used if circumstances do not permit the use of the recommended towing methods and the vehicle requires towing with all four wheels on the ground Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on
36. stops flashing Activating Moist air can fog up the windows You can dehumidify the air with the air conditioning gt Press button again gt page 186 The indicator lamp on the button goes out The air conditioning uses the refrigerant R134a This refrigerant is free of CFCs which are harmful to the ozone layer BE if you press the button on the auto matic climate control panel and it starts to flash this indicates that the air conditioning is losing refrigerant The compressor has turned off The air conditioning cannot be turned on again Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center Residual heat and ventilation With the engine switched off it is possible to continue to heat or ventilate the interior for up to 30 minutes This feature makes use of the residual heat produced by the engine a How long the system will provide heating depends on the coolant temperature and the selected temperature The blower will run at low speed regardless of the air distribution control setting Activating gt Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or O or remove it from the starter switch gt Press button GEQY gt page 186 The indicator lamp on button comes on Controls in detail Automatic climate control ia Deactivating gt Press button GERY gt page 186 The indicator lamp on button goes out The residual heat is automatically turned off
37. to Play ep The beginning of a track can only be found if there is pause of at least 4 seconds between tracks 155 Controls in detail mz Audio system Track search backward gt Press IK button SEEK Rvowill appear in the display Track search will run the tape back ward to the start of the track currently playing and switch to Play Stopping track search gt Press NG EA Elo BB button The cassette will switch over to Play 156 Scanning e Starting scan iy a 35 P82 60 4074 31 gt Press button sc will appear in the display Each track on the cassette will be played briefly in ascending order e Stopping scan gt Press QA EN Eval EI o EI button The system will switch to Play Fast forward reverse e Starting cassette fast forward mode TAPE Euni m PS Ps DET ee ee ee a a pm da I Pe be ie A DO ie i Dhi i Wi LL i a P 2 60 4075 31 gt Press EN button FORWARD Will appear in the display e Starting cassette fast reverse mode gt Press B button REW ND Will appear in the display The cassette will automatically switch over to the play mode at the end or beginning of the tape e Stopping the cassette fast forward reverse mode gt Press PN Eval Halo BB button The cassette will switch over to the play mode Skipping blank sections skip blank Switching on the skip blank function gt Press the ss key sB Is highligh
38. 117 Ba Allow engine to warm up under low load use Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached gt page 311 Shift into park position P or reverse gear R only when the vehicle is stopped Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period when driving off on slippery road surfaces This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty When the gear selector lever is in drive position D you can influence transmission shifting by e limiting the gear range e changing gears manually Gear selector lever positions Effect Park position Gear selector lever position when the vehicle is parked Place gear selector lever in park position P only when vehicle is stopped The park position is not intended to serve as a brake when the vehicle is parked Rather the driver should always set the parking brake in addition to placing the gear selector lever in park position P to secure the vehicle The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter switch with the gear selector lever in park position P With the SmartKey removed the gear selector lever is locked in park position P Effect Reverse gear Place gear selector lever in re verse gear R only when vehicle is stopped Controls in detail Automatic transmission a Effect Neutral No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive axle When the brakes
39. 177 gt D Controls in detail a Automatic transmission bb i To avoid overrevving the engine when down Shifting the transmission will not shift to a lower gear if the engine s max speed would be exceeded Extending gear range gt Briefly pull right shift paddle The transmission will shift to the next higher gear as permitted by the shift program This action simultaneously extends the gear range of the transmission i If you press on the accelerator when the en gine has reached its rom limit the transmission will upshift beyond any gear range limit selected Canceling gear range limit gt Pull and hold right shift paddle 2 until preappears in the right multi function display The transmission will shift from the current gear range directly to gear range D 178 Shifting into optimal gear range gt Pull and hold left shift paddle The transmission will automatically se lect the gear range suited for optimal acceleration and deceleration This may involve shifting down one or more gears Manual shift program In addition to the shift program C or S your vehicle is equipped with the MAN shift program In the manual shift program MAN system controlled automatic gearshifting is switched off and you need to change the gears by manually upshifting or downshift ing using the steering wheel gearshift pad dies gt page 177 or the gear selector lever gt page 175 Ba Allow engin
40. 18 For additional information see Tire speed rating gt page 279 277 Operation re Tires and wheels Rim diameter The rim diameter gt page 277 is the diameter of the bead seat not the diameter of the rim edge Rim diameter is indicated in inches in Tire load rating The tire load rating gt page 277 is a numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can support For example a load rating of 91 corre sponds to a maximum load of 1356 Ib 615 kg the tire is designed to support see also Maximum tire load gt page 282 where the maximum load as sociated with the load index is indicated in kilograms and lb 278 Warning A N The tire load rating must always be at least half of the GAWR gt page 287 of your vehicle Otherwise tire failure may be the re sult which may cause an accident and or serious injury to you or others Always replace rims and tires with the same designation manufacturer and type as shown on the original part Warning A N Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit or vehicle capacity weight as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard located on the drivers door B pillar Overloading the tires can over heat them possibly causing a blowout Overloading the tires can also result in han dling or steering problems or brake failure For additional information on tire load rating see Load identificati
41. 299 Operating 196 synchronizing 198 Practical hints 302 Premium unleaded gasoline 396 Problems While driving 54 420 With the vehicle 21 Product information 13 Production options weight 287 Program mode selector switch Automatic transmission 175 406 PSI 288 Push starting 370 R RACETIMER see Control system menus 7228 Radio Operation 151 Selecting stations 127 Radio transmitters 244 Reading lamp 113 Rear fog lamp see Fog lamps Rear lamps see Tail lamps Rear view mirrors see Mirrors Rear window defroster 183 Recommended tire inflation pressure 288 Recovery services Stolen vehicle Tele Aid 221 Redial memory 144 Refrigerant Air conditioning 396 Refueling 247 Regular checks 248 Remote control SmartKey 98 Remote door unlock Tele Aid 220 Replacing bulbs 361 Reporting safety defects 22 Research Octane Number see RON Reset button in Instrument cluster 114 294 Residual heat utilization 195 Restraint systems 60 Airbags 60 62 Child restraints 60 Children in the vehicle 76 Emergency Tensioning Device ETD 60 75 Seat belts 60 72 Reverse gear position Automatic transmission 169 Rims 288 385 Roadside Assistance RON 247 406 16 218 Roof rack 230 Roof see Soft top S Safety Driving safety systems 82 Occupant 60 Reporting defects 22 Safety belts see Seat belts Seat belt force limiter 75 Seat belts 60 Children in the vehicle 76 Fastening seat belts 45 Message in the multifunction displa
42. 40 the RACE TIMER stops timing Timing is resumed when you switch the ignition back on gt page 40 or restart the engine gt page 47 and then press the button Saving lap time and starting a new lap i You can save up to nine laps gt Press button EE while the timer is running The intermediate time will be shown for 5 seconds Press button EE within the next 5 seconds The intermediate time shown will be saved as a lap time The RACETIMER begins timing the new lap The new lap begins to be timed as soon as the intermediate time is called up a P54 32 3902 3 1 L2 00 13 55 og j 54 1 Best lap time 2 Lap number 3 RACETIMER 4 Gear indicator Resetting current lap gt Press button while the timer is running The timer stops Press button Sg The lap time is reset to 0 Controls in detail Control system a Deleting all laps It is not possible to delete a single saved lap gt Press button while the timer is running The timer stops Press the reset button in the instru ment cluster twice gt page 114 Press button ES The timer starts The saved laps are deleted When you switch off the engine the RACETIMER will be reset to O after 30 seconds All laps are deleted 125 Controls in detail an Control system Overall analysis i These functions are only available if you have saved at least one lap and have stopped the RACET
43. 41 F 5 C At outside temperatures above 79 F 26 C the system will not automatically switch back to outside air 193 Controls in detail a Automatic climate control Air conditioning The air conditioning cooling function is operational when the engine is running and cools the vehicle interior down to the se lected temperature In addition the cool ing function dehumidifies the air in the vehicle interior thus preventing the windows from fogging up A If you turn off the cooling function the vehicle will not be cooled when weather conditions are warm The windows can fog up more quickly Window fogging may impair visibility and endanger you and or others Warning i Condensation may drip out from underneath the vehicle This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction 194 Deactivating It is possible to deactivate the cooling function of the automatic climate control system The air in the vehicle will then no longer be cooled or dehumidified gt Press button gt page 186 The indicator lamp on the button comes on The cooling function switches off after a short delay Ge Under certain circumstances e g when the fuel system is too hot and needs to be cooled the cooling switches on again automatically The red lamp on the button the automatic climate control panel flashes After cooling the fuel system sufficiently the air conditioning switches off again and the red lamp
44. A N If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp does not illuminate or remains out with the weight of a typical 12 month old child 318 Possible cause consequence The system is malfunctioning in a standard child restraint or less on the passenger seat do not transport a child on the passenger seat until the system has been repaired Suggested solution gt Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat and check installation of the child seat Make sure that no objects applying supplemental weight onto the seat are present If the passenger front air bag off indi cator lamp remains out have the sys tem checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Do not transport a child on the pas senger seat until the system has been repaired Also read and observe any messages in the multifunction display and follow corrective steps gt page 324 Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display Warning and malfunction messages appear in the multifunction display located in the instrument cluster Certain warning and malfunction messag es are accompanied by an audible signal Address these messages accordingly and follow the additional instructions given in this Operator s Manual Selecting the vehicle status message memory menu in the control system gt page 128 displays both cleared and uncleared messages High priority messages appear in the multifunctio
45. Be careful when entering the vehicle with wet shoe soles you could slip on it T The door windows will not open or close if the battery is discharged or the door windows are impeded by ice In this case open or close the door with increased caution Do not attempt to force the door opened or closed Doing so may damage the door seals or the side window gt Enter the vehicle and insert the SmartKey in the starter switch For more information see Locking and unlocking gt page 98 39 Getting started az Unlocking Starter switch positions Warning A N When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle A child s unsupervised access to a vehicle could Starter switch result in an accident and or serious personal injury 0 For removing SmartKey 1 Power supply for some consumers 2 Ignition power supply for all consum ers and drive position All lamps ex cept high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated in the instrument cluster come on If a lamp in the instru ment cluster fails to come on when the ignition is switched on have it checked and replaced if necessary If a lamp in the instrument cluster remains on after starting the engine or comes on while driving see Lamps in instrument clus ter
46. DC elec trical accessories designed for use with a stan dard cigarette lighter plug type to the 12 volt power outlets in your vehicle whenever possible 211 Controls in detail a Useful features Power outlet The power outlet is located on the left side in the trunk P82 00 2530 31 1 Power outlet gt Switch on the ignition gt page 40 gt Flip up cover and insert electrical plug cigar lighter type i The power outlet can be used to accommo date 12V DC electrical accessories e g air pump auxiliary lamps up to a maximum of 180 W or as a battery charging point gt page 371 212 Telephone Your vehicle is equipped with Bluetooth The Bluetooth interface is located in the storage compartment between the back rests gt page 210 A Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built in or attached antenna i e with out being connected to an external antenna from inside the vehicle while the engine is running Doing so could lead to a malfunc tion of the vehicle s electronic system pos sibly resulting in an accident and personal injury Warning Radio transmitters such as a portable tele phone or a citizens band unit should only be used inside the vehicle if they are con nected to an antenna that is installed on the outside of the vehicle The external antenna must be approved by Mercedes Benz Please contact an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center for i
47. Introduction cc cece cece ecececeecees 12 Product information ccesceceeees 13 Operators Manual ccccecceeeeeeees 14 Service and warranty information 14 Important notice for California retail buyers and lessees of Mercedes Benz automobiles 15 Maintenance cceceecececececeecees 16 Roadside Assistance 0ee008 16 Change of address or ownership 16 Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada wantersoiseeunpensensieventeretest 17 Mercedes Benz SLR McLaren COMPIIANCE enrrenaracieiras ins 17 Where to find it cee cceeseeceeeeeseeees 18 SVMDOL S shone oraaeaseieransneaeetvenernececnonnncnat 19 Operating Safety cecceceseceeeeeeeees 20 Proper use of the vehicle 20 Problems with your vehicle 6 21 Reporting safety defects e 22 Reporting safety defects 22 Vehicle data recording sseccceeees 23 Information regarding electronic recording CEVICES c0scccceseeeees 23 At a glance vin siacetestcencieacdanenieiedevarabaadeos 24 COCO a nee eee ene eer eon ee 26 Instrument CluSter csssccccesseseees 28 Multifunction steering wheel 30 Center console ccccceseeecesecccseeees 31 Upper part sunina 31 Lower part sessesssessessessessessesseeseees 32 Overhead control panel cccee eee 33 Control panel on the do
48. On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi cle control Your vehicle s ABS will not pre vent this type of loss of control Warning i In order to avoid damage to the transmission e Wait for the gear selection process to com plete before setting the vehicle in motion e Place the gear selector lever in reverse gear Ror park position P only when the vehi cle is stopped Release the brake pedal Carefully depress the accelerator pedal T If you hear a warning signal and the mes sage Rel ease Parki ng Brake appears in the multifunction display when driving off you have forgotten to release the parking brake Release the parking brake gt page 49 After a cold start the transmission engag es at a higher revolution This allows the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature earlier T Do not run cold engine at high engine speed Running a cold engine at high engine speed may Shorten the service life of the engine T Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brakes reduces engine performance and causes premature brake and drivetrain wear Once the vehicle is in motion the automatic central locking system engages You can deactivate the automatic locking using the control system gt page 139 You can open a locked door from the inside Open door only when conditions are sa
49. Parcel net 210 sizes 386 Installing reinstalling 375 Trunk lid rack 230 Snow chains 293 Traction 86 175 241 288 Turn signals 51 Speed rating 242 277 279 288 Transmission gear selector lever see Gear Additional in mirrors 362 Storing 262 selector lever Indicatorlamps 29 Temperature 269 285 Transmission see Automatic transmission Messages in the multifunction Terminology 286 Transporting the vehicle 375 display 347 TIN 281 Traveling abroad 244 Replacing bulbs 361 TIREFIT kit 365 Tread 288 Turning off the engine 56 Traction 241 285 Tread depth 261 292 U Tread depth 261 292 Treadwear indicators 288 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Treadwear indicators 261 Trip computer 139 Standards 289 Vehicle maximum load on 289 Trip odometer 115 117 Units Setting Wear pattern 289 Trunk a l Digital speedometer 132 Winter 292 Closing 103 i Unleaded gasoline Premium 247 396 Top tether see Children in the vehicle Emergency release 104 Useful features 209 Total load limit 288 Lamp 113 Tow away alarm 95 Lock 102 V Message in the multifunction Vehicle display 353 Batteries 256 Control system Settings menu 129 424 Dimensions 391 Locking unlocking 39 57 98 105 Modifications and alterations Operat ing safety 20 Towing 373 Transporting 375 Unlocking in an emergency 357 Vehicle care 297 Vehicle Identification Number see VIN Vehicle lighting 249 Vehicle literature portfolio 356 Vehicle loading 262 Load limit 263 Roof and tr
50. This Operator s Manual is designed to pro vide comprehensive support information for you the vehicle operator Each section has its own reference color At a glance Here you will find an overview of your vehi cle s interior features ER Getting started Here you will find all the information you need for your first drive You should read this section first if this is your first Mercedes Benz vehicle or if you are renting or borrowing this vehicle DE Safety and Security Here you will find descriptions of the safety and security features in your vehicle DEE E Controls in detail Here you will find detailed information about the equipment installed on your ve hicle This section expands on the Getting started section and also describes techni cal innovations If you are already familiar with the basic functions of your vehicle this section will be of particular interest to you a Operation Here you will find all the information you need for the proper operation of your vehicle E Practical hints This section provides fast assistance for dealing with problems you may encounter eel Technical data All important technical data for your vehicle can be found in this section ei Indexes The glossary provides explanations of the most important technical terms The table of contents and the index are de signed to help you find information quickly and
51. V belts belt one shown in purple belt two shown in black 4 Idler pulley 2 Automatic belt tensioner 3 Power steering pump 4 Air conditioning compressor Idler pulley 6 Crankshaft 7 Coolant pump Generator alternator 9 Idler pulley Automatic belt tensioner 1 Supercharger Technical data Layout of poly V belt drive a 383 Technical data a Engine Model Engine Mode of operation No of cylinders Bore Stroke Total piston displacement Compression ratio Output acc to SAE J 1349 Maximum torque acc to SAE J 1349 Maximum engine speed Firing order Poly V belt The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle See an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment Mercedes Benz SLR McLaren Roadster 199 476 JOS 4 stroke engine gasoline injection 8 3 82 in 97 00 mm 3 60 in 92 00 mm 331 8 cu in 5439 cm 8 8 1 617 hp 6500 rpm 460 kW 6500 rpm 575 b ft 3250 5000 rpm 780 Nm 3250 5000 rpm 7000 rpm 1 5 4 2 6 3 7 8 2415 mm 1244 mm 2 Premium fuel required Performance may vary with fuel octane rating 384 Mercedes Benz SLR McLaren Roadster 722 S 199 476 155 4 stroke engine gasoline injection 8 3 82 in 97 00 mm 3 60 in 92 00 mm 331 8 cu in 5439 cm 8 8 1 641 hp 6500 rpm 478 kW 6500 rpm 605 b ft 4000 rpm 820 Nm 4000 rpm 7000 rpm 1 5 4 2 6 3 7 8 2415 mm
52. When disposing of the ETD our safety in structions must be followed These are avail able at any authorized Mercedes Benz Center 75 Safety and Security is Occupant safety Children in the vehicle If an infant or child is traveling with you in the vehicle gt Secure the child using an infant or child restraint appropriate to the age and size of the child gt Make sure the infant or child is proper ly secured at all times while the vehicle is in motion Infant and child restraint seats and information on choosing an appropriate restraint system can be obtained from any Mercedes Benz Center Warning A N Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle even if they are secured in a child restraint system The children could e injure themselves on parts of the vehicle e be seriously or fatally injured through excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold 76 Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight The child restraint system s metal parts for example could become very hot and the child could be burned on these parts If children open a door they could e injure other persons e get out of the car and injure themselves or be injured by following traffic Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the passenger compartment unless they are firmly secured in place For more information please refer to the Useful features section gt page 209 through gt page 210 Unsec
53. a stand paired still and operate the system only when road This condition might seriously impair the and traffic conditions permit Always pay full operating safety of your vehicle attention to traffic conditions first before l Cover i y We recommend that you have any service operating system controls while driving gt Briefly press on the lower part of work on electronic components carried out Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center cover Q approximately 50 km h your car is cover ing a distance of 44 feet approximately 14 m every second The cover opens automatically 145 Controls in detail mz Audio system Operating and display elements GHI JKL MNO T 8 9 PQRS TUV WXYZ PB2 60 4625 31 146 Item CD mode selector Manual tuning radio Fast forward reverse cassette CD Speed dialing memory telephone Radio mode selector Display panel Cassette compartment behind display panel Page 158 151 156 160 1695 151 Item Alpha numeric keypad Band selection station buttons radio CD selection CD Telephone number entry retrieving speed dialing memory telephone Scanning radio cassette CD Function button Light emitting diode Page 151 160 163 153 156 160 152 0000 Controls in detail Audio system Item Function keys Cassette eject Cassette mode
54. adversely affect ride comfort increase stopping distance A Warning Follow recommended tire inflation pressures Do not overinflate tires Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort wear unevenly increase stopping distance and result in sudden deflation blowout because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris potholes etc 276 Tire labeling Besides tire name sales designation and manufacturer name a number of markings can be found on a tire Following are some explanations for the markings on your vehicle s tires P40 10 3561 31 1 Uniform Quality Grading Standards gt page 284 2 DOT Tire Identification Number TIN gt page 281 3 Maximum tire load gt page 282 4 Maximum tire inflation pressure gt page 283 Manufacturer 6 Tire ply material gt page 286 7 Tire size designation load and speed rating gt page 277 Load identification gt page 280 9 Tire name i For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration For more information see Rims and tires gt page 385 Tire size designation load and speed rating C Tire width 2 Aspect ratio in 3 Radial tire code 4 Rim diameter Tire load rating 6 Tire speed rating i For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires is specific to eac
55. appears in the multifunction display gt page 117 Maintenance service term exceeded If you have exceeded the suggested main tenance service term you will see the fol lowing message in the right multifunction display Servi ce Exceeded By Days Servi ce Exceeded By Mles Any authorized Mercedes Benz Center will reset the maintenance service indicator following a completed maintenance service Calling up the maintenance service due date vy Switch on the ignition gt page 40 Press button or on the multifunction steering wheel repeated ly until the standard display appears in the multifunction display gt page 117 gt Press button BV or PAM on the multifunction steering wheel until the maintenance service indicator service symbol appears in the left multi function display and the maintenance service deadline appears in the right multifunction display Operation Maintenance i If the vehicle is not be used for a longer pe riod of time do not disconnect the consumer battery Instead maintain the condition of the battery by using the battery charger approved by Mercedes Benz for use on the SLR and supplied with the car page 372 This charger automat ically controls the charge rate and can be left connected to the car for long periods without damage to the battery If the battery supplying the vehicle s electrical consumers is disconnected the days of discon nection will not b
56. as necessary to have the vehicle moved to a safe location where the recommended towing methods can be em ployed i When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground the gear selector lever must be in neutral position N and the SmartKey must be in starter switch position 2 When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground the vehicle may be towed only for dis tances up to 30 miles 50 km and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph 50 km h ay To be certain to avoid a possibility of dam age to the transmission however we recom mend the drive shaft be disconnected at the rear axle drive flange for any towing beyond a short tow to a nearby garage Warning Practical hints Towing the vehicle po A If circumstances require towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground always tow with a tow bar if the engine will not run there is a malfunction in the electro hy draulic brake system there is a malfunction in the power supply or in the vehicle s electrical system This is necessary to adequately control the towed vehicle Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground make certain that the SmartKey is in starter switch position 2 373 Practical hints ES Towing the vehicle AN The brake system requires electrical power to operate Warning A malfunction in the vehicle s power supply or electrical system may impair brake sys tem operation and switch it into its emer gency
57. belts available Be sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly Warning A N Read and observe the additional warning no tices printed in the Safety and Security gt page 64 and gt page 72 With a smooth motion pull the seat belt from seat belt holder Q Place the shoulder portion of the seat belt across the top of your shoulder and the lap portion across your hips restrained with a separate seat belt Never gt Push latch plate 2 into buckle until use a seat belt for more than one person at it clicks anne gt If necessary tighten the lap portion to Warning J Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous You could slide under the seat belt in a collision If you slide under it the seat belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck That could cause se rious or even fatal injuries The seat back rest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright posi tion and the seat belt is properly positioned a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion up Proper use of seat belts Do not twist the seat belt when fastening Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder portion is located as close as possible to the middle of the shoulder it should not touch the neck Never pass the shoulder portion of the seat belt under your arm 1 Seat belt holder 2 Latch plate 3 Buckle 4 Release button
58. counter clockwise as far as it will go The soft top is locked gt Fold up the handle Controls in detail Open air 7 Wind screen The wind screen is a wind protection device for driving with the soft top open i Do not pull on the wind screen to close the trunk lid Otherwise the wind screen or the trim panel could be damaged The wind screen is stored on the inside of the trunk lid 1 Wind screen 2 Release 201 Controls in detail a Open air gt Presson releases 2 indirection ofthe Removing arrow and pull wind screen Q out You can close the soft top without remov upwards ing the wind screen Installing P77 25 2017 31 C Release Press on releases 1 in direction of the arrow and pull the wind screen out upwards Mounting gt 2 Recess gt Insert mountings Q into recesses 2 gt Store the wind screen back into the The mountings must audibly engage trunk lid gt Make sure the mountings are properly engaged 202 Linkage covers T Always remove the soft top linkage covers before closing the soft top You could otherwise damage the covers or the linkages The covers are located in a bag that is lo cated in the trunk gt Take out bag in direction of arrow Controls in detail Open air 7 Installing The following describes the installation of the driver s side cover The installation of the passenger side cover is
59. deactivated the passenger front air bag and the passenger knee air bag e the message Front Passeng Airbag Enabl ed See Qper Manual or the message Front Passeng Ai rbag Di sabl ed See Qper Man ual should not appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is unoccupied Wait at least 60 seconds for the system to complete the necessary check cycles and to make sure neither message appears in the multifunction display If above conditions are met you can occupy the passenger seat again Depending on the passenger classification sensed by the OCS gt page 67 the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out If above conditions are not met the system is not working properly Have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Warning A lamp remains out even after performing the small individuals use the passenger seat i above corrective steps do not have any until the system has been repaired If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator children 12 years old and under and other 325 Practical hints py What to do if Left display Front Passeng Ai rbag 326 Right display D sabl ed See Oper Manual Possible cause consequence Possible solution The passenger front air bag is deactivated while driving even though an adult or someone larger than a small individual is occupying the passenger seat Forces acting on the seat may make the system sense
60. detail Control system ia Dialing a number from the phone book Press button EAN or Re repeatedly Ifthe connection is successful and this until you see the desired name in the feature is supported by your network right multifunction display provider the name of the party if stored in your phone book you are calling and the duration of the call will appear in the multifunction display If your telephone is ready to receive calls you may select and dial a number from the phone book at any time The stored names are displayed in gt Press button or repeatedly ascending or descending alphabetical i order until you see the teL menu in the left multifunction display f you press and hold FAY or KR for long In the right multifunction display you er ian SORON ue Se eiols pay lt q TEL gt lt 00 0i 01 15 S through the list of names until you release the Newman will see the standby message button again rm n gt Press button BaN or RA Cancel the quick search mode by pressing Fay er The control system reads the phone gt Press button Gaal e The control system stores the dialed book which is stored in the telephone l P The system dials the selected phone number in the redial memory This may take several minutes In the 5 number right multifunction display you will see this message Pi ease wait When the message Pi ease wait disap pears the phone book has been loaded 143 Controls in detail
61. e open a door The interior lighting and the entry exit lamps remain switched off in darkness e remove the SmartKey from the even when you starter switch e unlock the vehicle In addition the entry exit lamps in the door come on when you open a door e open a door The interior lighting switches off auto e remove the SmartKey from the matically following a preset time delay starter switch 1 Left hand reading lamp on off 2 Right hand reading lamp on off 3 Interior lighting on off 4 Automatic control on off For more information see Setting in terior lighting delayed switch off gt page 137 i An interior lamp switched on manually does i If a door remains open the interior lamps not go out automatically switch off automatically after approximately Leaving an interior lamp switch in the ON posi 5 minutes tion for extended periods of time with the engine turned off could result in a discharged battery 112 Manual control Switching interior lighting on gt Press switch 3 The interior lighting switches on Switching interior lighting off gt Press switch 3 again The interior lighting switches off Reading lamps The reading lamps are integrated into the interior rear view mirror gt Press reading lamp switch Q or to switch on the desired reading lamp gt Press reading lamp switch or again to switch off the respective reading lamp Courtesy lighting
62. easily The following publications are part of your vehicle documentation e this Operator s Manual e the Maintenance Booklet Separate operating instructions will be provided as required depending on the equipment options installed in your vehicle Y Symbols Trademarks Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG Inc ESP is a registered trademark of Daimler HomeLink is a registered trademark of Prince a Johnson Controls Company The following symbols are found in this Operator s Manual T Highlights hazards that may result in dam Warning Optional equipment is identified with an asterisk A Warning notices draw your attention to haz ards that may endanger your health or life or the health or life of others age to your vehicle i Helpful hints or further information you may find useful gt This symbol points to instructions for you to follow gt A number of these symbols appearing in succession indicates a multiple step procedure gt page gt D gt D Di spl ay Introduction Symbols This symbol tells you where to look for further information on a topic This continuation symbol marks a warning which is continued on the next page This continuation symbol marks a procedure which is continued on the next page This symbol is used to indicate cross references to term definitions Words appearing in the multi function display and au
63. effectiveness of the brakes by applying above normal braking pressure at high speeds Please perform this braking proce dure three times This will also enhance the grip of the brake pads If the noise continuous contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Warning A N Make sure not to endanger any other road users when carrying out these braking maneuvers Refer to the description of the Brake Assist System BAS gt page 84 Operation Driving instructions koa Downhill grades Wet roads To help prevent brake disk corrosion after _ driving on wet road surfaces particularly ea When driving down long and steep grades relieve the load on the brakes by shifting into a Warning A N eae toana ie ee ane me lower gear to use the engine s braking power vehicle with considerable force prior to This helps prevent overheating of the brakes and After driving in heavy rain for some time parking The heat generated serves to dry reduces brake pad wear the brakes without applying the brakes or through wa ter deep enough to wet brake components Continuous or hard braking the first braking action may be somewhat Salty roads reduced and increased pedal pressure may Warning A N be necessary to obtain expected braking Warning A N effect Maintain a safe distance from Resting your foot on the brake pedal will vehicles in front A layer of salt on the brake discs and the cause excessive and premature wear of the brake linings may
64. exceeded 295 Manual headlamp mode 107 Manual shift program Automatic transmission 178 Map pocket in passenger footwell 209 Maximum load rating Tires 287 Maximum loaded vehicle weight 287 Maximum tire inflation pressure 287 Mechanical key 357 Menus see Control system menus 418 Messages on board computer Soft top 354 Messages in display see Multifunction dis play messages 319 Microphone Hands free 33 Mirrors 181 Adjusting 43 Auto dimming 181 Exterior rear view mirror 44 Interior rear view mirror 44 Mobile phone Pairing with Bluetooth interface 213 MON 247 405 Motor Octane Number see MON Multifunction display 117 405 Changing settings see Control system menus and Control system submenus 117 Left 29 Right 29 Selecting language 133 Multifunction display messages ABS 321 322 ACL malfunction 328 Airbrake 332 Battery Vehicle 332 Brake pads 339 Coolant 340 Coolant level 340 Differential 343 Doors 353 Electro hydraulic brake system 334 Engine oil 344 ESP 323 Fuel system 344 Hood 353 Lamps 346 Parking brake 339 Passenger front airbag 326 Reserve fuel 345 Seat belt 353 Service brake 339 SmartKey 345 Telephone 345 Tires 351 Trunk lid 353 Washer fluid 354 Multifunction steering wheel 405 Button operation 118 30 118 N Net parcel 210 Neutral gear position Automatic transmission 169 Night security illumination 109 136 Normal occupant weight 287 Number Vehicle Identification
65. fluid gt Press combination switch in direction of arrow past the resistance point The windshield wipers operate with washer fluid gt To prevent smears on the windshield or noisy chattering wiper blades wipe with wind shield washer fluid every now and then even when it is raining For information on filling up the washer reservoir see Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system gt page 257 53 Getting started Driving Problems while driving The engine runs erratically and misfires e An ignition cable may be damaged e The engine electronics may not be operating properly e Unburned gasoline may have entered the catalytic converter and damaged it Give very little gas Have the problem repaired by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible 54 The coolant temperature is above 248 F 120 C The coolant is too hot and is no longer cooling the engine gt Stop the vehicle as soon as possible in a safe location and turn off the engine Allow engine and coolant to cool off gt Check the coolant level and add coolant if necessary gt page 255 In case of accident If the vehicle is leaking gasoline gt Do not start the engine under any circumstances gt Notify local fire and or police authorities If the extent of the damage cannot be determined gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center or call Roadside Assistance If no dam
66. has been gt Check the fuel filler cap gt page 247 detected in the fuel system The fuel filler cap may not be closed properly or the fuel sys gt Close the fuel filler cap tem may be leaky If it is closed properly If it is not closed properly gt Have the fuel system checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center You have not yet entered your gt Enter the PIN for your SIM card PIN in you telephone You have forgotten to remove gt Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch the SmartKey No additional code available for gt Have the SmartKey checked Contact an authorized the SmartKey Mercedes Benz Center 345 Practical hints pe What to do if Left display 0 e a 346 Right display Possible cause consequence 3rd Brake Lanp The high mounted brake lamp is malfunctioning Brake Lanp The left brake lamp is malfunc Left tioning This message will only Auxiliary Bulb GQ appear if a critical number of LEDs have blown Brake Lanp The right brake lamp is mal Ri ght functioning This message will Auxiliary Bulb Only appear if a critical number of LEDs have blown Front Fogl anp The left front fog lamp is Left malfunctioning Front Fogl anp The right front fog lamp IS Ri ght malfunctioning Rear Fogl anp The left rear fog lamp is Left malfunctioning H gh Beam The left high beam lamp is Left malfunctioning Hi gh Beam The right high beam lamp is Ri ght malfunctioning
67. inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Do not forget that the brake system requires electrical energy and may be operating with restricted capability If it is in order Considerably greater brake pedal force is required and the pedal travel is longer The stop ping distance is increased If necessary apply full pressure Read and observe additional messages in the to the brake pedal multifunction display The starter battery has been gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center charged with a battery charger or jump started gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center imme diately Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced braking responsiveness There is a malfunction inthe gt Have the system checked at an authorized electronic system Mercedes Benz Center immediately 333 Practical hints py What to do if Left display Right display Possible cause consequence Reduced Brake Eff ect Depress brake pedal fully The electro hydraulic brake system is in emergency opera tion mode Considerably great er brake pedal force is required and the pedal travel is longer The stopping distance is in creased If necessary apply full to do so pressure to the brake pedal Possible solution gt Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe Apply the parking brake gt page 55 Do not drive any f
68. inside You can open the trunk from the inside if the vehicle is stationary A minimum height clearance of 5 5 ft 1 66 m is required to open the trunk lid The switch is located on the lower part of the center console 1 Remote trunk opening switch BE Always make sure that there is sufficient overhead clearance gt Press switch Q until the trunk lid unlocks and opens slightly gt Lift the trunk lid The trunk can also be opened using button on the SmartKey or from its inside in an emergency see Trunk emer gency release gt page 104 Closing the trunk lid Warning A N To prevent possible personal injury always keep hands and fingers away from the trunk opening when closing the trunk lid Be espe cially careful when small children are around Make sure the trunk is closed when the en gine is running and while driving Among other dangers such as blocked visibility exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior These fumes are damaging to your health Controls in detail Locking and unlocking ai P72 20 2627 91 1 Handle gt Lower trunk lid by firmly pulling on handle Q BE Do not pull on the Airbrake or the wind screen Otherwise the Airbrake the wind screen or the trim panel could be damaged a Do not place the SmartKey in the open trunk You may lock yourself out Ifthe vehicle was previously centrally locked the trunk lid will lock automatically after clo
69. is the drivers responsibility to calibrate the TPMS on the recommended cold infla tion pressure Underinflated tires affect the ability to steer or brake the vehicle You might lose control over the vehicle If you want to set new reference values manually gt Using the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver s door B pillar gt page 263 or if available the sup plemental tire inflation pressure information on the inside of the fuel filler flap gt page 247 make sure the tire inflation pressure of all four tires is correct Restart the TPMS after adjusting the tire in flation pressure to the inflation pressure recom mended for the vehicle operating condition Tire pressure should only be adjusted on cold tires Observe the recommended tire inflation pres sure on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver s door B pillar gt page 263 Some vehicles may have supplemental tire inflation pressure information for driving at high speeds gt page 247 or for vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition gt page 247 If such information is provided it can be found on the inside of the fuel filler flap gt Press button or on the mul tifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the standard display menu appears in the multifunction display gt page 122 gt Press button FA or Red repeatedly until the current inflation pressures for Press the button Operat
70. load rating G gt page 277 and the tire speed rating gt page 277 If your tire includes ZR in the size designation and no service description G and gt page 277 is given the tire manufacturer must be consulted for the maximum speed capability If a service description G and 6 gt page 277 is given the speed capa bility is limited by the speed symbol in the service description Example 245 40 ZR18 97Y In this example 97Y is the service description The letter Y designates the speed rating and the speed capabil ity of the tire is limited to 186 mph 300 km h 279 Operation re Tires and wheels e Any tire with a speed capability above 186 mph 300 km h must include a ZR in the size designation AND the service description must be placed in parenthesis Example 275 40 ZR 18 99Y The Y speed rating in parenthesis designates the maximum speed capa bility of the tire as being above 186 mph 300 km h Consult the tire manufacturer for the actual maximum permissible speed of the tire 280 All Season and winter tires Index Speed rating Q M S upto 100 mph 160 km h T M S up to 118 mph 190 km h H M S up to 130 mph 210 km h V M S upto 149 mph 240 km h or M S for winter tires i Not all M S rated tires provide special win ter performance Make sure the tires you use show M S and the mountain snowflake marking on the tire sidewall Thes
71. might lose control over the vehicle Warning With a spare wheel mounted the system may Still indicate the tire inflation pressure of the removed road wheel for some minutes If this happens keep in mind that the indicated value where the spare wheel is mounted does not re flect the actual spare tire inflation pressure A The TPMS does not indicate a warning for wrongly selected inflation pressures Always adjust tire inflation pressure according to the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver s door B pillar or if available the supplemental tire inflation pressure infor mation on the inside of the fuel filler flap Warning The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure e g tire blowout caused by a foreign object In this case bring the vehicle to a halt by care fully applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering maneuvers Warning A N Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked every other week when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the Tire and Loading Information placard or the tire inflation pressure label If your ve hicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the Tire and Loading Infor mation placard or the tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equip
72. network Reavy is indicated in the right ditions permit gt Switch on the telephone and the radio multifunction display Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from gt Press button or on the using a mobile telephone while driving a steering wheel repeatedly until you see vehicle the teL menu in the left multifunction C TEL m d F w READY AY S Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph display A _ o approximately 50 km h your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet l approximately 14 m every second Signal strength This standby message indicates that your telephone is ready for use and you can operate it using the control system P 4 30 6872 31 141 Controls in detail a Control system You may carry out the following functions Function Page Answering a Call 142 Ending a call 142 Dialling a number from the 143 phone book Redialing 144 142 Answering a call When your telephone is ready to receive calls you can answer a call at any time In the right multifunction display you will then see the message or if available the caller ID name and number O P54 32 3707 31 gt Press button F You have answered the call In the right multifunction display you see the length of the call Ending a call or rejecting an incoming call gt Press button Fam You have ended or rejected the call In the right multifunction display you will again see the standby message Controls in
73. of ESP The electronic traction system improves the vehicle s ability to utilize available trac tion especially under slippery road condi tions by applying the brakes to a spinning wheel When you switch off the ESP the elec tronic traction system is still enabled Warning A N If you are driving too fast the electronic traction system cannot reduce the risk of an accident The electronic traction system cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle 86 Switching off the ESP Warning A N The ESP should not be switched off during normal driving other than in the circum stances described below Disabling of the system will reduce vehicle stability in standard driving maneuvers To improve the vehicle s traction turn off the ESP in driving situations where it would be advantageous to have the drive wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for better grip such as e when driving off with snow chains e in deep snow e in sand or gravel Warning A N Switch on the ESP immediately if the aforementioned circumstances do not apply anymore Otherwise the ESP will not stabi lize the vehicle when it is starting to skid or a wheel is spinning When you switch off the ESP the ESP does not stabilize the vehicle the engine output is not limited which allows the drive wheels to spin and thus cut into surfaces for better grip the electronic traction system will
74. on the high beam headlamps The high beam flasher is available at all times For nighttime driving you should turn the exterior lamp switch to position or EGR to permit activation of the high beam headlamps When the engine is running and you turn the exterior lamp switch to position or E the manual headlamp mode has priority over the daytime running lamp mode The corresponding exterior lamps switch on gt page 106 Locator lighting and night security illumination The locator lighting and the night security illumination are described in the Control system section see Setting locator light ing gt page 135 and Setting night secu rity illumination gt page 136 Fog lamps A In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions only switch from position WA to with the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location Switching from Mg to will briefly switch off the headlamps Doing so while driving in low ambient lighting conditions may result in an accident Warning D Fog lamps will operate with the parking lamps and or the low beam headlamps on Fog lamps should only be used in conjunction with low beam headlamps Consult your State or Province Motor Vehicle Regulations regarding al lowable lamp operation g Fog lamps cannot be switched on manually with the exterior lamp switch in position gJ For switching on the fog lamps turn the exterior lamp switch to position first Controls in detail
75. operation mode To brake the driver must then apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and depress the pedal much further to obtain the expected braking ef fect If necessary apply full pressure to the brake pedal Brakes are only applied to the front wheels Stopping distance is in creased Adapt your driving style according ly For more information see Electro hydraulic brake system gt page 87 With the engine not running there is no power assistance for the brake and steering systems In this case it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle Adapt your driving accordingly 374 T Towing of the vehicle should only be done using the properly installed towing eye bolt Never attach tow cable tow rope or tow rod to the vehicle chassis frame or suspension parts i To signal turns while being towed with the hazard warning flasher in use turn SmartKey in starter switch to position 2 and activate the combination switch for the left or right turn signal in the usual manner only the selected turn signal will operate Upon canceling the turn signal the hazard warning flasher will operate again When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground please note the following With the automatic central locking activated and the SmartKey in starter switch position 2 the vehicle doors lock if the left front wheel as well as the
76. or the traction The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The ca pabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or danger ous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others For more information see the Practical hints section gt page 306 braking distance 83 Safety and Security ie Driving safety systems BAS The Brake Assist System BAS operates in emergency situations If you apply the brakes very quickly the BAS automatically provides full brake boost thereby poten tially reducing the braking distance gt Apply continuous full braking pressure until the emergency braking situation is over The ABS will prevent the wheels from locking When you release the brake pedal the brakes function again as normal The BAS is then deactivated Warning A N If the BAS is malfunctioning the brake sys tem is still functioning normally but without the additional brake boost available that BAS would normally provide in an emergen cy braking maneuver Therefore the braking distance may increase 84 Warning VAN BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that af forded by the condition of
77. out of the housing in direction of arrow 3 360 gt Slide mechanical key Q back into the SmartKey gt Check the operation of the SmartKey Battery 6 Contact spring gt Remove the discharged batteries gt Using a lint free cloth insert new batteries under the contact spring with the plus side facing up gt Return battery compartment into housing until it locks into place Y Replacing bulbs Safe vehicle operation depends on proper exterior lighting and signaling It is there fore essential that all bulbs and lamp assemblies are in good working order at all times Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely important Have headlamps checked and readjusted at regular intervals and when a bulb has been replaced See an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for headlamp adjustment i Do not replace the LEDs or bulbs yourself You could otherwise damage the vehicle lighting system or parts of the vehicle Only have the LEDs or bulbs replaced by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center i Ifthe headlamps are fogged up on the inside as a result of high humidity driving the vehicle a distance should clear up the fogging Practical hints Replacing bulbs p cb Substitute bulbs will be brought into use when lamps malfunction Observe the messages in the multifunction display gt page 346 f one of the following bulbs blows another bulb will adopt its function e Rear turn signals e Brake
78. personnel Warning Controls in detail Audio system a Operational readiness of CD changer Loading unloading a CD magazine gt Push CD tray into CD magazine in The CD changer is located in the trunk on direction of arrow the left side g CDs which have been inserted improperly or are unreadable will not be played You do not need to place CDs in all six CD trays The lowest tray is magazine slot number 1 and the highest tray is magazine slot number 6 gt Push magazine into CD changer in direction of arrow and close sliding door a CD i sere CD changer Playing CDs CD changer CD tray gt Press button 4 CD magazine gt Slide changer door to the right and press eject button WW The CD changer can be operated from the cowill appear in the display front control panel of the radio A loaded magazine must be installed to play CDs The last CD listened to will then start play ing at the point where it was switched off The CD magazine 4 will be ejected After the last track on a CD has finished gt Remove CD magazine and pull the next CD is automatically played CD tray fully out gt Place CD 1 in recess of CD tray label Side up 159 Controls in detail mz Audio system Selecting CDs AUD T P82 60 4067 31 gt You can select from among the CDs in the CD magazine using buttons BI to RJ cpand the magazine slot number of the selected CD appear in the displa
79. proximately 5 mph 8 km h independent of road surface conditions On slippery road surfaces the ABS will respond even to light brake pressure The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on when you switch on the ignition It goes out when the engine Is run ning Braking If the ABS activates during braking the ABS ESP warning lamp in the in strument cluster dial flashes Because of the electro hydraulic brake system you will not feel any pulsation in the brake pedal gt Keep firm and steady pressure on the brake pedal Continuous steady brake pedal pressure yields the advantages provided by the ABS namely braking power and the ability to steer the vehicle The ABS ESP warning lamp flashes whenever the ABS is activated which can be an indication of hazardous road condi tions and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving Emergency brake maneuver gt Keep continuous full pressure on the brake pedal A When the ABS is malfunctioning the BAS and the ESP are also switched off Warning When the ABS is malfunctioning the wheels may lock during hard braking reducing steering capability and extending the Safety and Security Driving safety systems a Warning A The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency be yond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires
80. right rear wheel are turning at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph 15 km h or more To prevent the vehicle door locks from locking deactivate the automatic central locking gt page 139 and switch off the tow away alarm gt page 95 Ge The gear selector lever will remain locked in park position P and the SmartKey will not turn in the starter switch if the battery is disconnected or discharged See notes on the battery gt page 370 Installing reinstalling towing eye bolt T Only secure the tow bar to the towing eye bolt The vehicle could otherwise be damaged gt Take the towing eye bolt C from its storage compartment gt page 356 T Your vehicle is equipped with a front towing eye bolt only page 375 You cannot tow other vehicles with your vehicle 1 Towing eye bolt gt Remove cover from the access hole gt Screw towing eye bolt G clockwise in to its stop gt Remove the towing eye bolt when you no longer need it To do this carry out the above steps in reverse order Points to bear in mind e The vehicle must not be tow started e Ifthe vehicle is to be towed only tow it with all wheels on the ground e lf the vehicle has suffered transmission damage only tow it with the propeller shaft disconnected e Before towing the vehicle make sure the battery is connected and charged Otherwise you will not be able to switch on the ignition and move the selector lever to neu
81. selector Telephone mode selector seek tuning radio Track search cassette CD Speed dialing memory telephone On off Volume Page es 154 162 152 199 160 165 148 148 147 Controls in detail mz Audio system Button and soft key operation In these instructions the alpha numeric keypad right side of radio panel and the function buttons left side of radio panel are referred to as buttons The four keys below the display panel are referred to as soft keys T Do not press directly on the display face Otherwise the display will be damaged 148 Operation Switching on off Switching on gt Turn SmartKey in starter switch to position 1 or 2 or gt Press control knob ROJ if the radio is switched on without the Smart Key in the starter switch it will automatically switch off again after approximately 30 minutes Switching off gt Remove SmartKey from starter switch or gt Press control knob ROJ Adjusting the volume gt Turn control knob ROJ The volume will increase or decrease depending on the direction turned a gt The volume setting can be selected separately for the telephone and audio system Adjusting audio functions Press the aupkey to call up the bass treble balance and fader functions in the various operating modes Settings for bass and treble are stored separately for the AM and FM frequency bands cassette mode and CD mode
82. still apply the brakes to a spinning wheel the ESP continues to operate when you are braking When the ESP is switched off and one or more drive wheels are spinning the ABS ESP warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes However the ESP will then not stabilize the vehicle The switch is located on the lower part of the center console 1 ESP switch gt Press ESP switch Q The ABS ESP warning lamp in the instrument cluster comes on The ESP is deactivated A Warning When the ABS ESP warning lamp is illuminated continuously the ESP is switched off or is not operational due to a malfunction Vehicle stability in standard driving maneuvers reduces Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail ing road conditions and to the non operating status of the ESP T Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an ex tended period with the ESP switched off This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which ts not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Switching on the ESP gt Press ESP switch Q The ABS ESP warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out You are now again in normal driving mode with the ESP switched on Safety and Security Driving safety systems Electro hydraulic brake system The electro hydraulic brake system com bines a hydraulic brake circuit with elec tronically controlled brake servo assistance You have increased braking
83. supplemental informa tion pertaining to special driving situations can be found on the tire inflation pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap Rim A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated Sidewall The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead 288 TIN Tire Identification Number Unique identifier which facilitates efforts by tire manufacturers to notify purchasers in recall situations or other safety matters concerning tires and gives purchases the means to easily identify such tires The TIN is comprised of Manufacturer s identifica tion mark Tire size Tire type code and Date of manufacture Tire load rating Numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can support Tire ply composition and material used This indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall Tire manufac turers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and sidewall which include steel nylon polyester and others Tire speed rating Part of tire designation indicates the speed range for which a tire is approved Total load limit Rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kilograms 150 Ib times the vehicle s designated seating capacity Traction Force exerted by the vehicle on the road via the tires The amount of grip provided Tread The portion of a
84. the SRS This includes changing or removing any component or part of the SRS the installation of additional trim material badges etc over the steering wheel hub passenger front air bag cov er door frame trims or door trim pan els and installation of additional electrical electronic equipment on or near SRS components and wiring Keep area between air bags and occupants free from objects e g packages purses umbrellas etc Air bag system components will be hot after an air bag has inflated Do not touch Never place your feet on the instrument panel dashboard or on the seat Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat In addition improper repair work on the SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended air bag deployment Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center For your protection and the protection of others when scrapping the air bag unit or emergency tensioning device our safety instructions must be fol lowed These instructions are available from any authorized Mercedes Benz Center Given the considerable deployment speed required inflation volume and the textile structure of the air bags there is the possibility of abrasions or other potentially more serious injuries resulting from air bag deployment When you sell your vehicle we strongly urge you to give notice to the subse
85. the passenger seat and therefore the system senses the passen ger seat as being occupied Suggested solution gt vy Fasten your seat belts Regardless of whether the seat belts are fastened or not the seat belt tell tale always comes on and remains lit for 6 seconds after starting the engine Fasten your seat belt The warning chime stops sounding Fasten your seat belts The seat belt telltale goes out Remove the items from the passenger seat and put them in a safe place The seat belt telltale goes out Practical hints What to do if a Problem Possible cause consequence Suggested solution During driving the red seat belt The vehicle s speed once exceeds 15 mph Fasten your seat belts bee ee i arr ee a Fas oe wae your ae The seat belt telltale goes out and the ally hear an intermittent warning have forgotten to fasten your seat belts warning chime stops sounding chime with increasing intensity There are items placed on the passenger seat gt Remove the items from the passenger and therefore the system senses the passen seat and put them in a safe place Se Sal 2 BEMIS COLON The seat belt telltale goes out and the warning chime stops sounding After 60 seconds with an unfastened seat belt the warning chime stops sounding and the seat belt telltale illuminates continuously The seat belt telltale will only go out if both the driver s and passenger s seat belt are fastened or the
86. the vehicle 297 Vehicle washing cccseeeeceeeeees Soft top Care sssesssessssersssersserrsse Practical hints aee e 302 What to dO IW esserne 304 Lamps in instrument cluster 304 Lamp in center console 317 Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display 60 319 Symbol messages cccseeeeeee wees 332 Where will find cceesseeeeeeees 356 PIS U GI Kiten 356 TIREFIT kit electric air pump towing eye bolt and vehicle literature portfolio 356 Unlocking in an emergency 357 Unlocking the vehicle 357 Replacing SmartKey batteries 359 Replacing bulbs cceeecccsseseee eens 361 Front AMD Siu cscesssinsswacoaivnsetenseoeness 362 Rear lAMPS ccscccessccesesceeeeees 362 Replacing wiper blades 008 363 Removing wiper blades 363 Installing wiper blades 364 PIAC raone E taeuesaceeiond aneceae 365 Preparing the vehicle 0 365 Sealing tires with TIREFIT 365 Batteries arisini aiei 370 Charging the batteries 371 Towing the vehicle ccccccseeceeeees 373 Installing reinstalling towing eye bolt 375 Points to bear in mind 375 Transporting the vehicle 375 FUSO AAA 376 Technical data e 378 Parts Service neirens 380 Warranty covera
87. the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction The BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following an other vehicle too closely or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ESP The Electronic Stability Program ESP is operational as soon as the engine is run ning and monitors the vehicle s traction force of adhesive friction between the tires and the road surface and handling The ESP recognizes when a wheel is spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid By applying brakes to the appropriate wheel and by limiting the engine output the ESP works to stabilize the vehicle The ESP is especially useful while driving off and on wet or slippery road surfaces The ESP also stabilizes the vehicle during braking and steering maneuvers The ABS ESP warning lamp in the instrument cluster comes on when you switch on the ignition It goes out when the engine is running The ABS ESP warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes when the ESP is engaged A Never switch off the ESP when you see the ABS ESP warning lamp flashing in the instrument cluster In this case proceed as follows Warning e While driving off apply as little throttle as possible
88. these instructions after completing the Programming portion steps 1 through 6 of this text A second person may make the following training procedures quicker and easier Step 8 gt Locate training button on the garage door opener motor head unit Exact location and color of the button may vary by garage door opener brand Depending on manufacturer the training button may also be referred to as learn or smart button If there is difficulty locating the transmitting button refer to the garage door opener Operator s Manual 224 Step 9 gt Press the training button on the ga rage door opener motor head unit The training light is activated You have 30 seconds to initiate the following step Step 10 gt Return to the vehicle and firmly press hold for 2 seconds and release the programmed signal transmitter button or Step 11 gt Press hold for 2 seconds and release same signal transmitter button a second time to complete the training process ee Some garage door openers or other rolling code equipped devices may require you to press hold for 2 seconds and release the same signal transmitter button a third time to complete the training process Step 12 gt Confirm the garage door operation by pressing the programmed signal trans mitter button or Step 13 gt To program the remaining two signal transmitter butto
89. tire that comes into contact with the road Treadwear indicators Narrow bands sometimes called wear bars that show across the tread of a tire when only in 1 6 mm of tread remains Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire s traction temperature and treadwear Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire Vehicle maximum load on the tire Load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing it by two Rotating tires i A wheel change should only be carried out at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Other wise there is a danger of damaging the vehicle by Jacking it up incorrectly A Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires are of the same dimension Warning If your vehicle is equipped with mixed size tires different tire dimensions front vs rear tire rotation is not possible Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles with tires of the same dimension all around If your vehicle is equipped with tires of the same dimension all around tires can be rotated observing a front to rear rotation pattern that will maintain the intended rotation spinning direction of the tire gt page 262 Operation Tires and wheels poo In some cases such
90. twisted seat belt against your body could cause injuries Pregnant women should also always use a lap shoulder belt The lap belt portion should be positioned as low as possible on the hips to avoid any possible pressure on the abdomen Never place your feet on the instrument panel dashboard or on the seat Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat When using a seat belt to secure infant or toddler restraints or children in booster seats always follow the child seat manufacturer s instructions Enhanced seat belt reminder system When the engine is started the seat belt telltale will always illuminate for 6 seconds to remind you and your passenger to fasten your seat belts If the driver s seat belt is not fastened when the engine is started an additional warning chime will also sound for a maxi mum of 6 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is fastened If after these 6 seconds the driver s or the passenger s seat belt with the passenger seat occupied are not fastened with all doors closed e the seat belt telltale remains illu minated for as long as either the driver s or passenger s seat belt is not fastened e and if the vehicle speed once exceeds 15 mph 25 km h the seat belt telltale starts flashing and a warning chime sounds with increasing intensity for a maximum of 60 seconds or until the driver s and passenger s seat belts are fastened If the driver s or the pas
91. unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment 271 Operation re Tires and wheels The TPMS only functions on wheels that are equipped with the proper electronic sensors It monitors the tire inflation pres sure as selected by the driver in all four tires A warning is issued to alert you to a decrease in pressure in one or more of the tires Tire pressure inquiries are made using the multifunction display The present inflation pressures are displayed only after a few minutes travel time a gt Possible differences between the readings of a tire pressure gauge of an air hose e g gas station equipment and the vehicle s control system can occur Usually the readings issued by the control system are more precise gt Switch on the ignition gt page 40 gt Press button eN or Ke on the mul tifunction steering wheel until the cur rent inflation pressures for each tire appear in the multifunction display 272 _ 3 34 Tire Pressure psi D i bd 3 31 34 _ peA ao ni i p PS 324907 3 i When the vehicle has been parked for longer than 20 minutes the message Ti re pressure di spl ayed after driving for a few minutes appears in the multifunction display AX It is the drivers responsibility to calibrate the TPMS on the recommended cold infla tion pressure Underinflated tires affect the ability to steer or brake the vehicle You
92. use Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only when the vehicle is stopped Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period when driving off on slippery road surfaces This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty The steering wheel gearshift paddles are located on the left and right side of the steering wheel Steering wheel gearshift paddles 1 Left paddle limiting gear range or downshift in shift program MAN 2 Right paddle extending gear range or upshift in shift program MAN a You cannot shift with the steering wheel gearshift paddles when the gear selector lever is in park position P neutral position N or reverse gear R Controls in detail Automatic transmission The following instructions describe opera tion of the gear selector lever when driving in the shift program C or S Limiting gear range Warning A N On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control Your vehicle s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control gt Briefly pull left shift paddle Q The transmission will shift to the next lower gear as permitted by the shift program This action simultaneously limits the gear range of the transmis sion gt page 174
93. vehicle s battery is charged properly connected not dam aged and cellular and GPS coverage is available Tightening torque Force times lever arm e g a lug wrench with which threaded fasteners such as wheel bolts are tightened TIN Tire Identification Number gt page 288 Tire load rating gt page 288 Tire ply composition and material used gt page 288 Tire speed rating gt page 288 TIREFIT kit Accessory for emergency and tempo rary tire repair The TIREFIT kit consists of a container with sealant material a filler hose and an air compressor Traction gt page 288 Technical terms Tread gt page 288 Treadwear indicators gt page 288 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards gt page 289 Vehicle capacity weight gt page 288 Vehicle maximum load on the tire gt page 289 VIN Vehicle Identification Number The number set by the manufacturer and placed on the body to uniquely identify each vehicle produced 407 ABS 82 403 Indicatorlamp 29 306 Messages in the multifunction display 321 322 ABS ESP Warning lamp 29 304 Accelerator position automatic transmission 173 Accessory weight 286 Accident 54 ACL 403 Messages in the multifunction display 328 Additional turn signals Exterior mirror 362 Airbags 62 Children 63 Front Driver 65 Front Passenger 66 Head thorax 65 67 Knee 66 Occupant Classification System OCS 67 Passeng
94. vehicle is equipped with the Tire and Loading Information placard located on the driver s door B pillar gt page 263 The tire inflation pressure should be checked regularly and should only be ad justed on cold tires The tires can be con sidered cold if the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or driven less than one mile 1 6 km Follow recommended cold tire inflation pressures listed on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver s door B pillar Keeping the tires properly inflated provides the best handling tread life and riding comfort tion placard on the driver s door B pillar also consult the tire inflation pressure la bel if available on the fuel filler flap for any additional information pertaining to special driving situations For more infor mation see Important notes on tire infla tion pressure gt page 269 Data shown on Tire and Loading Information placard example are for illustration purposes only Tire data are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustrations below Refer to Tire and Loading Information placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle 3670 SEE OWNERS fa peat aaa MANUAL FOR aco ADDITIONAL oane ris 7oois szoxe cost lini P40 00 2064 31 1 SG7DAQJE4155 1 Tire and Loading Information placard with recommended cold tire inflation pressures The Tire and Loading Information placard lists
95. vehicle or tires appear unsafe have the vehicle towed to the nearest Mercedes Benz Center or tire dealer for repairs Treadwear indicators TWI are required by law These indicators are located in six places on the tread circumference and become visible at a tread depth of approximately in 1 6 mm at which point the tire is considered worn and should be replaced The treadwear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread A Warning Although the applicable federal motor vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be worn when the treadwear indicators TWI become visible at approximately in 1 6 mm we recommend that you do not allow your tires to wear down to that level As tread depth approaches g in 3 mm the adhesion properties on a wet road are sharply reduced Depending upon the weather and or road surface conditions the tire traction varies widely Have worn tires replaced in pairs front pair or rear pair Otherwise the driving stability of the vehicle will be adversely affected Specified tire inflation pressures must be maintained This applies particularly if the tires are subjected to high loads e g high speeds heavy loads high ambient temperatures A Do not drive with a flat tire A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle You may lose control of the vehicle Continued driving with a flat tire or driving at high speed with a flat tire will cause excessiv
96. wheels and the tires may no longer be correct Warning A N Worn old tires can cause accidents If the tire tread is badly worn or if the tires have sustained damage replace them Have worn or damaged tires replaced in pairs front pair or rear pair an make sure the tires rotate in the direction specified gt page 262 Otherwise the driving stabili ty of the vehicle will be adversely affected especially when driving at high speeds When replacing rims only use genuine Mercedes Benz wheel bolts specified for the particular rim type Failure to do so can result in the bolts loosening and possibly an accident Retreaded tires are not tested or recom mended by Mercedes Benz since previous damage cannot always be recognized on re treads The operating safety of the vehicle cannot be assured when such tires are used Operation Tires and wheels nn Important guidelines i A wheel change should only be carried out at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Other wise there is a danger of damaging the vehicle by Jacking it up incorrectly e For the first 100 miles 160 km avoid high speed cornering Do not exceed a speed of 125 mph 200 km h e Only use sets of tires and rims of the same type and make e Tires must be of the correct size for the rim e Regularly check the tires and rims for damage Dented or bent rims can cause tire inflation pressure loss and damage to the tire beads e If vehicle is h
97. 195 Side airvents 185 Temperature 189 Temperature sensor 33 Automatic headlamp mode 107 410 Automatic lighting control Interior lighting 112 Automatic transmission 169 Accelerator position 173 Damage 375 Driving tips 173 Emergency operation Limp Home Mode 180 Gearranges 174 Gear selector lever 32 169 Gear selector lever control one touch gearshifting 175 Gear selector lever position 171 Gear shifting malfunctions 180 Kickdown 173 Manual shift program 178 Shift program mode selector switch 175 Shifting procedure 170 Starting the engine 47 Steering wheel gearshift control one touch gearshifting 177 Towing 375 Transmission fluid level 254 Automatic transmission fluid 254 B Backup lamp 362 Messages in the multifunction display 349 Bar 286 BAS 84 403 Batteries SmartKey Checking battery condition 100 Replacing 359 Batteries Vehicle 256 Charging 371 Consumer battery 370 Jump starting 370 Maintenance 370 Messages in the multifunction display 332 Starter battery 256 Batteries vehicle Consumer battery 256 Battery charger 372 Bead 286 Bi Xenon headlamps 403 Bluetooth interface 213 Storage location 210 Body surface 297 Brake Electro hydraulic brake system 87 Brake Assist System see BAS Brake disks Wear 239 Brake fluid 393 396 Checking 249 Messages in the multifunction display 335 Brake lamps 362 High mounted brake lamp 362 Messages in the multifunction display 346 Brake pads M
98. 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210 2 A statement by the child restraint manu facturer of compliance with these stan dards can be found on the instruction label on the restraint and in the instruction manual provided with the restraint When using any infant or toddler restraint or booster seat be sure to carefully read and follow all manufacturer s instructions for installation and use Please read and observe warning labels affixed to inside of the vehicle and to infant or child restraints The infant or child restraint are applicable only to the standard passenger seat Any individualization of this seat may restrict correct fitment of the infant or child restraint A Children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropri ate infant or child restraint recommended for the size and weight of the child Warning The infant or child restraint must be properly secured with the vehicle s seat belt fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer s instructions Safety and Security Occupant safety a Occupants especially children should never place their bodies or lean their heads in the area of the door where the head thorax air bag inflates This could result in serious personal injuries or death should the head thorax air bag be triggered Always sit as upright as possible properly use the seat belt and use an appropriately sized infant r
99. 4 E A A A 84 Electro hydraulic brake system 87 Performance enhancement system 90 PATIO AIC oes 90 Contents Anti theft SYSteMmS ccssseccssseeeenes 93 IMMODIIZEL eee eee ccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeees 93 Anti theft alarm system 00 93 Tow away alarm cccseecceeeeeeeneeees 95 Controls in detail cece 96 Locking and unlocking ccseeeeees 98 SMAR EY snan 98 Opening the GOOrs cccsseeeees 101 Opening the trunk eeeeeees 102 Closing the trunk lid 103 Trunk emergency release 104 Automatic locking ccceeeeeeeee 104 Locking and unlocking from the inside 105 LITLE ONS oenen a 106 Exterior lamp SWItCN ccc 00e 106 Combination switch 0060 110 Hazard warning flasher 111 Interior NGAtiING cece ceeeeeee wees tile Courtesy lighting cccceeeeeeeees 113 Trunk lamp erriren 113 Instrument cluster cee ceeeceeeeeeeeees 114 Adjusting instrument cluster NCTA AUIO Ms soscdanswensdataessonosaeanoatonst 114 Coolant temperature gauge 115 Resetting trip odometer 115 TACNOMETED cccceseccceesseceeeeees 116 Outside temperature indicator 116 Control system cccsecccssseeceneeees 117 Multifunction display 66 117 Multifunction steering wheel 118 Menus sacs tasecantcebron con
100. 7 the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out If above conditions are not met the system is not working properly Have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Warning VAN If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains illuminated with an adult oc cupant on the passenger seat even after performing the above corrective steps do not have any passenger use the passenger seat until the system has been repaired 327 Practical hints pe What to do if Left display Right display Possible cause consequence Possible solution P Gear Sel ector Lever To P Shift To N To Start SLR ACL Mal f uncti on Ser vi ce Requi red SRS Restraint System Mal f uncti on Servi ce Requi red Warning A N In the event that a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above the SRS may not be operational For your safety we strongly recommend that you contact an 328 You wish to start the engine and the gt selector lever is not in park position P e The locking system is gt malfunctioning e The transmission cooling system is malfunctioning There is a malfunction in the supple gt mental restraint systems The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices ETDs could deploy unex pectedly or fail to activate in an acci dent authorized Mercedes Benz Center immedi ately to have the system checked otherwise the SRS may not be deployed
101. 7 Fuel reserve Message in the multifunction display 345 Fuel reserve warning lamp 29 Fuel system Message in the multifunction display 344 Fuel tank 139 140 Capacity 394 Filler flap 247 Fuels coolants lubricants etc 393 Fuses 376 G Garage door opener 221 Gasoline see Fuel GAWR 287 Gear range Automatic transmission 174 Canceling limit 176 Limiting 174 Shifting into optimal 176 178 Gear selector lever 32 169 Gearshift pattern 169 Lock 48 50 169 406 Position 170 171 Position indicator 170 Shifting procedure 170 Gear selector lever one touch gearshifting index Automatic transmission 175 Gearshift Indicator lamp 29 Program Manual 175 178 Global locking unlocking see Key Good visibility 181 GPS 404 Gross Axle Weight Rating see GAWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight see GVW GVW 287 GVWR 287 H Hands free microphone 33 Hazard warning flasher 111 Headlamp switch off delay see Delayed switch off exterior lamps Headlamps Automatic headlamp mode 107 Cleaning lenses 300 Cleaning system 181 257 401 415 index Low beam 107 Messages in the multifunction display 346 Replacing bulbs 361 Switch 51 106 Head thorax airbag 67 404 High performance driving 239 High beam flasher 51 110 Replacing bulbs 361 High beam headlamps Indicatorlamp 29 Messages in the multifunction display 346 Replacing bulbs 361 Switching on 110 High mounted brake lamp 362 High pressure cleaners 2
102. 80 1 in 2035 mm 62 6 in 1589 mm 106 3 in 2700 mm 64 5 in 1638 mm 61 8 in 1569 mm Technical data pez Weights l Mercedes Benz SLR McLaren Roadster Mercedes Benz SLR McLaren Roadster 722 S Trunk load max 165 Ib 75 kg 165 Ib 75 kg 392 Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Y Fuels coolants lubricants etc Capacities Warning A For health reasons you should prevent ser l ice fluids from coming into direct contact Vehicle components and their respective vice fluids from coming i lubricants must match Therefore only use Comply with all valid regulations with si eee Cece ll f products tested and approved by respect to handling storing and disposing of If a service fluid is swallowed contact a Mercedes Benz service fluids Otherwise you could physician immediately endanger persons or the environment For information on tested and approved a products contact an authorized Keep service fluids out of the reach of Mercedes Benz Center or visit children www mbusa com USA only Capacity Fuels coolants lubricants etc Engine with oil filter 9 0 US qt 8 5 I Approved engine oils Automatic transmission 8 5 US at 8 0 I MB Automatic Transmission Fluid Rear axle 2 3 US gt 2 2 I Hypoid gear oil SAE 75 W 85 Power steering approx 1 15 US qt 1 1 I MB Power Steering Fluid Pentosin CHF 11S Brake system 1 6 US qt 1 5 I MB Brake Fluid DOT 4 393 Technical data EER
103. 99 Hood 250 Messages in the multifunction display 353 Horn 27 HVAC see Automatic climate control Hydroplaning 241 416 l Identification labels 382 Identification Number Vehicle VIN 382 Ignition 40 Immobilizer 93 Indicator lamps see Lamps Indicator and warning Infant and child restraint systems see Chil dren in the vehicle Inflation pressure see Tires Inflation pres sure Inside door handle 34 Instrument cluster 28 114 405 Illumination brightness 114 Lamps 304 Messages in display see Multifunction display messages Multifunction display 117 Instrument lighting see Instrument cluster Illumination brightness Instrument panel see Instrument cluster Instruments and controls see Cockpit Interior lighting 112 Delayed switch off 137 Interior rear view mirror 44 Auto dimming 181 Interior storage spaces see Storage com partments J Jacking up the vehicle 365 Jump starting 370 K Key Mechanical 357 Key SmartKey Battery check lamp 100 Checking the batteries 100 Factory setting 99 Locking unlocking 98 Locking unlocking Global setting 99 Locking unlocking Selective setting 100 Lossof 101 Messages in the multifunction display 345 Positions in starter switch 40 Remote control 98 Replacing the batteries 359 Turning off the engine 56 Unlocking Trunk 100 Kickdown 173 405 Kilopascal 287 Knee airbags 66 L Labels Certification 382 Emission control label 382 Lamps Exterior 361 Lamps exterior Messages in th
104. Buttons 30 Steering wheel gearshift control Indicator lamp 311 Steering wheel gearshift control one touch gearshifting Automatic transmission 177 422 Stolen Vehicle Recovery services 221 Storage compartment between the backrests 210 Storage compartments 209 Armrest 209 Map pocket Passenger footwell 209 Parcel net in trunk 210 Storage location Bluetooth interface 210 Storing tires 262 Submenus see Control system submenus Sun visors 182 Supplement Restraint System see SRS Symbols used in this Operator s Manual 19 T Tachometer 29 Overspeed range 116 Tail lamps Messages in the multifunction display 349 Replacing bulbs 361 Technical data 378 Air conditioning refrigerant 396 Approved engine oils 395 Brake fluid 396 Coolants 398 Electrical system 390 Engine 384 Engine oil additives 395 Fuel requirements 397 Fuels coolants lubricants etc 393 Gasoline additives 397 Main dimensions 391 Poly V belt 383 Premium unleaded gasoline 396 Rims and tires 385 Weights 392 Windshield and headlamp washer system 394 Windshield washer system and head lamp cleaning system 401 Tele Aid 215 407 Call priority 220 Emergency calls 216 Hands free microphone 33 Information 219 Initiating an emergency call manually 217 Messages in the multifunction display 354 Remote door unlock 220 Roadside Assistance 218 SOS button 217 Stolen Vehicle Recovery services 221 system self check 216 Telep
105. Control system The control system is used to call up vehicle information and to change component settings Information and messages appear in the multifunction display The driver uses the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel to navigate through the system and to adjust settings 403 Technical terms Cruise control Driving convenience system for auto matically maintaining the vehicle speed set by the driver Curb weight gt page 286 DOT Department of Transportation gt page 287 Engine number The number set by the manufacturer and placed on the cylinder block to uniquely identify each engine produced Engine oil viscosity Measure of the internal oil friction vis cosity at different temperatures The higher the temperature the oil can tol erate without thinning too much or the lower the temperature it can tolerate without thickening too much the bet ter the viscosity characteristics of the oil 404 ESP Eectronic Stability Program Improves vehicle handling and directional stability ETD Emergency Tensioning Device Device which deploys in certain frontal and rear collisions exceeding the sys tem s threshold to tighten the seat belts gt SRS GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating gt page 287 Gear range Number of gears which are available to the automatic transmission for shifting The automatic gear shifting process can be adapted to specific operating conditions using the g
106. Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the finish T Do not use scouring agents on these parts Never apply strong force and only use a soft non scratching cloth when cleaning the vehicle Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry cloth or sponge Otherwise you may scratch or damage the paint Automatic car wash You can have your car washed in an auto matic car wash from the start Automatic car washes without brushes are preferable gt To protect the filter system switch the automatic climate control to air recirculation mode gt page 193 i Do not clean your vehicle in an automatic touchless car wash which uses caustic spray Otherwise the caustic spray will damage the paint or ornamental moldings Do not choose final hot wax conservation when taking the vehicle to an automatic car wash If the vehicle is very dirty prewash it be fore running it through the automatic car wash Ba Make sure that the windshield wiper switch is set to O gt page 52 Otherwise the rain sensor could activate and cause the wipers to move unintentionally This may lead to vehicle damage Due to the width of the vehicle fold in exterior rear view mirrors prior to running the vehicle through an automatic car wash to prevent damage to the mirrors After running the vehicle through an auto matic car wash wipe any wax off of the wind shield gt page 299 This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noise which can
107. F indi cator lamp will illuminate when the engine is started and remain illuminated indicating that the passenger front air bag and passen ger knee air bag are deactivated When the OCS senses that the passenger seat is classified as being empty the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp will illuminate when the engine is started and remain illuminated indicating that the passenger front air bag and the passenger knee air bag are deactivated When the OCS senses that the passenger seat occupant is classified as being heavier than the weight of a typical 12 month old child seated in a standard child restraint or as being a small individual such as a young teenager or a small adult the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds when the engine is started and then depending on occupant weight sensor readings from the seat remain illuminated or go out With the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp illuminated the passenger front air bag and the passenger knee air bag are deactivated With the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp out the passenger front air bag and the passenger knee air bag are activated When the OCS senses that the passenger seat occupant is classified as an adult or someone larger than a small individual the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds when the engine is started and then go out indicating that the passenger front air b
108. For more information see Coolant gt page 255 and see Fu els coolants lubricants etc gt page 393 Engine oil level For more information on engine oil level see Engine oil gt page 253 Brake fluid BE if you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks immediately Notify an authorized Mercedes Benz Center immediately Do not add brake fluid as this will not solve the problem For more information see Practical hints gt page 307 Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system For more information on filling up the washer reservoir see Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system gt page 257 Vehicle lighting Check function and cleanliness For more information on replacing light bulbs see Replacing bulbs gt page 361 For more information on exterior lamps see Exterior lamp switch gt page 106 Operation At the gas station foo Tire inflation pressure For more information on tire inflation pres sure see Checking tire inflation pressure manually gt page 271 249 Operation ae Engine compartment Hood Opening Warning A N Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle is in motion Otherwise the hood could be forced open by passing air flow This could cause the hood to come loose and inju
109. Fuels coolants lubricants etc Cooling system Low temperature cooling system Mercedes Benz SLR McLaren Roadster approx 5 3 US qt 5 0 I Mercedes Benz SLR McLaren Roadster 722 S approx 6 3 US qt 6 0 I Fuel tank including a reserve of Air conditioning system Hydraulic system for soft top Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system Capacity approx 10 6 US qt 10 0 1 25 6 US gal 97 0 I 3 2 US gal 12 0 I 0 143 US gt 0 135 1 7 4 US gt 71 Fuels coolants lubricants etc MB 325 0 Anticorrosion Antifreeze MB 325 0 Anticorrosion Antifreeze MB 325 0 Anticorrosion Antifreeze Premium unleaded gasoline Minimum Posted Octane 91 Avg of 96 RON 86 MON R134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant oil never R12 ARAL Vitamol ZHM MB Windshield Washer Concentrate 1 Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate MB SummerFit and water for temperatures above freezing or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate MB SummerFit and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent antifreeze for temperatures below freezing Follow suggested mixing ratios gt page 401 394 Approved engine oils Engine oils are specifically tested for their suitability in our engines and durability for our service intervals Therefore only use approved engine oils and oil filters required for vehicles with Maintenance system Conventional petroleum based oils must not be used for vehicles with Maintenance
110. Good visibility For information on the windshield wipers see Switching on windshield wipers gt page 52 Headlamp cleaning system The button is located on the left side of the dashboard 1 Headlamp washer button gt Switch on the ignition gt page 40 gt Press button Q The headlamps are cleaned with a high pressure water jet i The headlamps will automatically be cleaned when you have e switched on the headlamps and e operated the windshield wipers with wind shield washer fluid fifteen times When you switch off the ignition the counter resets For information on filling up the washer reservoir see Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system gt page 257 Controls in detail Good visibility I Rear view mirrors For more information on setting the rear view mirrors see Mirrors gt page 43 Auto dimming mirror The reflection brightness of the interior rear view mirror will respond automatically to glare when e the ignition is switched on and e incoming light from headlamps falls on the sensor in the interior rear view mirror The rear view mirror will not react if e reverse gear R is engaged e the interior lighting is turned on 181 Controls in detail DI Good visibility Warning A N The auto dimming function does not react if incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors in the interior rear view mirror Glare can endange
111. IMER gt Press button or repeatedly until you see the 722S menu Press button J repeatedly until you see the overall analysis ox RT 0054 2 P54 32 3903 3 1 1 Overall analysis of RACETIMER 2 Overall driving time 3 Maximum speed 4 Average speed Overall distance driven 126 gt Press button J or Reg to see other lap analyses Lap analysis b These functions are only available if you have saved at least two laps and have stopped the RACETIMER gt Press button or repeatedly until you see the 722S menu Each lap is shown in its own submenu The fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol Q Press button J repeatedly until you see the ol analysis Kis con en 1355 1 Lap number 2 Lap time 3 Maximum speed 4 Average speed during lap Lap length OF meh i D 60 meh AS mi miles P54 32 3904 3 Controls in detail Control system ia AUDIO menu Operating the CD player ae gt Turn on the radio and select the The functions in the auo omenu operate 7 M1 S peepee lt d D 1011n S CD player gt page 158 the audio equipment which you currently Miles have turned on B Sout gt Press button or repeatedly until the settings for the CD currently being played are shown in the right multifunction display If no audio equipment is currently turned Pod 32 9204 31 on the message auo o F appears in the Station frequency multifunction displ
112. Move stalk forward or back in the direction of arrow Q until a comfort able steering wheel position is reached with your arms slightly bent at the elbow Adjusting steering column up or down gt Press the lever up or down in the direc tion of arrow 2 Make sure that you can move your legs freely and that you can see all the displays in the instru ment cluster clearly Getting started Adjusting Mirrors Adjust the interior and exterior rear view mirrors before driving so that you have a good view of the road and traffic conditions Warning A N In case of an accident liquid electrolyte may escape the mirror housing if the mirror glass breaks Electrolyte has an irritating effect Do not al low the liquid to come into contact with eyes skin clothing or respiratory system In case it does immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary Light hitting the mirror s at certain angles incident light could blind you As a result you may not be able to observe traffic con ditions and could cause an accident 43 Getting started Es Adjusting T Electrolyte drops coming into contact with the vehicle paint finish can be completely re moved only while in the liquid state and by applying plenty of water Interior rear view mirror gt Manually adjust the rear view mirror For more information see Rear view mir rors gt page 181 Exterior rear view
113. N During vehicle operation the boiling point of the brake fluid is continuously reduced through the absorption of moisture from the atmosphere Under extremely strenuous operating conditions this moisture content can lead to the formation of bubbles in the system thus reducing the system s efficiency Therefore the brake fluid must be replaced regularly Refer to your vehicle s Mainte nance Booklet for replacement interval Only brake fluid approved by Mercedes Benz is recommended Any au thorized Mercedes Benz Center will provide you with additional information Premium unleaded gasoline Warning A N Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous It burns violently and can cause serious personal injury Never allow sparks flame or smoking materials near gasoline Turn off the engine before refueling Whenever you are around gasoline avoid inhaling fumes and skin or cloth contact extinguish all smoking materials Direct skin contact with fuels and the inhalation of fuel vapors are damaging to your health T To maintain the engine s durability and per formance premium unleaded gasoline must be used If premium unleaded is not available and low octane fuel is used follow these precau tions e Have the fuel tank only partially filled with unleaded regular gasoline and fill up with premium unleaded gasoline as soon as possible e Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceler ation e Donot exc
114. Octane Number is posted at the pump also known as ANTI KNOCK INDEX Multifunction display Two display fields in the instrument cluster used to present information provided by the control system Multifunction steering wheel Steering wheel with buttons for operating the control system Normal occupant weight gt page 287 Technical terms OCS Occupant Classification System The system automatically turns the front passenger front air bag on or off based on the classified occupant size category determined by weight sensor readings from the seat Overspeed range Engine speeds within the red marking on the tachometer dial Avoid this engine speed range as it may result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Poly V belt drive Drives engine components alternator AC compressor etc from the engine 405 Technical terms Power train Collective term designating all compo nents used to generate and transmit motive power to the drive axles including e engine e clutch torque converter e transmission e transfer case e drive shaft e differential e axle shafts axles Production options weight gt page 287 Program mode selector switch Used to switch the automatic trans mission between sport operation S comfort operation C and manual operation MAN PSI Pounds per square inch gt page 288 406 Recommended tire inflation pre
115. Operator s Manual Our company and staff congratulate you on the purchase of your new Mercedes Benz SLR McLaren Roadster Your selection of our product is a demonstration of your trust in our company name Furthermore it exemplifies your desire to own an automobile that will be as easy as possible to operate and provide years of service Should you have any questions please contact your dealer contact for your Mercedes Benz SLR McLaren Roadster or call us at 1 800 FOR MERCedes in the USA or 1 800 387 0100 in Canada Your dealer contact will co ordinate appointments for servicing of your vehicle and clarify any issues arising from the use of your Mercedes Benz SLR McLaren Roadster Your Mercedes Benz represents the efforts of many skilled engineers and craftsmen To help assure your driving pleasure and also the safety of you and your passengers we ask you to make a small investment of time e Please read this manual carefully then return it to your vehicle where it will be handy for your reference e Please follow the recommendations contained in this manual They are designed to acquaint you with the operation of your Mercedes Benz SLR McLaren Roadster e Please pay attention to the warnings and cautions contained in this manual They are designed to help improve the safety of the vehicle operator and occupants We extend our best wishes for many miles of safe pleasurable driving Mercedes Benz USA LLC A Daimler Company
116. PMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure tell tale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehi cle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driv er s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale USA only Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is com bined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately One minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the mal function indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternat
117. Q again or gt Insert the SmartKey in starter switch 81 Safety and Security ie Driving safety systems In this section you will find information on the following driving safety systems e ABS Antilock Brake System e BAS Brake Assist System e ESP Electronic Stability Program e Electro hydraulic brake system 82 A The following factors increase the risk of accidents Warning e Excessive speed especially in turns e Wet and slippery road surfaces e Following another vehicle too closely The driving safety systems described in this section cannot reduce these risks or pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle Always adapt your driving style to the pre vailing road an weather conditions and keep a safe distance to other road users and ob jects on the street i In winter operation the maximum effective ness of the ABS the BAS the ESP and the electro hydraulic brake system is only achieved with winter tires gt page 292 or snow chains as required ABS A Do not pump the brake pedal Use firm steady brake pedal pressure instead Pump ing the brake pedal defeats the purpose of the ABS and significantly reduces braking effectiveness Warning The Antilock Brake System ABS regulates the brake pressure so that the wheels do not lock during braking This allows you to maintain the ability to steer your vehicle The ABS is functional above a speed of ap
118. SA only Using engine oils and oil filters of specification other than those expressly required for the Main tenance System or changing of oil and oil filter at change intervals longer than those called for by the Maintenance System will result in engine or emission control system damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty gt Using a rag unscrew filler cap 2 from filler neck gt Add engine oil as required Be careful not to overfill with oil Mercedes Benz recommends MOBIL 1 OIL Use the MB sheet number 229 3 and only SAE 5W 50 engine oils MB sheet numbers are printed on the out side of oil containers Be careful not to spill any oil when adding Avoid environmental damage caused by oil entering the ground or water BE Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off It could cause damage to the engine or emission control system not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty gt Screw the filler cap back on filler neck You will find further information about en gine oil in the Technical data section gt page 395 and gt page 393 Transmission fluid level The transmission fluid level does not need to be checked If you notice transmission fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions have an authorized Mercedes Benz Center check the transmission Operation Engine compartment poa Coolant l gt Continue turning the cap to the left and e Using a rag slowly open the cap The e
119. Set the wiper blade at 90 to the wiper arm Practical hints Replacing wiper blades po Pa 30 2218 31 gt Slide the wiper blade out in direction of arrow 363 Practical hints Replacing wiper blades Installing wiper blades gt Position the wiper blade at 90 to the wiper arm gt Slide the wiper blade onto the wiper arm gt Fold the wiper blade parallel to the wiper arm gt Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on the windshield Make sure you hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back 364 T Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back If released the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield Do not allow the wiper arms to contact the windshield glass without a wiper blade inserted Make sure the wiper blades are properly installed Improperly installed wiper blades may cause windshield damage For your convenience we recommend that you have this work carried out by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Vv Flat tire The vehicle is equipped with the TIREFIT kit i A wheel change should only be carried out at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Other wise there is a danger of damaging the vehicle by Jacking it up incorrectly Preparing the vehicle gt Park the vehicle in a safe distance from moving traffic on a hard flat surface when possible Turn on the hazard warning flashers Turn the steering wheel so that the fr
120. System For a listing of approved engine oils and oil filters contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center or visit www mbusa com USA only Mercedes Benz recommends MOBIL 1 OIL Use the MB sheet number 229 3 and only SAE 5W 50 engine oils MB sheet numbers are printed on the out side of oil containers T Using engine oils and oil filters of specification other than those expressly re quired for the Maintenance System or changing of oil and oil filter at change intervals longer than those called for by the Maintenance System will result in engine or emission control system dam age not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Please follow Maintenance System recommen dations for scheduled oil changes Failure to do so will result in engine or emission control sys tem damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Engine oil additives i Do not blend oil additives with engine oil They may damage the engine Damage or malfunctions resulting from blending oil additives are not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty 395 Technical data p Fuels coolants lubricants etc Air conditioning refrigerant R134a HFC refrigerant and special PAG lubricating oil are used in the air condition ing system T Never use R12 CFC or mineral based lubricating oil Otherwise damage to the system will occur 396 Brake fluid Warning A
121. T to provide a reliable tire repair Warning In this case TIREFIT cannot properly seal the tire Do not drive the vehicle Contact the nearest Mercedes Benz Center or call Roadside Assistance gt After attaining a tire inflation pressure of 26 psi 1 8 bar press O on electric air pump switch 8 The electric air pump should now be switched off gt Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position O gt page 40 gt Detach the electric air pump The air hose may still be hot Please exercise appropriate caution 368 gt Store the electrical plug and the air hose behind the flap and place the electrical air pump back in the trunk Close the trunk lid Drive off immediately The TIREFIT sealant will distribute itself evenly inside the tire A Warning Do not exceed vehicle speed of 50 mph 80 km h A TIREFIT repair is not designed to operate at higher speeds The sticker must be attached on the instru ment cluster where it will be easily seen by the driver Vehicle handling characteristics may change Adapt your driving accordingly gt After driving vehicle for an initial 10 minutes check tire inflation pres sure using the pressure gauge on the air pump gt A If tire inflation pressure has fallen below 20 psi 1 3 bar do not continue to drive the vehicle Warning Park your vehicle safely away from the road way and contact the nearest authorized Merced
122. The seat back rest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright posi tion and the seat belt is properly positioned on the body Warning A N Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available Be sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time Warning A N Damaged seat belts or seat belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be re placed and their anchoring points must also be checked Only use seat belts which have been approved by Mercedes Benz Do not make any modifications to the seat belts This can lead to unintended activation of the ETDs or to their failure to activate when necessary Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection Have all work carried out only by qualified technicians Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Safety and Security Occupant safety a Warning A N USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY Seat belts can only work when used properly Never wear seat belts in any other way than as described in this section as that could result in serious injuries in case of an accident Each occupant should wear their seat belt at all times because seat belts help reduce the likelihood of and potential severity of injuries in accidents includ ing roll
123. VIN 382 407 O Occupant Classification System see OCS Occupant distribution 287 Occupant safety Air bags 62 Children and air bags 63 Children in the vehicle 76 Fastening the seat belts 45 Infant and child restraint systems 76 OCS 67 Passenger front air bag off indicator lamp 70 Seat belts 72 SRS 60 OCS 67 405 Self test 71 Octane number 406 Odometer Main 117 Trip 115 Oil level see Engine oil Checking level Oil see Engine oil One touch gearshifting Gear selector lever 175 Steering wheel gearshift control 177 Operating safety Audio system 145 Vehicle 20 Operators manual 356 index Outside temperature 122 Outside temperature see Displays Overdue maintenance service 295 Overhead control panel 33 Overspeed range Engine 116 405 P Panic alarm 81 Parcel net in trunk 210 Parking 55 240 Parking brake 32 Engaging 56 Message in the multifunction display 339 Releasing 49 Parking lamps 106 Message in the multifunction display 348 Replacing bulbs 361 Parts service 380 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp 70 Passenger compartment 244 Passenger front air bag 419 index Messages in the multifunction display 324 327 Passenger front air bag off indicator lamp 70 317 Passenger safety see Occupant safety Pedals 235 Performance enhancement system Airbrake 90 Phone see Telephone Poly V belt drive 405 Layout 383 Power assistance 236 Power outlet 212 Power train 406 Power washer 299 Power windows 196 Cleaning
124. Warranty coverage a Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet Should you lose your Service and Warranty Information booklet have an authorized Mercedes Benz Center arrange for a replacement It will be mailed to you 381 Technical data ae Identification labels 1 Vehicle certification label with Vehicle Identification Number 2 Product option code plate with paint number The vehicle certification plate with the Ve hicle Identification Number and the vehicle identification plate certification plate with the paint number are located on the A pillar on the driver s side The Vehicle Identification Number is locat ed on the driver s side in the bottom corner of the windshield 382 3 Vehicle Identification Number E a re 7 a Per _ F oe ri F a go m d Pa i t a AE d py gt FE 7 3 a d no en ima ee g F se i Ew Be oe oa at oe t pam 4 Emission control information label includes both federal and California certification exhaust emission standards Engine number The engine number is engraved on the un derside of the engine and can only be read after removing the casing on the bottom of the engine There is also a plate on the left hand side of the engine cover When ordering parts please specify vehicle identification and engine numbers Y Layout of poly V belt drive _1 YY E P13 21 3037 31 The SLR has two poly
125. When operating the Airbrake make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the Airbrake operation i e raising and lowering of flap Be especially careful when small children are around 90 The Airbrake switch is on the upper part of the center console Airbrake modes Manual 2 Automatic 3 Test 4 Airbrake switch gt Switch on the ignition gt page 40 The system runs a self test to ensure correct operation of the Airbrake Test mode The test mode allows you to check that the Airbrake is functioning correctly This mode can only be activated when the vehicle is at standstill gt Slide Airbrake switch to position G The Airbrake swivels upwards to an angle of 65 gt Release the Airbrake switch The Airbrake returns to its initial position Safety and Security Performance enhancement system Manual mode In this mode the Airbrake is set to an angle of 30 Mercedes Benz SLR McLaren Roadster 722 S 35 The driver down force mode enhances stability while reduc ing agility gt Slide the Airbrake switch to position 1 The Airbrake swivels upwards to an an gle of 30 Mercedes Benz SLR McLaren Roadster 722 S 35 and stays in this position BE Before deactivating manual mode check the Airbrake for any objects which may have be come lodged e g branches or leaves and remove them Otherwise the Airbrake can no longer function correctly
126. When you have selected a number press the snokey The call will be made Automatic repeat dialing redial If a call cannot be connected press the snpkey RED AL Will appear in the display and re peated attempts to place the call will be made for the next 4 minutes Selecting numbers directly from the directory gt Enter previously selected 3 digit 1 999 number of the entry using number keys ME to ER gt Press the ra key The telephone number stored under that entry will be dialed gt Press the snokey The call will be made Controls in detail Audio system a Speed dialing gt Input desired entry number using number keys EE to RJ A maximum of two digits can be en tered If necessary correct the last number entered with the ar key gt Press the snokey The telephone number stored under that entry will be dialed The number L and the full entry number will be shown in the display Quick dialing gt Press one of the desired number buttons JJ to BRM longer than 1 second The telephone number saved under that number will be dialed BE Please be aware that button Jj might al ready be reserved for an emergency call number 165 Controls in detail mz Audio system Emergency calls 911 The following describes how to dial a 911 emergency call using the audio system head unit when a Mercedes Benz specified mobile phone is connected with the Blue tooth
127. a decrease in weight Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and check the passenger seat for the following Switch off the ignition gt page 40 gt Apply the parking brake gt page 55 gt Have the passenger vacate the seat and exit the vehicle vy Keep the seat unoccupied close the passenger door and switch on the ignition gt page 40 Monitor the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp gt page 70 and the multifunction display in the instrument cluster gt page 117 for the following With the seat unoccupied and the ignition switched on e the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp gt page 70 should illuminate and remain illuminated indicating that the OCS gt page 67 has deactivated the passenger front air bag and the passenger knee air bag Continued on next page Practical hints What to do if ae Left display Right display Possible cause consequence Possible solution e the message Front Passeng Ai rbag Enabl ed See er Manual or the message Front Passeng Ai rbag Di sabl ed See Qoer Manual Should not appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is unoccu pied Wait at least 60 seconds for the system to com plete the necessary check cycles and to make sure neither message appears in the multifunction display If above conditions are met you can occupy the passenger seat again Depending on the passenger classification sensed by the OCS gt page 6
128. a drive wheel This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Tire speed rating Regardless of the tire speed rating local speed limits should be obeyed Use prudent driving speeds appropriate to prevailing conditions 242 A Even when permitted by law never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the maxi mum speed rating of the tires Warning Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and or personal injury and possible death for you and for others Your vehicle is factory equipped with Y rated tires which have a speed rating of over 186 mph 300 km h a For information on tire speed rating for win ter tires see Winter tires gt page 292 For additional general information on tire speed markings on tire sidewall see Tire speed rating gt page 279 Winter driving instructions The most important rule for slippery or icy roads Is to drive sensibly and to avoid abrupt acceleration braking and steering maneuvers Do not use the cruise control system under such conditions When the vehicle is in danger of skidding move gear selector lever to neutral position N Try to keep the vehicle under control by corrective steering action For information on driving with snow chains see Snow chains gt
129. ach tire Checking tire inflation pressure electronically with the Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring System Advanced TPMS i USA only The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS is equipped with a combination low tire pres sure TPMS malfunction telltale in the instru ment cluster page 29 Depending on how the telltale illuminates it indicates a low tire pres sure condition or a malfunction in the TPMS sys tem itself e f the telltale illuminates continuously one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated There is no malfunction in the TPMS e 6 f the telltale flashes for 60 seconds and then stays illuminated the TPMS system itself is not operating properly Operation Tires and wheels nn USA only This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interfer ence and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment b Canada only This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Any
130. ades e in mountainous regions e under extreme operating conditions 1 The transmission operates in the first gear only For maximum use of engine s braking effect on very steep or lengthy downgrades Shift program mode selector switch Turnthe program mode selector switch a a a ba es j S j p ae gt P Program mode selector switch C Comfort For comfort driving MAN Manual For manual gear shifting gt page 178 S Sport For standard driving The selected shift program appears in the right multifunction display gt page 117 T Never change the program when the gear selector leveris out of park position P This could result in a change of driving characteristics for which you may not be prepared to the desired setting The letter of the desired shift program appears in the right multifunction display Select C for comfort driving e The vehicle starts out in second gear for gentler starts This does not apply if full throttle is applied or gear range 1 Is selected e Traction and driving stability are improved on icy roads e Upshifts occur earlier even when you give more gas The engine then operates at lower roms and the wheels are less likely to spin Controls in detail Automatic transmission ia Gear selector lever one touch gearshifting With the gear selector lever in drive posi tion D and driving in shift program C or S you can limit or exte
131. adster 722 S Use of tires not spe cially approved for the Mercedes Benz SLR McLaren Roadster 722 S could result in unanticipated performance characteristics For more information contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center 387 Technical data ee Rims and tires Winter tires Only Mercedes Benz SLR McLaren Roadster l Turbine style 10 spoke style Front axle Rims light alloy 93x19 9 x 18 Wheel offset 1 83 in 46 5 mm 1 77 in 45 mm Summer tires radial ply tires 255 35 R19 96V M S 245 40 R18 97V M S XL Rear axle Rims light alloy 93x19 9 x 18 Wheel offset 1 83 in 46 5 mm 1 77 in 45 mm Summer tires radial ply tires 255 35 R19 96V M S 245 40 R18 97V M S XL T Only use Michelin or Dunlop tires of the siz es and types noted above They are the only tires approved for use on the SLR Use of tires not specially approved for the SLR could result in unanticipated performance characteristics For more information contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center 388 Technical data Rims and tires a Only Mercedes Benz SLR McLaren Roadster 722 S l Turbine style Front axle Rims light alloy 93x19 Wheel offset 1 83 in 46 5 mm Tires radial ply tires 255 35 R19 96V XL M S Rear axle Rims light alloy 93x19 Wheel offset 1 83 in 46 5 mm Tires radial ply tires 255 35 R19 96V XL M S l T Only use Dunlop tires of the sizes and types noted above They are the only tires approved for use on
132. ag and the passenger knee air bag are activated If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is illuminated the passenger front air bag and the passenger knee air bag are deactivated and will not be deployed If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is not illuminated the passenger front air bag and the passenger knee air bag are activated and will be deployed e inthe event of certain frontal impacts e if impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold e independently of the head thorax air bags If the passenger front air bag and the pas senger knee air bag are deployed the rate of inflation will be influenced by e the rate of relevant vehicle deceleration as assessed by the air bag control unit e passengers weight category as identi fied by the Occupant Classification System OCS Warning A N Children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropri ate infant or child restraint recommended for the size and weight of the child The infant or child restraint must be properly secured with the vehicle s seat belt fully in accordance with the child seat manufactur er s instructions Children can be killed or seriously injured by an inflating air bag Note the following important information e Your vehicle is equipped with air bag technology designed to turn off the pas senger front air bag and the passenger knee air bag in your vehicle when the system senses the weight o
133. age can be determined on the e major assemblies e fuel system e engine mount gt Start the engine in the usual manner Y Parking and locking You have now completed your first drive You have properly stopped and parked your vehicle End your drive as follows Warning A N With the engine not running there is no power assistance for the brake and steering system In this case it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle Warning A N Do not park this vehicle in areas where com bustible materials such as grass hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire To reduce the risk of personal injury or dam age to the vehicle drivetrain as a result of ve hicle movement before turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle always e Keep right foot on brake pedal e Pull the parking brake lever up as many notches as possible e Move the gear selector lever to park position P e Slowly release brake pedal e When parked on an incline turn front wheels towards the road curb e Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 and remove e Take the SmartKey with you and lock vehicle when leaving Getting started Parking and locking Parking brake Warning A N Engaging the parking brake while the vehicle is in motion can cause the r
134. aged For more information on battery mainte nance see Batteries gt page 370 Windshield washer system and head lamp cleaning system Fluid for the windshield washer system and the headlamp cleaning system is supplied from the windshield washer reservoir It has a capacity of approximately 7 4 US gt 7 0 I During all seasons add MB Windshield Washer Concentrate MB SummerFit to water Premix the windshield washer fluid in a suitable container gt Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield Washer Concentrate and water or commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent antifreeze depending on ambient temperatures i Always use washer solvent antifreeze where temperatures may fall below freezing point Failure to do so could result in damage to the washer system reservolr i Only use washer fluid which is suitable for plastic lenses Improper washer fluid can damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps Do not use distilled or deionized water in the washer fluid reservoir Otherwise the washer fluid level sensor could be damaged A Washer solvent antifreeze is highly flamma ble Do not spill washer solvent antifreeze on hot engine parts because it may ignite and burn You could be seriously burned Warning Operation Trunk The washer fluid reservoir is located in the trunk underneath the interior floor on the left hand side 1 Interior floor 2 Loop 3 Removing
135. ain gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center immediately During severe operating conditions and Warning A stop and go city traffic the coolant tem perature may rise close to 248 F 120 C Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked T The engine should not be operated with the into the engine compartment to catch fire coolant temperature above 248 F 120 C Yourcould be seriously burned Doing so may cause serious engine damage which ts not covered by the Mercedes Benz Steam from an overheated engine can cause Limited Warranty serious burns which can occur just by open ing the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from other traffic Turn off the engine get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down 342 Left display Right display Possible cause consequence sE Di fferenti al The differential oil is too hot Over heat ed BE The differential warning should not be ignored Extended driving with the symbol displayed could result in serious rear differential damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Practical hints What to do if ae Possible solution Stop your vehicle immediately in a safe location Do not drive any further Apply the parking brake gt page 55 v v vy Yy Wait until the instrument clust
136. alfunction indicator lamp 29 308 Number 382 404 Poly V belt layout 383 Starting 47 Tachometer 29 Technical data 384 Turning off 56 414 Engine coolant see Coolant Engine oil 253 395 Adding 254 393 Additives 253 395 Checking level 253 Consumption 253 Fillerneck 253 Message in the multifunction display 344 Recommended engine oils and oil filter 395 Temperature 29 Oil temperature indicator 311 Viscosity 404 ESP 82 84 404 Messages in the multifunction display 323 Resetting 323 Warning lamp 84 304 ETD 75 404 Safety guidelines 64 Exterior lamp switch 51 106 Exterior rear view mirrors 44 F Filler neck Engine oil 253 First aid kit 356 Flat tire 365 Preparing the vehicle 365 TIREFIT kit 365 Floormats 227 Floormats Only Mercedes Benz SLR McLaren 722 S 228 Fluids Automatic transmission fluid 254 393 Brake fluid 249 393 396 Capacities 393 Engine coolant 255 394 398 Engine oil 253 393 395 Power steering fluid 393 Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system 257 394 Foglamps 109 362 Message in the multifunction display 346 Front airbags 65 Front lamps see Headlamps Fuel 247 Additives 397 Capacity Fuel tank 394 Consumption statistics Filler flap 247 Filling the tank 247 Fuel reserve warning lamp 29 311 Gauge 29 Premium unleaded gasoline 247 396 Requirements Octane rating 394 397 Fuel filler cap Messages in the multifunction display 309 345 Fuel filler flap Locking unlocking 24
137. als from the GPS satellite network and pass the informa tion on to the Response Center Controls in detail Useful features ia The Tele Aid system Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response e Automatic and manual emergency Roadside Assistance Information The Tele Aid system is operational provid ing that the vehicle s battery is charged properly connected not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is available The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular network for communication and the GPS Global Positioning System satellites for vehicle location If either of these signals are unavailable the Tele Aid system may not function and if this occurs assistance must be summoned by other means 215 Controls in detail ia Useful features The speaker volume of a Tele Aid callcan System self check Emergency calls be adjusted when using the volume control An emergency call is initiated on the audio system or on the multifunc automatically following an accident in The system performs a self test after you have switched on the ignition tion steering wheel To raise turn the rota ry volume control on the audio system clockwise or press button on the multifunction steering wheel To lower turn the rotary volume control on the audio system control counterclockwise or press button EE on the multifunction steering wheel 216 Warning VAN If
138. am The high beam headlamp indicator lamp E in the instrument cluster goes out High beam flasher gt Pull the combination switch briefly in direction of arrow 2 Hazard warning flasher Switching on hazard warning flasher The hazard warning flasher can be pe Rae aera Wal vlne eee switched on at all times even with the switch SmartKey removed from the starter All turn signals are flashing switch With the hazard warning flasher activated The hazard warning flasher switches on and the combination switch set for either left or automatically when an air bag deploys right turn only the respective turn signals will a operate when the ignition is switched on The hazard warning flasher switch is located on the upper part of the center console 1 Hazard warning flasher switch Controls in detail Lighting a Switching off hazard warning flasher gt Press hazard warning flasher switch 4 again a If the hazard warning flasher has been activated automatically press hazard warning flasher switch Q once to switch it off 111 Controls in detail an Lighting Interior lighting Automatic control Activating The interior lighting is factory set to gt Slide switch to the left automatic mode The controls are located in the overhead control panel Interior lamps switches on in darkness o when you Deactivating e unlock the vehicle gt Slide switch to the right eee
139. an authorized Mercedes Benz Center or call 1 800 FOR MERCedes in the USA or 1 800 387 0100 in Canada Anti theft alarm system Once the alarm system has been armed a visual and audible alarm is triggered when someone opens e adoor e the trunk e the hood e the storage compartment between the backrests e the storage compartment under the armrest The alarm will stay on even if the activat ing element a door for example is imme diately closed Safety and Security Anti theft systems p The alarm system will also be triggered when e someone attempts to raise the vehicle e someone opens a door from the inside if the vehicle was locked with the SmartKey e someone opens the trunk with the emergency release button i If the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds a call to the Response Center is ini tiated automatically by the Tele Aid system gt page 215 provided Tele Aid service was sub scribed to and properly activated and that nec essary cellular service and GPS coverage are available 93 Safety and Security i Anti theft systems Arming the alarm system gt Lock the vehicle with the SmartKey The turn signal lamps flash three times to indicate that the alarm system is activated The indicator lamp in the central locking switch gt page 105 be gins to flash after arming the alarm system f the turn signal lamps do not flash three times a door or the trunk may not be prope
140. and si 1 appears in the display Side 1 is the side of the cassette which Is facing up ward The cassette deck will automati cally detect the type of tape THRE CTCE 4 han oo TRE AJR ALC SR Pa 60 4071 31 or gt Ifa cassette is already in the mechanism press button Controls in detail Audio system i Cassette eject Track search A warning signal will sound after 20 seconds if the display panel is left in the down position Fold display panel back up If the display panel is not closed a warning signal will sound and the radio will be muted Track selection TAPE Toe 5 ye ee SE P82 60 4072 31 gt Press the trk key The current track will be displayed as S DE 1 OF SI CE 2 You can switch sides at any time The side will be changed automatically at the end of the tape gt Press eject button SM The display folds down and the cas sette is ejected The system will switch back to radio mode automatically gt Fold display panel back up and press gently on the display panel frame to lock it T Do not press directly on the display face Otherwise the display will be damaged i The cassette will not be ejected when the system is switched off or switched to another operating mode Track search forward P82 60 4073 31 gt Press XJ button SEEK FWowill appear in the display Track search will run the tape forward to the start of the next track and switch
141. are released the vehicle can be moved freely pushed or towed To avoid damage to the trans mission never engage neutral position N while driving If the ESP is deactivated or malfunctioning Move gear selector lever to neu tral position N only if the vehicle is in danger of skidding e g on icy roads Drive position The transmission shifts automatically All five forward gears are available 171 Controls in detail a Automatic transmission Ba Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason with gear selector lever in neutral position N can result in transmission damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty 172 Warning A N Getting out of your vehicle with the gear selector lever not fully engaged in park position P is dangerous Also park position P alone is not intended to or capa ble of preventing your vehicle from moving possibly hitting people or objects Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to park position P gt page 55 When parked on an incline turn the front wheels towards the road curb Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire Warning A N When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave chil
142. arning messages or the failure of any systems Driving characteristics may be impaired If you must continue to drive do so with added caution Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible 320 i Switching on the ignition causes all instru ment cluster lamps except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated as well as the multifunction display to come on Make sure the lamps and multifunction display are in working order before starting your journey On the pages that follow you will find a compilation of the most important warning and malfunction messages that may appear in the multifunction display High priority messages appear in red color For your convenience the messages are divided into two sections e Text messages gt page 321 e Symbol messages gt page 332 Text messages Left display ABS Right display ABS ESP Unavai abl e See Oper Manual Possible cause consequence Risk of accident The ABS and ESP are not available due to a malfunction The BAS is also deactivated The system s self diagnosis may not be completed yet The electro hydraulic brake system is still functioning normally but with out the ABS the ESP and the BAS available Practical hints What to do if a Possible solution gt Drivea short distance with added caution at a vehicle speed of above 12 mph 20 km h When the message disappe
143. ars the ABS the ESP and the BAS are available again If the message does not disappear Continue driving with added caution Wheels may lock during hard braking reducing steering capability gt Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident 321 Practical hints pe What to do if Left display ABS MPH USA only Km h Canada only 322 Right display ABS ESP I noper ati ve See Oper Manual Cr ui se Control Possible cause consequence Possible solution gt Continue driving with added caution Wheels may lock during hard braking reducing steering capability Risk of accident The ABS and ESP have switched off due to a malfunction a N E gt Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible The electro hydraulic brake system is still functioning normally but with out the ABS the ESP and the BAS available One of the activation conditions for Drive faster than 20 mph 30 km h if the cruise control has not been fulfilled situation allows and set the speed For example you attempted to set a gt page 205 speed below 20 mph 30 km h The ESP is switched off Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident gt Switch on the ESP gt page 87 Exceptions gt page 86 Practi
144. ary apply full pressure to the brake pedal Brakes are only applied to the front wheels Stopping distance is increased Adjust your driving style accordingly For more information see Electro hydraulic brake system gt page 87 Warning A N With a disconnected battery you will no longer be able to turn the SmartKey in the starter switch the gear selector lever will remain locked in park position P Warning A N Never charge a battery while still installed in the vehicle unless the battery charge unit approved by Mercedes Benz supplied with your vehicle is being used Gases may es cape during charging and cause explosions that may result in paint damage corrosion or personal injury A battery charge unit specially adapted for Mercedes Benz vehicles and tested and approved by Mercedes Benz is available permitting the charging of the battery in its installed position Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for information and availability Charge battery in accordance with the separate operating instructions for the battery charger You can obtain detailed information on charging the battery from your authorized Mercedes Benz Center 371 Practical hints Batteries Charging with the battery charger Only use the battery charge unit approved by Mercedes Benz and supplied with your vehicle This charger is designed to auto matically control the charge rate and charge the battery or maintain the
145. as when your vehicle is equipped with mixed size tires different tire dimension front vs rear tire rotation is not possible If applicable to your vehicle s tire configu ration tires can be rotated according to the tire manufacturer s recommended in tervals in the tire manufacturer s warranty pamphlet located in your vehicle literature portfolio If none is available tires should be rotated every 3000 to 6000 miles 5000 to 10000 km or sooner if neces sary according to the degree of tire wear The same rotation spinning direction must be maintained gt page 262 Rotate tires before the characteristic tire wear pattern becomes visible shoulder wear on front tires and tread center wear on rear tires 289 Operation fa Tires and wheels Thoroughly clean the mounting face of wheels and brake disks i e the inner side of the wheels tires during each rotation Check for and ensure proper tire inflation pressure A Have the tightening torque checked after changing a wheel Wheels could become loose if not tightened with a torque of 95 Ib ft 130 Nm Warning Only use Genuine Mercedes Benz wheel bolts specified for your vehicle s rims For information on wheel change see the Practical hints section gt page 365 290 Anti theft wheel nuts Your vehicle is equipped with anti theft wheel nuts that prevent the theft of your vehicle s wheels A Pull the parking brake lever up as
146. at move the seat as far back as possible use the proper child restraint recom mended for the age size and weight of the child and secure child restraint with the vehicle s seat belt according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions For children larger than the typical 12 month old child the passenger front air bag and the passenger knee air bag may or may not be activated gt page 68 Deployment of the driver front air bag does not mean that the passenger front air bag also should have deployed The Occupant Classification System gt page 67 may have determined e that the seat was empty or occupied by the weight up to or less than that of a typical 12 month old child seated in a standard child restraint both instances where the system suppresses deployment of the passenger front air bag even though the impact met the criteria and was of sufficient severity to deploy the driver front air bag e that the seat was occupied by a small individ ual such as a young teenager or a small adult or a child weighing more than the weight of a typical 12 month old child in a standard child restraint instances where the system may suppress deployment of the passenger front air bag even though the impact met the criteria and was of sufficient severity to deploy the driver front air bag The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is located in lower part of the center console 1 Passenger front air bag off indi
147. ati c Door Lock The selection marker is on the current setting Automatic ao Door Lock a lt P54 32 4958 31 gt Press button or E to switch Aut onati c Door Lock n Or Off gt _ Trip computer menu Use the trip computer menu to call up statistical data on your vehicle The following information is available Function Page Fuel consumption statistics since 139 start Fuel consumption statistics since 140 last reset Resetting fuel consumption 140 Statistics Distance to empty 140 L The last function called up will reappear the next time you enter the trip computer menu Controls in detail Control system ia Fuel consumption statistics since start gt Press button or repeatedly until you see the first function of the trip computer menu gt Press button JM or Keg repeatedly until you see the following message in the left multifunction display From Start GO MPH e a 135 M7 Bor 12304 Ta MPG P54 32 6487 31 1 Distance driven since start 2 Average speed since start 3 Time elapsed since start 4 Average fuel consumption since start ab All statistics stored since the last engine start will be reset approximately 4 hours after the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position 0 or removed from the starter switch Resetting will not occur if you turn the SmartKey back to position 1 or 2 within this time period 139 Controls in detail mz Control s
148. ation Tires and wheels a DOT 2 Manufacturer s identification mark 3 Tire size 4 Tire type code at the option of the tire manufacturer Date of manufacture i For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration 281 Operation re Tires and wheels DOT Department of Transportation A tire branding symbol Q gt page 281 which denotes the tire meets require ments of the U S Department of Transportation Manufacturer s identification mark The manufacturer s identification mark 2 gt page 281 denotes the tire manufacturer New tires have a mark with two symbols Retreaded tires have a mark with four sym bols For more information on retreaded tires see gt page 259 Tire size The code 3 gt page 281 indicates the tire size 282 Tire type code The code gt page 281 may at the option of the manufacturer be used as a descriptive code for identifying significant characteristics of the tire Date of manufacture The date of manufacture gt page 28 1 identifies the week and year of manufacture The first two figures identify the week starting with 0 1 to represent the first full week of the calendar year The second two figures represent the year For example 3202 represents the 32nd week of 2002 Maximum tire load 14 Maximum tire l
149. ation included with vehicle 385 Technical data ee Rims and tires Mixed size tires Only Mercedes Benz SLR McLaren Roadster l Turbine style 10 spoke style Front axle Rims light alloy 9Jx19 9Jx18 Wheel offset 1 83 in 46 5 mm 1 77 in 45 mm Summer tires radial ply tires 255 35 ZR19 96Y XL 245 40 ZR18 93Y Rear axle Rims light alloy 11 Jx 19 1175 x 18 Wheel offset 1 73 in 44 mm 1 73 in 44 mm Summer tires radial ply tires 295 30 ZR19 100Y XL 295 35 ZR18 99Y 1 Must not be used with snow chains BE Only use Michelin tires of the sizes and types noted above They are the only tires approved for use on the Mercedes Benz SLR McLaren Roadster Use of tires not specially ap proved for the Mercedes Benz SLR McLaren Roadster could result in unanticipated perfor mance characteristics For more information contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center 386 Technical data Rims and tires a Only Mercedes Benz SLR McLaren Roadster 722 S l Multi spoke rims in forged aluminum Front axle Rims light alloy 93x19 Wheel offset 1 83 in 46 5 mm Summer tires radial ply tires 255 35 ZR19 96Y XL Rear axle Rims light alloy 111 Jx 19 Wheel offset 1 73 in 44 mm Summer tires radial ply tires 295 30 ZR19 100Y XL Must not be used with snow chains T Only use Michelin tires of the sizes and types noted above They are the only tires approved for use on the Mercedes Benz SLR McLaren Ro
150. ay 2 Wave band setting The following functions are available 3 Setting for station selection using memory Function Page POF lt amp gt Press button BV or repeatedly 6753 Miles TRACK 5 Selecting radio station 127 until the desired station is found a Operating CD player 127 The type of search depends on the P54 32 5205 31 setting for the station tuning 1 Current track Selecting radio station gt page 138 2 Current CD with additional number gt Turn onthe radio gt page 148 e Memory the next stored station is On EOE EO On changer selected SP gt Press button or repeatedly until you see the currently tuned sta e Station search d ii SURON BA o Ea PAE ee l l l until the desired track is selected tion in the right multifunction display i You can only store new stations using the corresponding feature on the radio page 153 127 Controls in detail a Control system Vehicle status message memory menu Use the vehicle status message memory menu to scan malfunction and warning messages that may be stored in the system Such messages appear in the multifunction display and are based on conditions or system status the vehicle s system has recorded The vehicle status message memory menu only appears if messages have been stored A Malfunction and warning messages are only indicated for certain systems and are inten tionally not very detailed The malfunction and warning messages are simpl
151. band MW medium wave 530 1710 KHz Controls in detail Audio system a Press FM AM or WE key repeatedly until desired band has been selected The FM AM and WEB frequency bands are called up one after the other The frequency band currently selected appears in the upper left hand corner of the display Selecting a station The following options are available for selecting a station Direct frequency band input gt page 152 Manual tuning gt page 152 Automatic seek tuning gt page 152 Scan tuning gt page 153 Preset buttons gt page 153 Automatic station memory Autostore gt page 153 151 Controls in detail mz Audio system Direct frequency input gt Select the desired frequency band rr es he HEND GiS gems O mun i aie ie Cal it ii i ii F Low beh P82 60 4756 31 gt Press RJ button gt Enter desired frequency using buttons EN to EJ You can only enter frequencies within the respective waveband If a button is not pressed within 4 seconds the radio will return to the station last tuned to 152 Manual tuning gt Select the desired frequency band Pa 60 4755 31 gt Press and hold either the JMNM or BVA button until the desired frequency is reached Step by step station tuning takes place in ascending or descending order of frequency The first three tuning steps will take place without muting After wards the radio wi
152. bber e bumps bulges cuts cracks or splits in the tread or side of the tire Replace the tire if you find any of the above conditions Warning A N Have worn or damaged tires replaced in pairs front pair or rear pair an make sure the tires rotate in the direction specified gt page 262 Otherwise the driving stabili ty of the vehicle will be adversely affected especially when driving at high speeds Life of tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire inflation pressure e Distance driven A Warning Tires should be replaced after 6 years regardless of the remaining tread Tread depth Do not allow your tires to wear down too far Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply reduced at tread depths of less than in 3 mm Treadwear indicators TWI are required by law These indicators are located in six places on the tread circumference and become visible at a tread depth of approximately in 1 6 mm at which point the tire is considered worn and should be replaced Recommended minimum tire tread depth e Summer tires in 3 mm e Winter tires in 4 mm A Although the applicable federal motor safety laws consider a tire to be worn when the treadwear indicators TWI become visible at approximately in 1 6 mm we recom mend that you do not allow your tires to wear down to that level As t
153. be caused by residual wax on the windshield Power washer ag Do not use power washer to clean your vehicle or the engine Cleaning the windows and wiper blades T The hood must be opened gt page 250 be fore folding the wiper arm away from the wind Shield You could otherwise damage the hood and or the wiper arms T Never open or close the hood when the wip er arms are folded away from the windshield You could otherwise damage the hood and or the wiper arm A For safety reasons switch off wipers and remove SmartKey from starter switch before cleaning the wiper blades Otherwise the wiper motor could suddenly turn on and cause injury Warning Operation Vehicle care fie gt Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch T Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts They could tear gt Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield gt page 363 You must feel the wiper arm engage in position gt Clean the wiper blade inserts with a clean cloth and detergent solution gt Usea soft clean cloth and a mild win dow cleaning solution on all outside and inside glass surfaces An automotive glass cleaner is recommended i To clean the window interior do not use a dry cloth abrasives solvents or cleaners con taining solvents Do not touch the inside of the front rear or door windows with hard objects such as an ice scraper or ring Doing so may damage the windows 299 Operation fa Vehi
154. be re set unless you confirm the action by pressing the reset button a second time After approximately 5 seconds you see the Setti ngs Menu again 129 Controls in detail mz Control system Submenus in the Settings menu gt Press button or repeatedly until you see the set ti ngs Menu in the multifunction display gt Press button Fag In the right multifunction display you see the collection of submenus TT a m A amp Lighting y e ee pe pem P54 32 6467 31 130 Press button EEJ The selection marker moves to the next submenu Scroll down with button EE scroll up with button ES With the selection marker on the de sired submenu use button to access the individual functions within that submenu Once within the submenu use button WAG to move to the next function or button BY to move to the previous function within that submenu Use button or SSM to change the settings of the respective function The table below shows what settings can be changed within the various menus Detailed instructions on making individual settings can be found on the following pages Instrument cluster Time gt page 132 gt page 133 Selecting digital soeedometer Setting time minutes display mode Selecting standard display Setting time hours Selecting language Lighting gt page 134 Setting daytime running lamp mode USA only Setting locator lighting Setting night securi
155. booster Warning When the child restraint is not in use remove it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat belt to prevent the child restraint from becoming a projectile in the event of an accident Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle even if the children are secured in a child restraint system A child s unsuper vised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and or serious personal injury Installation of infant and child restraint systems This vehicle is equipped with a tether an chorage for a top tether strap behind the passenger seat 1 Cover of anchorage ring gt Tohave better access to the anchorage ring move the passenger seat forward gt page 42 gt Remove cover 1 in direction of the arrow from anchorage ring 3 gt gt Safety and Security Occupant safety p Guide tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions Make sure the tether strap is not twisted P91 40 2512 31 2 Hook 3 Anchorage ring gt Securely fasten hook 2 which is part of the tether strap to anchorage ring For safety make sure the hook has attached to the ring beyond the safety catch as illustrated gt gt 79 Safety and Security as Occupant safety gt gt gt Move the passenger seat as far as possible rearward Once the top tether anchorage hook is attached the child restraint itself can be Sec gt 80 ure
156. cal hints What to do if ae Left display Right display Possible cause consequence Possible solution ESP ESP Risk of accident gt Continue driving with added caution Green The ESP has detected a malfunc Have the system checked at an authorized nae tion and switched off Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Oper Manual The ABS may not be operational Failure to follow these instructions increases The electro hydraulic brake system the risk of an accident is still functioning normally but with out the ESP available ESP ESP Unavai abl e Risk of accident gt Synchronize the ESP With the vehicle sta a The ESP is deactivated because the ee ae Po Hn oono ete y CS eae power supply has been interrupted aa te a The ABS may not be operational If the ESP message does not go out The electro hydraulic brake system gt Continue driving with added caution is still functioning normally but with gt Have the system checked at an authorized out the ESP available Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident T When synchronizing the ESP make sure you can turn the steering wheel in both direc tions as far as it will go without the wheels hitting any objects e g a road curb 323 Practical hints py What to do if Left display Front Passeng Ai rbag 324 Right display Enabl ed See Oper Manual Poss
157. call during an already active call you can accept the second call and switch between the two Accepting a second call gt Press the snokey You are connected with the second caller the first call is muted Switching between the calls gt Press the snokey Terminating the second call gt Press the eEnpkey The current call will be terminated You are connected with the muted call again Controls in detail Automatic transmission ta Y Automatic transmission For information on driving with an auto Gear selector lever matic transmission see the Getting Warning A started section gt page 47 he gear Selector lever is located on the Make sure that absolutely no objects are ob lower part of the center console Your vehicle s transmission adapts its gear shifting process to your individual driving style by continually adjusting the shift points up or down These shift point adjust ments are performed based on current operating and driving conditions structing the pedals range of movement Keep the driver s footwell clear of all obsta cles If there are any floormats or carpets in the footwell make sure that the pedals still have sufficient clearance During sudden driving or braking maneuvers the objects could get caught between the pedals You could then no longer brake or accelerate This could lead to accidents and If the operating conditions change the automatic transmissi
158. cator lamp The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp Q will be illuminated except with the SmartKey removed or in starter switch position 0 Warning A N If the 9 indicator lamp and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp are lit at the same time there is a malfunc tion in the Occupant Classification System The passenger front air bag and the passen ger knee air bag will be deactivated in this case Have the system checked as soon as possi ble by qualified technicians Contact an au thorized Mercedes Benz Center Only have the seat repaired or replaced by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center In order to ensure proper operation of the air bag system and OCS e Do not lift yourself from the seat as this may cause the OCS to be unable to cor rectly approximate the occupant weight category Sit properly belted in a position that is as upright as possible with your back against the seat backrest While seated an occupant should not position him herself in such a way as to cause the occupant s weight to be lifted from the seat bottom as this may result in the OCS being unable to correctly ap proximate the occupant s weight cate gory Read and observe all warnings in this chapter Safety and Security Occupant safety a Self test Occupant Classification System After turning the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or 2 the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp located in the center console ill
159. cause a delay in the brak brake pads The first time the brakes are applied after ing effect resulting in a significantly in It can also result in the brakes overheating a long period of driving in heavy rain with creased braking distance which could lead thereby significantly reducing their effec out braking it is possible that to an accident pei tiveness or in the total loss of braking per formance It may not be possible to stop the vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an accident e you will need to depress the brake ped al more firmly After hard braking it is advisable to drive You should therefore maintain a greater on for some time rather than to park im distance from the vehicle in front mediately so the air stream will cool down the brakes faster e there will be a delayed braking re sponse 237 b gt Operation Driving instructions To avoid this danger you should e occasionally brake carefully when you are driving on salted roads so that any layer of salt that may have built up on the brake discs and the brake linings is removed without putting other road us ers at risk e maintain a greater distance to the vehi cle ahead and drive with particular care e carefully apply the brakes at the end of a trip and immediately after commenc ing a new trip so that salt residues are removed from the brake disc 238 Brake service T Because the ESP operates automatically the engine must b
160. ccur for a vari ety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing One or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly i If a condition causing the TPMS to malfunc tion develops it may take up to 10 minutes for the system to signal a malfunction using the TPMS telltale flashing and illumination se quence The telltale extinguishes after a few minutes driv ing if the malfunction has been corrected amp Operating radio transmission equipment e g wireless headsets two way radios in or near the vehicle could cause the TPMS to mal function 273 Operation fas Tires and wheels Tire inflation pressure warnings If the system detects a significant loss of tire inflation pressure in one or more than one tire a message appears in the multi function display aa K as me A E ai nie y P54 32 5184 31 Example illustration The respective tire is indicated by a red rectangle In addition a warning signal sounds 274 Restarting Advanced TPMS The TPMS usually recognizes new refer ence values automatically for example when you have e adjusted the tire inflation pressure e changed wheels or tires e mounted new wheels or tires Warning A N It
161. ceas cae nectaetensaas 120 Standard display menu 122 722 S MENU cccessecccesecceesescees 123 AUDIO MeN ccesecccseeseeeeees 127 Vehicle status message memory menu 128 Settings MENU cccesescceessceeees 129 Trip computer Menu 0800 139 TEL MENU ccaceusierecoaate oancaettcbcateacaes 141 Audio system ccccccseeecceseeceeeeeeseees 145 Audio and telephone operation 145 Operating Safety ccceeeeccenees 145 Location of the audio system 145 Operating and display elements 146 Button and soft key operation 148 Operation ccceccceeeecceseceeeeeeeees 148 Radio Operation ccccceeeceeeeees 151 Cassette operation ccceecceeee 154 CD changer operation 00 158 Telephone operation 00668 162 Automatic tranSmiSSION ccc00 169 Gear selector lever cc00000 169 Shifting Procedure ccceeeeeeees 170 Gear selector lever positions 171 Driving TIDS cccescsexesownseesenieseesconnsae 173 Gear ranges scecccsesccccsseeceeeeees 174 Shift program mode selector switch 175 Gear selector lever one touch gearshifting cc ceeeccccsescceeeeeeeees 175 Steering wheel gearshift control one touch gearshifting 177 Manual shift program 6 178 Emergency operation Limp Home Mode ssssessseeseseess 180 Good visibility
162. cing a call Entering a telephone number and starting the dialing process 47 AGS oo tones a n de es END P82 60 4076 31 m i LA un gt Enter the desired telephone number using buttons EE to EJ The number can have up to 32 digits but only 13 of these are visible on the display If necessary correct number entered with the ar key gt Press key briefly to delete the last digit entered gt Press key and hold to delete the complete number gt After correct telephone number has been entered press the snokey Phone book The numbers stored in the phone book can be called up either by name or number Calling up the phone book ute ee caer a Cae ae AD ae ee ae CLE END P82 60 407 7 31 Fa TELS Ae j a beti La i gt Press PN BA EI co EI button Switching between name search and number search gt Press the asc key The name search is called up or gt Press the numkey The number search is called up Controls in detail Audio system a Searching and calling up phone book entries by name i or or Dankl peapa R Dore ai bed dd SAD ALUM LE END P82 60 4078 31 Press the asc key The current name is highlighted on the display Press either the EN or RA button The stored entries are selected accord ing to the alphabetical order of the initial letter Press either the EAJ or EJ button The stored entries are s
163. cities gt page 264 comfort wear unevenly increase stopping distance and result in sudden deflation blowout because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris potholes etc This is the maximum permissible tire inflation pressure for the tire 283 Operation re Tires and wheels Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards U S vehicles Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors treadwear traction and temperature resistance 1 Treadwear 2 Traction 3 Temperature resistance i For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration 284 Quality grades can be found where appli cable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear Traction Temperature 200 AA A All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rat ing based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For ex ample a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 1 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in dri
164. cle care bb T Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto the windshield before turning the SmartKey in the starter switch Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back If released the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield Cleaning the headlamps gt Wipe the headlamp lens with a damp sponge T Only use windshield washer fluid suitable for plastic lamp lenses Unsuitable windshield washer fluid may cause damage to the plastic lenses of the headlamps Do not use e adry cloth e abrasive products e solvents e cleaning agents containing solvents You could otherwise scratch or damage the lens surface 300 Cleaning the headlamps gt Wipe the headlamp lens with a damp sponge aa Only use windshield washer fluid suitable for plastic lamp lenses Unsuitable windshield washer fluid may cause damage to the plastic lenses of the headlamps Do not use e adry cloth e abrasive products e solvents e cleaning agents containing solvents You could otherwise scratch or damage the lens surface Soft top care Frequent cleaning reduces the dirt repel lent effect of the soft top Intensive cleaning with Mercedes Benz care products for soft tops can help to re store the dirt repellent effect T Incorrect cleaning and care can damage the soft top or cause leaks In this case contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center to have the soft top inspected T Remove bird d
165. clockwise as far as it will go and leave it in this position re lease position BB Leave the handle in the release position Do not turn it back Otherwise the locking mecha nism could be damaged when closing the soft top Push the soft top up by means of the handle as far as it will go The soft top is released An acoustic signal indicates that you can now open the soft top electrically Open soft top switch cover 2 Press and hold button 3 until the soft top has opened completely and until it has locked While the soft top is opening the symbol and the message Top n Qper at i on appear in the multifunction display The windows open The opening process is completed Closing the soft top T Always remove the soft top linkage covers gt page 202 before closing the soft top You could otherwise damage the covers or the linkages gt Switch on the ignition gt Press and hold button until the electrical closing process has been completed While the soft top is closing the symbol and the message Top n Qper at i on appear in the multifunction display An acoustic signal indicates that you can now lock the soft top T Before pulling the soft top down make sure that the handle is in the release position Other wise the locking mechanism could be damaged when closing the soft top gt Pull the soft top by means of the handle down on the windscreen frame gt Turn the handle
166. coolant level is low water and MB 325 0 Anticorrosion Antifreeze should be used to bring it up to the proper level have cooling system checked for signs of leakage Please make sure the mixture is in accordance with label instruc tions The water in the cooling system must meet minimum requirements which are usually satisfied by normal drinking water If you are not sure about the water quality con sult an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc ae 399 Technical data p Fuels coolants lubricants etc Anticorrosion antifreeze Your vehicle contains a number of alumi num parts The use of aluminum compo nents in motor vehicle engines necessitates that anticorrosion antifreeze coolant used in such engines be specifical ly formulated to protect the aluminum Anticorrosion antifreeze quantity Main cooling system Low temperature cooling system Mercedes Benz SLR McLaren Roadster Mercedes Benz SLR McLaren Roadster 722 S 3 2 US qt 3 0 I 400 parts Failure to use such anticorro sion antifreeze coolant will result in a significantly shortened service life Therefore the following product is strongly recommended for use in your vehicle MB 325 0 Anticorrosion Antifreeze agent Approximate freeze protection 35 F 37 C 49 F 45 C 5 2 US gt 5 0 I 5 8 US gt 5 5 I 2 6 US gt 2 5 2 9 US qt 2 75 I 3 5 US gt 3 3 I Before the start of the
167. d Properly secure the child restraint us ing the passenger seat lap shoulder belt gt page 76 and tether anchorage for top tether strap fully in accordance with the child restraint manufacturer s instructions Tighten the top tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions Reinstall cover after removing the tether strap Vv Panic alarm button PBO 35 2709 31 i USA only This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interfer ence and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment i Canada only This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Safety and Security Panic alarm a Activating gt Press and hold button for at least 1 second An audible alarm and flashing exterior lamps will operate briefly Deactivating gt Press button
168. d in Vermont Check with an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center for details Important notice for California retail buyers and lessees of Mercedes Benz automobiles Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price or lease price if Mercedes Benz USA LLC and or its au thorized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or more substantial defects or mal functions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty after a reasonable number of repair attempts During the pe riod of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18000 miles approx 29000 km on the odometer of the vehicle whichever occurs first a reasonable number of repair at tempts is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more of the following occurs 1 the same substantial defect or mal function results in a condition that is likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven that de fect or malfunction has been subject to repair two or more times and you have directly notified Mercedes Benz USA LLC in writing of the need for its repair 2 the same substantial defect or mal function of a less serious nature than category 1 has been subject to repair four or more times and you have direct ly notified us in writing of the need for its repair or Introduction Operator s Manual 3 the vehicle is out of service by reason
169. d in the combustion area leading to engine performance problems such as e Warm up hesitation e Unstable idle e Knocking pinging e Misfire e Power loss 397 Technical data a Fuels coolants lubricants etc In areas where carbon deposits may be encountered due to lack of availability of gasolines which contain these additives Mercedes Benz recommends the use of additives approved by us for use on Mercedes Benz vehicles Contact an au thorized Mercedes Benz Center or visit www mbusa com USA only for a listing of approved product s Follow directions on product label Do not blend other fuel additives with fuel This only results in unnecessary cost and may be harmful to engine operation T Damage or malfunction resulting from poor fuel quality or from blending additional fuel additives other than those tested and approved by us for use on Mercedes Benz vehicles are not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty or by any pre owned or Extended Limited war ranties 398 Coolants The engine coolant is a mixture of water and anticorrosion antifreeze which pro vides e corrosion protection e freeze protection e boiling protection by increasing the boiling point The cooling system was filled at the factory with a coolant providing freeze protection to approximately 35 F 37 C and corrosion protection T Add premixed coolant solution only Adding water and MB 325 0 Anticorrosion Antifreeze s
170. d of any trailer is an impor tant weight to measure because it affects the load you can carry in your vehicle If a trailer is towed the tongue load must be added to the weight of all occupants riding and any cargo you are carrying in the vehicle The tongue load typically is ten percent of the trailer weight and everything loaded in it Your Mercedes Benz has been designed primarily to carry passengers and their cargo Mercedes Benz does not recom mend trailer towing with your vehicle 267 Operation fa Tires and wheels Recommended tire inflation pressure In addition to the Tire and Loading Informa Warning A N Follow recommended tire inflation pressures Do not underinflate tires Underinflated tires wear excessively and or unevenly adversely affect handling and fuel economy and are more likely to fail from being overheated Do not overinflate tires Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort wear unevenly increase stopping distance and result in sudden deflation blowout because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris potholes etc 268 Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driv er s door B pillar Overloading the tires can overheat them possibly causing a blowout Overloading the tires can also result in han dling or steering problems or brake failure Your
171. d to open or close the soft top while the vehicle was In motion The soft top is not fully opened or closed The soft top hydrau lics are depressurized The on board voltage is too low The soft top has been opened and closed multiple consecu tive times For safety reasons the soft top drive was switched off automatically Possible solution gt Have the Tele Aid system checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center immediately gt Add washer fluid gt page 257 gt Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe to do so Observe the traffic situation around you gt Repeat the opening or closing process gt page 198 gt Repeat the opening or closing process gt page 198 gt Start the engine After approximately 10 minutes you can open or close the soft top again gt Switch off the ignition and switch it back on gt Repeat the opening or closing process gt page 198 Left display Right display Top Not Open CI osed Conpl etel y Practical hints What to do if es Possible cause conse Possible solution quence The soft top could not be gt Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe locked after opening it gt The soft top was not locked af gt ter closing it gt to do so Observe the traffic situation around you Repeat the opening process gt page 198 Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe to do s
172. dio dis play are printed in the type shown here 19 Introduction Operating safety A Work improperly carried out on electronic components and associated software could cause them to cease functioning Because the vehicle s electronic components are in terconnected any modifications made may produce an undesired effect on other sys tems Electronic malfunctions could seri ously impair the operating safety of your vehicle Warning See an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for repairs or modifications to electronic components Other improper work or modifications on the vehicle could also have a negative impact on the operating safety of the vehicle Some safety systems only function while the engine is running You should therefore nev er turn off the engine while driving 20 A Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody or tires wheels for example when running over an obstacle road debris or a pothole may cause serious damage and impair the operating safety of your vehicle If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride distur bance or you suspect that damage to your vehicle has occurred you should turn on your hazard warning flashers carefully slow down and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from the road Warning Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires wheels for possible damage If the ve hicle appears unsafe have it towed to the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Cent
173. ditions are safe to do so C Inside door handle gt Pull on door handle The door swings outwards and up wards automatically Opening a door causes the door win dows on that side of the vehicle to open slightly They will return to the up position when the door is closed 101 Controls in detail a Locking and unlocking T The door windows will not open or close if the battery is discharged or the door windows are impeded by ice In this case open or close the door with increased caution Do not attempt to force the door opened or closed Doing so may damage the door seals or the side window ae If the vehicle has previously been locked with the SmartKey opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti theft alarm system To cancel the alarm do one of the following e Press button or on the SmartKey e nsert the SmartKey in the starter switch 102 Opening the trunk Opening the trunk from the outside A minimum height clearance of 5 5 ft 1 66 m is required to open the trunk lid The handle is located above the rear license plate recess C Trunk lock 2 Handle The vehicle must be unlocked BE Always make sure that there is sufficient overhead clearance gt Pull on handle and lift the trunk lid The trunk can also be opened using button on the SmartKey or from its inside in an emergency see Trunk emer gency release gt page 104 Opening the trunk from the
174. dren unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could move the gear selector lever from park position P which could result in an accident and or serious personal injury Driving tips Accelerator position Your driving style influences the transmission s shifting behavior Less throttle Earlier upshifting More throttle Later upshifting Kickdown Use kickdown when you want maximum acceleration gt Press the accelerator past the point of resistance Depending on the engine speed the transmission shifts into a lower gear gt Ease on the accelerator when you have reached the desired speed The transmission shifts up again cp Kickdown in manual shift program MAN is not possible In kickdown operation it is not possible to change gear with the steering wheel gear shift paddles Stopping When you stop briefly e g at traffic lights gt Leave the transmission in gear gt Hold the vehicle with the brake When you stop longer with the engine idling and or on a hill gt Set the parking brake gt Move the gear selector lever to park position P Controls in detail Automatic transmission ia Maneuvering When you maneuver in tight areas e g when pulling into a parking space gt Control the vehicle speed by gradually releasing the brakes Accelerate gently Never abruptly step on the accelerator Working on the vehicle Warning When wor
175. ds 135 Controls in detail mz Control system gt Move the selection marker with button or to the Li ghti ng submenu gt Press button JM or Keg repeatedly until you see this message in the left multifunction display Locator Li ghti ng The selection marker is on the current setting Locator Lighting a p 2 gt OFF Bie o P54 32 4955 31 gt Press button or E to switch the locator lighting feature or f gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to position Eazy when exiting the vehicle gt page 106 The locator lighting feature is activated 136 Setting night security illumination Headlamps delayed switch off Use this function to set whether you would like the exterior lamps to remain on for 15 seconds during darkness after exiting the vehicle and closing the doors With the delayed shut off feature activated and the exterior lamp switch in position M before the engine is turned off the following lamps will switch on when the engine is turned off e Parking lamps e Tail lamps e License plate lamps e Side marker lamps e Front fog lamps If after turning off the engine you do not open a door or do not close an opened door the lamps will automatically switch off after 60 seconds gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Li gnti ng sub menu gt Press button EAN or Keg repeatedly until you see this message in the left multifunction dis
176. e heat build up and possibly a fire Warning T A wheel change should only be carried out at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Other wise there is a danger of damaging the vehicle by jacking it up incorrectly For more information see Tires and wheels gt page 259 Operation Driving instructions Hydroplaning Depending on the depth of the water layer on the road hydroplaning may occur even at low speeds and with new tires Reduce vehicle speed avoid track grooves in the road and apply brakes cautiously in the rain Tire traction The safe speed on a wet snow covered or icy road is always lower than on a dry road You should pay particular attention to the condition of the road whenever the outside temperatures are close to the freezing point A If ice has formed on the road tire traction will be substantially reduced Under such weather conditions drive steer and brake with extreme caution Warning 241 Operation a Driving instructions Mercedes Benz recommends winter tires gt page 292 with a minimum tread depth of approximately in 4 mm on all four wheels for the winter season to ensure normal balanced handling characteristics On packed snow they can reduce your stopping distance compared to summer tires Stopping distance however is still considerably greater than when the road Is not covered with snow or ice Exercise appropriate caution Ea Avoid spinning of
177. e included in the count shown by the maintenance service indicator To arrive at the true maintenance service deadline you will need to subtract these days from the days shown in the maintenance service indicator Do not confuse the maintenance service indica tor with the engine oil level indicator BEA 295 Operation fa Maintenance Resetting the maintenance service indicator In the event that the maintenance service on your vehicle is not carried out by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center you can have the maintenance service indicator reset The automotive maintenance facility carrying out the maintenance service will find the information for resetting the maintenance service indicator in the maintenance relevant information for your vehicle Such information is available from any authorized Mercedes Benz Center or directly from Mercedes Benz 296 If the maintenance service indicator was in advertently reset have an authorized Mercedes Benz Center correct it Only reset if the proper maintenance service has been performed Resetting the system without performing the proper service as called for by the maintenance service indicator will result in engine damage and or other vehicle damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Vv Vehicle care Cleaning and care of the vehicle AN Many cleaning products can be hazardous Some are poisonous others are flammable Always follow the instructions on th
178. e multifunction display 346 Lamps indicator and warning ABS 29 306 ABS ESP 29 304 Airbrake 29 311 Battery SmartKey 100 Brake 29 307 Center console 317 Combination low tire pressure TPMS malfunction telltale 29 315 Coolant 29 310 Engine malfunction Engine oil temperature Foglamps 109 Fuel reserve 29 311 Gearshift 29 311 High beam 29 Instrument cluster 304 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 70 317 Passenger front air bag off 317 Seat belt telltale 29 312 seat belts 312 313 SRS 29 61 314 Turn signals 29 Language Setting 133 License plate lamp Messages in the multifunction display 347 Replacing bulbs 361 License plate lamps 362 Light sensor 29 308 29 311 Index Messages in the multifunction display 347 Lighter see Cigarette lighter Lighting Automatic headlamp mode 107 Exterior 106 Instruments 114 Interior 112 Low beam headlamps 107 Manual headlamp mode 107 Limp Home Mode Automatic transmission 180 Linkage covers 202 Loading see Vehicle loading Location Audio system 145 Compact guide Canada only 209 Vehicle literature portfolio 356 Locator lighting 109 135 Loss of Keys 101 Service and Warranty Information Booklet 381 417 index Low beam headlamps 106 107 Messages in the multifunction display 348 Replacing bulbs 361 Switching on 51 Lubricants 393 M Main odometer 29 Maintenance 294 370 Calling up service indicator 296 Resetting service indicator 296 Service indicator 294 Service term
179. e or cargo higher than the seat backs Do not place anything on the shelf below the rear window Parcel nets cannot secure hard or heavy objects Keep compartment lids closed This will help to prevent stored objects from being thrown about and injuring vehicle occupants during an accident Controls in detail Useful features a Storage compartment under armrest PoE 00 4688 31 1 Release button 2 Armrest gt Press release button Q The armrest 2 opens automatically 209 Controls in detail a Useful features Parcel net in trunk Storage compartment between the backrests i H E r h b f i There is a net available in the trunk to secure loads gt Pull the trunk floor net from the trunk back wall towards the front over the luggage gt Hang the hooks of the net on the eyes on the trunk floor o P68 00 4699 4 1 Release button 2 Cover gt Press release button 1 Cover 2 opens automatically The Bluetooth interface gt page 213 is installed in the cover of the storage compartment 210 Ashtray and cigarette lighter The ashtray and the cigarette lighter are lo cated in the storage compartment under the armrest P68 00 4690 31 1 Cigarette lighter 2 Ashtray insert Ashtray Warning A N Remove ashtray insert only with vehicle standing still Removing ashtray insert gt Pull ashtray insert 2 upwards Replacing ashtray inse
180. e pads or disks depends on your driving style and the con ditions under which you operate the vehi cle It is therefore not possible to give a gener ally applicable service life High perfor mance driving such as driving on closed circuit race tracks or an aggressive driving style will cause the brakes to wear more quickly i Please contact your PLM or any authorized Mercedes Benz Center before operating the vehicle under such demanding operating condi tions for more information Warning A N Repetitive excessive load on the brake system may particularly cause the brake system to overheat and can thus reduce the braking power or even cause brake system components to fail due to increased wear You could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident Installation and examina tion of brake system assemblies requires specialist knowledge Therefore after high performance driving have the brake system checked and maintained by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Operation Driving instructions Driving off Apply the brakes to test them briefly after driving off Perform this procedure only when the road is clear of other traffic Warm up the engine smoothly Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached gt page 311 T When driving off on a slippery surface do not allow a drive wheel to spin for an extended period with the ESP switched off Doing so may cau
181. e partic ular container Always open your vehicle s doors or door windows when cleaning the in side Warning Never use fluids or solvents that are not designed for cleaning your vehicle If you have any questions about proper care of your vehicle please contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center gt Mercedes Benz recommends that you use Mercedes Benz care products These have been specially developed to suit Mercedes Benz vehi cles and are state of the art Mercedes Benz care products are available from any Mercedes Benz Center Depending on body color the characteris tic carbon structure of the body surface may become visible due to high ambient temperatures and humidity This phenom enon is related to the technology and concept of the vehicle s body T Affixing stickers magnets adhesive tape or similar materials to painted body components may damage the paintwork While in operation even while parked your vehicle is subjected to varying external influences which if gone unchecked can attack the paintwork as well as the underbody and cause lasting damage Such damage is caused not only by extreme and varying climatic conditions but also by e Air pollution e Road salt e far e Gravel and stone chipping Operation Vehicle care in To avoid paint damage you should immediately remove e Grease and oil e Fuel e Coolant e Brake fluid e Bird droppings e Insects e Tree resins etc F
182. e services Services such as jump start a few gallons of fuel or the replacement of a flat tire are obtainable a If the indicator lamp in the Roadside Assis tance button is flashing continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established then the Tele Aid system could not initiate a Roadside Assistance call e g the relevant cellular phone network is not avail able The message Cal Fail ed appears in the multifunction display Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated us ing the button on the multifunction steering wheel Information button The Information button is located in the center armrest cover il eres D Q Information button gt Open the center storage compartment gt page 210 gt Press and hold the button Q for longer than 2 seconds A call to the Customer Assistance Center will be initiated The button will flash while the call is in progress The MESSAZE Connecti ng Cal will appear in the multifunction display When the connection is established the message cal Connect ed appears in the multifunction display The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number model color and location subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals A voice connection between the Customer Assistance Center representative and the occupants of the vehicle will be estab lished Information regarding the operation of your vehic
183. e shut off SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 when the parking brake is being tested on a brake test dynamometer Active braking action through the ESP may otherwise seriously damage the brake system which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty If the parking brake is released and the red brake warning lamp in the instrument clus ter stays on there is a malfunction in the electro hydraulic brake system gt page 307 or the brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may be the reason for low brake fluid in the reservoir Observe additional messages that may appear in the multifunction display gt page 335 Have the brake system inspected immediately Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center All checks and service work on the brake system should be carried out by qualified technicians only Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Only install brake pads and brake fluid recommended by Mercedes Benz Warning A N If other than recommended brake pads are installed or other than recommended brake fluid is used the braking properties of the vehicle can be degraded to an extent that safe braking is substantially impaired This could result in an accident Be certain to read and observe the warning notices on brake pad replacement gt page 89 High performance driving The rate of wear of individual brake system components such as brak
184. e their seat belts fas tened when ever the vehicle is in motion For information on fastening seat belts see Fastening the seat belts gt page 45 i For information on infants and children trav eling with you in the vehicle and restraint sys tems for infants and children see Children in the vehicle gt page 76 Warning A N Always fasten your seat belt before driving off Always make sure your passenger is properly restrained Failure to wear and properly fasten and po sition your seat belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident You and your passenger should always wear seat belts If you are ever in an accident your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled Without your seat belt buckled you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it You can be seriously injured or killed In the same crash the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are wearing your seat belt Air bags can only protect as they are designed if the occupants are properly wearing their seat belts Warning A N Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous You could slide under the seat belt in a collision If you slide under it the seat belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck That could cause se rious or even fatal injuries
185. e tires meet specific snow traction performance require ments of the Rubber Manufacturers Association RMA and the Rubber Association of Canada RAC and have been designed specifically for use in snow conditions Load identification 1 Load identification Q For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration In addition to tire load rating special load identification Q may be molded into the tire sidewall following the letter designat ing the tire speed rating gt page 277 No specification given absence of any text like in above example indicates a standard load SL tire XL or Extra Load designates an extra load or reinforced tire Light Load designates a light load tire C D E designates load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure DOT Tire Identification Number TIN U S tire regulations require each new tire manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a TIN into or onto a sidewall of each tire produced The TIN is a unique identifier which facili tates efforts by tire manufactures to notify purchasers in recall situations or other safety matters concerning tires and gives purchasers the means to easily identify such tires The TIN is comprised of Manufacturer s identification mark Tire size Tire type code and Date of manufacture Oper
186. e tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly Practical hints What to do if a Lamp in center console Problem Possible cause consequence Suggested solution PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF The system is malfunctioning gt Have the system checked at an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center as soon The passenger front air bag off indicator lamp illuminates and ae PORES remains illuminated with the gt Also read and observe any messages weight of a typical adult or some in the multifunction display and follow one larger than a small individual corrective steps gt page 324 on the passenger seat Warning A N If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated with the weight of a typical adult or some one larger than a small individual on the pas senger seat do not have any passenger use the passenger seat until the system has been repaired 317 Practical hints pe What to do if Problem PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF The passenger front air bag off indicator lamp does not illumi nate and or does not remain illu minated with the weight of a typical 12 month old child in a standard child restraint or less on the passenger seat Warning
187. e to warm up under low load use Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only when the vehicle is stopped Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period when driving off on slippery road surfaces This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Using the kickdown when driving in shift program MAN is not possible Activating manual shift program gt Turn program mode selector switch Q gt page 175 to the MAN setting The transmission switches to the manual program mode M The letter m appears in the right multifunction dis play and the lamp in program mode se lector switch gt page 179 comes on Automatic shifting is switched off The gear range is not limited You can change the gears manually when the gear selector lever is in drive position D You can upshift or downshift through the gears in succession Selecting manual shift program mode 3 Program mode selector switch for the manual shift program Sport For sporty driving II Super Sport For very sporty driving Ill Race For racing like driving The individual shifting programs differ with regard to spontaneity response time and shifting smoothness Please always drive carefully and obey applicable speed limits Controls in detail Automatic transmission gt Turn program
188. ear if the engine s max speed would be exceeded 176 Extending gear range gt Briefly press the gear selector lever to the right in the D direction The transmission will shift to the next higher gear as permitted by the shift program This action simultaneously extends the gear range of the transmission Shifting into optimal gear range gt Press and hold the gear selector lever in the D direction The transmission will automatically se lect the gear range suited for optimal acceleration and deceleration This may involve shifting down one or more gears A If you press on the accelerator when the en gine has reached its rpm limit the transmission will upshift beyond any gear range limit selected Canceling gear range limit gt Press and hold the gear selector lever in the D direction until preappears in the right multifunction display The transmission will shift from the cur rent gear range directly to gear range D Steering wheel gearshift control one touch gearshifting With the gear selector lever in drive posi tion D and driving in shift program C or S you Can limit or extend the gear range With the MAN shift program activated you can use the steering wheel gearshift con trol to manually shift the gears q For information on using the steering wheel gearshift control in shift program MAN see Manual shift program gt page 178 i Allow engine to warm up under low load
189. ear selector lever or the steering wheel gearshift control buttons GPS Global Positioning System Satellite based system for relaying geographic location information to and from vehicles equipped with special re ceivers Employs CD digital maps for navigation GVW Gross Vehicle Weight gt page 287 GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating gt page 287 Head thorax air bag Installed in the doors these air bags protect occupants during side impact collisions exceeding a preset thresh old Unlike normal side air bags head thorax air bags are also designed to provide protection for the head area Instrument cluster The displays and indicator warning lamps in the driver s field of vision in cluding the tachometer speedometer engine temperature and fuel gauge Kickdown Depressing the accelerator past the point of resistance shifts the transmis sion down to the lowest possible This very quickly accelerates the vehicle and should not be used for normal acceleration needs Kilopascal kPa gt page 287 Maximum load rating gt page 287 Maximum loaded vehicle weight gt page 287 Maximum tire inflation pressure gt page 287 MON Motor Octane Number The Motor Octane Number for gasoline as determined by a standardized method It is an indication of a gaso line s ability to resist undesired detona tion knocking The average of both the MON Motor Octane Number and RON Research
190. ear wheels to lock up You could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident In addition the vehicle s brake lights do not light up when the parking brake is engaged E AEA Lr P Pea an 1 Parking brake lever 55 Getting started Parking and locking gt Pull parking brake lever G up as many notches as possible When the engine is running the warning lamp USA only or Canada only in the instrument cluster comes on A When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could release the parking brake and or move the gear selector lever from park position P either of which could result in an accident and or serious personal injury Warning A Getting out of your vehicle with the gear se lector lever not fully engaged in park position P is dangerous Also when parked Warning 56 on an incline park position P alone may not prevent your vehicle from moving possibly hitting people or objects Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to park position P gt page 48 When parked on an incline turn front wheels towards the road curb Switching off headlamps gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to WJ gt page 106 Turning off the engine gt Place the gear selector lever in park position P A
191. ease note that your vehicle is equipped with devices that can record vehicle systems data and if equipped with the Tele Aid system may transmit some data in certain accidents This information helps for example to diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and to continuously improve vehicle safety Daimler may access the information and share it with others for safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee in response to an official request by law enforcement or other government agency for use in dispute resolution involving Daimler its affiliates or sales service organization and or as otherwise required or permitted by law Please check the Tele Aid subscription service agreement for details regarding the information that may be recorded or transmitted via that system 23 Cockpit Instrument cluster Multifunction steering wheel Center console Overhead control panel Control panel on the door sill Se ee At a glance Cockpit 26 Item 1 Cruise control lever 2 Steering wheel gearshift paddle 3 Instrument cluster 4 Multifunction steering wheel Overhead control panel 6 Center console 7 Starter switch Horn Page 205 177 28 114 30 118 33 31 32 40 Item 9 Headlamp washer button Steering wheel adjustment stalk QD Hood lock release D Exterior lamp switch 3 Combination switch e Turn signals e Wind
192. eavily loaded check tire inflation pressure and correct as required Please always drive carefully and obey applicable speed limits 259 Operation re Tires and wheels e Do not allow your tires to wear down too far Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply reduced at tread depths of less than in 3 mm e When replacing individual tires you should mount new tires on the front wheels first on vehicles with same sized wheels all around 260 Tire care and maintenance Warning A N Regularly check the tires for damage Dam aged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss As a result you could lose control of your vehicle Worn old tires can cause accidents If the tire tread is badly worn or if the tires have sustained damage replace them Have worn or damaged tires replaced in pairs front pair or rear pair an make sure the tires rotate in the direction specified gt page 262 Otherwise the driving stabili ty of the vehicle will be adversely affected especially when driving at high speeds Check the tire inflation pressure at least every other week For more information on checking tire inflation pressure see Rec ommended tire inflation pressure gt page 268 Tire inspection Every time you check your tire inflation pressure you should also inspect your tires for the following e excessive treadwear gt page 261 e cord or fabric showing through the tire s ru
193. ed the vehicle locks Unlocking gt Press central locking switch 2 The vehicle unlocks i Ifthe vehicle was previously centrally locked using the SmartKey it will not unlock using the central locking switch If the vehicle was previously locked with the central locking switch e while in the global remote control mode the complete vehicle is unlocked when a door is opened from the inside e while in the selective remote control mode only the door opened from the inside is unlocked 105 Controls in detail ia Lighting For information on how to switch on the headlamps and use the turn signals see Switching on headlamps gt page 51 and Turn signals gt page 51 fyou drive in countries where vehicles drive on the other side of the road than the country where the vehicle is registered you must have the headlamps modified for symmetrical low beams Relevant information can be obtained at any authorized Mercedes Benz Center 106 Exterior lamp switch The exterior lamp switch is located on the dashboard to the left of the steering wheel me Of Daytime running lamp mode gt page 108 EG Automatic headlamp mode Daytime running lamp mode gt page 108 Parking lamps also tail lamps license plate lamps side marker lamps instrument panel lamps Low beam headlamps or high beam headlamps P gt Standing lamps right turn left one stop Standing lamps le
194. ed position and to wear their seat belts For maximum protection in the event of a collision always be in normal seated position with your back against the backrest Fasten your seat belt and make sure that it is prop erly positioned on your body gt page 45 Since the air bag inflates with considerable speed and force a proper seating and hands on steering wheel position will help to keep you at a safe distance from the air bag Occupants who are unbelted out of position or too close to the air bag can be seriously injured or killed by an air bag as it inflates with great force in the blink of an eye e Sit properly belted in a nearly upright position with your back against the seat backrest N e Adjust the drivers seat as far as possi ble rearward still permitting proper op eration of vehicle controls The distance from the center of the driver s breast bone to the center of the air bag cover on the steering wheel must be at least 10 inches 25 cm or more You should be able to accomplish this by a combina tion of adjustments to the seat and steering wheel If you have any prob lems please see an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Do not lean your head or chest close to the steering wheel or dashboard Keep hands on the outside of steering wheel rim Placing hands and arms inside the rim can increase the risk and potential severity of hand arm injury when driver s front air bag inflates e Adjust the passe
195. eed an engine speed of 3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded with a light load such as two persons and no luggage e Do not exceed of maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in mountainous terrain Fuel requirements Only use premium unleaded fuel e The octane number posted at the pump must be 91 min It is an average of both the Research Octane Number RON and the Motor Octane Number MON RON MON 2 This is also known as the ANTI KNOCK INDEX Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol IPA IBA and TBA can be used provided the ratio of any one of these oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed 10 MTBE must not exceed 15 The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3 plus additional cosolvents Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is not allowed Gasohol which contains 10 ethanol and 90 unleaded gasoline can be used These blends must also meet all other fuel requirements such as resistance to spark knock boiling range vapor pressure etc Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Gasoline additives A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon build up caused by gasoline Mercedes Benz recommends only the use of quality gasoline containing additives that prevent the build up of carbon deposits After an extended period of using fuels without such additives carbon deposits can build up especially on the intake valves an
196. ehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle A child s unsupervised access to a vehicle could P80 35 2196 31 result in an accident and or serious SmartKey with remote control personal injury Lock button Unlock button for trunk 3 Unlock button 4 Panic button gt page 8 1 If you are already familiar with the basic functions described here the Controls in detail section will provide you with further information The corresponding page references are located at the end of each segment 38 gt Press unlock button on the SmartKey All turn signal lamps flash once The anti theft alarm system is disarmed Gp The electro hydraulic brake system is activated Warning VAN Always stand to the rear of the door before opening it otherwise the opening action may cause injury Outside temperature may affect door opening speed T Ensure sufficient side and overhead clearance prior to opening the doors see Main dimensions page 391 P72 10 2917 31 Door handle gt Press the front part of the door handle The door swings outwards and upwards automatically Opening a door causes the door win dows on that side of the vehicle to open slightly They will return to the up position when the door is closed Getting started Unlocking Ss Warning A N Only Mercedes Benz SLR McLaren Roadster 722 9 Because of the carbon fiber the footwell could be slippery when wet
197. el The station memory for manually stored stations is not overwritten e Calling up Autostore memory level gt Briefly press the as key as is highlighted in the display The radio finds the ten stations with the strongest signals These stations are stored on the station buttons JJ to BM in order of signal strength e Retrieving a station from memory gt Press desired station button yj to a e Leaving the Autostore memory level gt Press the as key The highlighted as in the display disappears 153 Controls in detail mz Audio system Weather band Cassette operation gt Fold display panel back up and press Ta gently on the display panel frame to Bim eo lock it in place Playing cassettes H F gt Press button T Do not press directly on the display face E E Otherwise the display will be damaged Fr a Rib The display panel folds down and the P82 60 4758 31 gt Press the ve key The weather band station last selected is tuned in gt Select the desired weather band station with buttons BEN to EA If a station cannot be tuned in a scan is automatically started gt Press EXE or Bg button The next receivable weather band station is tuned in 154 cassette compartment becomes accessible Insert cassette into the cassette com partment until it engages and tap it gently The cassette will be pulled in automati cally The system switches to cassette mode Side 1 will be played
198. el bolts are not tightened to a torque of 95 lb ft 130 Nm Have the tightening torque checked after changing a wheel 0 Keep the anti theft wheel nut key in a conve nient place in your vehicle where you and service personnel can always find it easily when it is needed f you should lose the anti theft wheel nut key or one of the anti theft wheel nuts please contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for a replacement Operation Tires and wheels fon 291 Operation Ela Winter driving Before the onset of winter have your vehicle winterized at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center This service includes e Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze concentration e Addition of cleaning concentrate to the water of the windshield and headlamp cleaning system Add MB Concentrate MB Summerfit to a premixed wind shield washer solvent antifreeze which is formulated for below freezing temperatures gt page 401 e Battery test Battery capacity drops with decreasing ambient temperature A well charged battery helps to make sure that the engine can be started even at low ambient temperatures e Tire change Mercedes Benz recom mends M S rated radial ply tires with a minimum tread depth of approximately 7 in 4 mm on all four wheels for the winter season 292 Winter tires i A wheel change should only be carried out at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Other wise there is a danger of damaging the ve
199. elected in increments of four 163 gt D Controls in detail mz Audio system gt gt Press the desired numerical key to ES The stored entries are selected accord ing to the alphabetical order of the ini tial letters e g for B Brown press button twice gb Several characters and symbols cannot be shown on the display for technical reasons They have been replaced with spaces 164 Searching and selecting phone book entries by number nnil aa aA w a t aa U SND ABC CLE END P82 60 4077 31 gt Press the numkey The current number is marked in the display gt Press either the JRA or RA button The stored entries are selected according to numerical order or gt Press either the EXE or EG button The stored entries are selected in increments of 5 e g Entry ms Entry MLO etc Starting dialing process gt Once you have selected a number press the snokey Repeat dialing If the number dialed is busy you can again place calls to the last ten telephone numbers dialed using the repeat dialing function Manual repeat dialing redial gt E at I J L oF ACS Le SND CLE END P82 60 4079 31 Press the snokey The last number dialed is shown in the display Select the desired telephone number using WAM Eval IE ov BEB button The abbreviation L and the number of the entry are shown in the top line of the display
200. electro hydrau lic brake system must be deactivated prior to working on the system High pressure is intermittently built up in the system as part of its automatic self test In addition the system is automatically activated when the vehicle is unlocked by remote control when the driver or passenger door is opened when the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position 1 when the brake pedal is depressed or when the parking brake is released Failure to deactivate the system prior to maintenance will cause brake pis tons to extend and brake fluid to leak which may result in injuries contusions and acid burns Extended brake pistons may also cause injury Warning The electro hydraulic brake servo assis tance switches off automatically e approximately 2 minutes after you turned the SmartKey in the starter switch to position O or removed the SmartKey approximately 20 seconds after you locked the vehicle from the outside Notes on driving with the electro hydraulic brake system Following extended periods of only mi nor loads to your brake system you should occasionally apply the brakes when traveling at high speeds This im proves the grip of the brake pads and prevents possible brake noise After driving on wet or snow covered roads you should apply your brakes firmly before parking your vehicle This produces heat which serves to dry the brake disks Warning Safety and Security Driving safety syst
201. ems a A Make sure not to endanger any other road users when carrying out these braking maneuvers On long and steep grades shift to a lower gear gear range 1 2 or 3 to prevent the brakes from overheating and to reduce brake wear If you need to brake do not keep the brake pedal depressed instead depress it repeat edly in short intervals After hard braking it is advisable to drive on for some time so that the air stream will cool down the brakes faster Only Mercedes Benz approved compo nents e g brake pads should be installed on your vehicle Brake pads not approved by Mercedes Benz may impair the safety of your vehicle 89 Safety and Security ia Performance enhancement system Airbrake In winter operation the maximum effective Warning AN ness of the Airbrake is only achieved with winter The Airbrake enhances the vehicle s Criv tires M S tires or snow chains as required ing stability It adapts the aerodynamics of The following factors increase the risk of the vehicle to the driving conditions ac accidents cording to the speed and the mode set e Excessive speed especially in turns This is achieved using a moveable spoiler e Wet and slippery road surfaces The Airbrake is located at the rear edge of e Following another vehicle too closely the trunk lid The Airbrake cannot reduce this risk Always adjust your driving style to the pre Warning A N vailing road and weather conditions
202. ened seat belt A properly fastened seat belt is also needed to provide the best pos sible protection in a rollover We caution you not to rely on the presence of the air bags in order to avoid wearing your seat belt It is important to your safety and that of your pas senger that you replace deployed air bags and repair any malfunctioning air bags to ensure that the vehicle will continue to provide supplemental crash protection for occupants 64 Emergency Tensioning Device ETD and air bag Warning A N e Damaged seat belts or seat belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked Only use seat belts installed or supplied by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center e Air bags and ETDs are designed to func tion on a one time only basis An air bag or ETD that was activated must be replaced e Air bags and ETDs contain perchlorate material which may require special han dling and regard for the environment Check with your local government s dis posal guidelines California residents see www dtsc ca gov Hazardous Waste Perchlorate index cfm They could tear Do not make any modification that could change the effectiveness of the seat belts Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection No modifications of any kind may be made to any components or wiring of
203. ent Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc ae 401 ABS Anti lock Braking System Prevents the wheels from locking up during braking so that the vehicle can continue to be steered Accessory weight gt page 286 ACL Airbrake Central Locking Controls the locking mechanism of the Airbrake and the central locking system Air pressure gt page 286 Aspect ratio gt page 286 Bar gt page 286 BAS Brake Assist System System for potentially reducing braking distances in emergency braking situa tions The system is activated when it senses an emergency based on how fast the brake is applied Bead gt page 286 Bi Xenon headlamps Headlamps which use an electric arc as the light source and produce a more in tense light than filament headlamps Bi Xenon headlamps produce low beam and high beam CAC Customer Assistance Center Mercedes Benz customer service cen ter which can help you with any ques tions about your vehicle and provide assistance in the event of a breakdown Technical terms CAN system Controller Area Network Data bus network serving to control vehicle functions such as door locking or windshield wiping depending on vehicle settings and or ambient conditions Cockpit All instruments switches buttons and indicator warning lamps in the passen ger compartment needed for vehicle operation and monitoring Cold tire inflation pressure gt page 286
204. ently and can cause serious personal injury Never allow sparks flame or smoking materials near gasoline Turn off the engine before refueling Whenever you are around gasoline avoid inhaling fumes and skin contact extinguish all smoking materials Direct skin contact with fuels and the inha lation of fuel vapors are damaging to your health The fuel filler flap is located on the right hand side of the vehicle towards the rear Locking unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey automatically locks unlocks the fuel filler flap L In case that the central locking system does not release the fuel filler flap or the opening mechanism is clamping notify Roadside Assis tance or an authorized Mercedes Benz Center PRB 60 2175 31 1 Fuel filler flap 2 Fuel filler cap 3 Recess gt Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch Operation At the gas station gt Open the fuel filler flap by pushing at the point indicated by arrow The fuel filler flap opens gt Turn fuel filler cap counterclock wise and hold on to it until possible pressure is released gt Take off cap and set it in the recess 3 on the fuel filler flap gt To prevent fuel vapors from escaping into open air fully insert filler nozzle unit gt Only use premium unleaded gasoline with a minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91 average of 96 RON 86 MON E Information on gasoline quality can normal ly be found on the fue
205. eparately from each other could cause engine damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty If the antifreeze mixture is effective to 35 F 37 C the boiling point of the cool ant in the pressurized cooling system is reached at approximately 266 F 130 C The coolant solution must be used year round to provide the necessary corrosion protection and increase in the boil over protection Refer to Maintenance Booklet for replacement interval Coolant system design and coolant used determine the replacement interval The replacement interval published in the Maintenance Booklet is only applicable if MB 325 0 Anticorrosion Antifreeze solu tion or other Mercedes Benz approved products of equal specification are used to renew the coolant concentration or bring it back up to the proper level For information on other Mercedes Benz approved products of equal specification contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center or visit www mbusa com USA only To provide important corrosion protection the solution must be at least 50 anticor rosion antifreeze equivalent to freeze protection to approximately 35 F 37 C If you use a solution that is more than 55 anticorrosion antifreeze freeze protection to approximately 49 F 45 C the engine temperature will increase due to the lower heat transfer capability of the solution Therefore do not use more than this amount of anticorrosion antifreeze If the
206. er or other qualified maintenance or repair fa cility for further inspection or repairs Proper use of the vehicle Proper use of the vehicle requires that you a a re familiar with the following information nd rules the safety precautions in this manual the Technical data section in this manual traffic rules and regulations motor vehicle laws and safety standards A Various warning labels are attached to your vehicle These warning labels are intended to make you and others aware of various risks You should not remove any of these warning labels unless explicitly instructed to do so by information on the label itself Re moval of any of these labels may cause you and others to be unaware of certain risks which may result in an accident and or personal injury Warning Introduction Problems with your vehicle Y Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation we urge you to immediately contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required If the matter is not handled to your satisfaction please discuss the problem with the Mercedes Benz Center management or if necessary contact us at one of the following addresses In the USA Mercedes Benz USA LLC Customer Assistance Center Attn SLR Liaison Three Paragon Drive Montvale NJ 07645 0350 In Canada Cus
207. er display has cleared Otherwise you could damage the rear differential 343 Practical hints pe What to do if Left display Right display Possible cause Possible solution consequence Cal Servi ce Certain electronic systems are gt Have the electronic systems checked by an authorized Requi red unable to relay information to Mercedes Benz Center immediately the control system The follow ing systems may have failed e Coolant temperature gauge e Tachometer Fuel System The fuel cooling system is gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Mal f unct i on malfunctioning immediately Servi ce Requi red Engi ne There is no oil in the engine gt Stop your vehicle immediately in a safe location GI Pressure There is a danger of engine gt Switch off the engine Servi ce damage Required gt Do not drive any further gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center immediately Ra The engine oil level warning should not be ignored Extended driving with the symbol displayed could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty 344 Left display H A Right display Reserve Fuel Fuel Cap Qpen Tel Enter PIN Renove Key Repl ace Key Practical hints What to do if es Possible cause Possible solution consequence The fuel level has fallen into the Refuel at the next gas station gt page 247 reserve range A loss of pressure
208. er front air bag off indicator lamp 70 Safety guidelines 64 Air conditioning system see Automatic cli mate control Air distribution 189 190 Air pressure 286 Air pressure see Tire inflation pressure Air recirculation mode 193 Airvents 185 Air volume 189 191 Airbrake 31 90 Automatic mode 92 Emergency braking 92 Manual mode 91 Message in the multifunction display 332 Test Mode 91 Warning lamp 29 311 Alarm system see Anti theft systems Anticorrosion antifreeze 394 400 Antiglare Interior rear view mirror 181 Antilock Brake System see ABS Anti theft systems Index Anti theft alarm system 93 Immobilizer 93 Tow away alarm 95 Anti theft wheel nuts 290 Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning Armrest 209 Ashtray 210 Aspect ratio 286 AUDIO menu 127 Audio system 31 145 Button and soft key operation 148 Cassette operation 154 CD operation 158 Location 145 Operating and display elements 146 Operating safety 145 Operation 148 Radio operation 151 Switching on off 148 Telephone operation 162 213 409 index Auto dimming Interior rear view mirror 181 Automatic carwash 298 Automatic central locking Control system 104 139 Automatic climate control 184 Adjusting airvolume 191 Air conditioning refrigerant 396 Air conditioning Cooling 194 Air distribution 189 190 Air recirculation mode 193 Airvents 185 Airvolume 189 Control panel 186 Deactivating system 188 Defrosting 183 192 MAX COOL 191 Residual heat utilization
209. er object in the vehicle e g by leaning on armrests the OCS may not be able to properly approximate the occupant s weight category Safety and Security Occupant safety a f the seat needs to be serviced in any way take the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Only seat accessories approved by Mercedes Benz may be used Both driver and the passenger should always use the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp gt page 70 as an indica tion of whether or not the passenger is properly positioned 67 Safety and Security as Occupant safety Warning A N If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp illuminates when an adult or someone larger than a small individual is in the pas senger seat have the passenger re position himself or herself in the seat until the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp goes out For information on air bag display messages see gt page 324 In the event of a collision the air bag control unit will not allow passenger front air bag or passenger knee air bag deployment when the OCS classified the passenger seat occu pant as being up to or less than the weight of a typical 12 month old child in a standard child restraint or if the passenger seat is sensed as being empty 68 When the OCS senses that the passenger seat occupant is classified as being up to or less than the weight of a typical 12 month old child in a standard child restraint the PASSENGER AIR BAG OF
210. ercedes Benz Center immediately The transmission is in neutral although the gt Move the gear selector lever to gear selector lever is not neutral position N 331 Practical hints EJ What to do if Symbol messages Left display 332 Right display Ai rbrake Mal f uncti on Batter y Al ter nat or Stop Car Possible cause consequence The Airbrake locking mecha nism is malfunctioning The battery is malfunctioning The electro hydraulic brake system requires electrical energy and therefore has only limited operation Considerably greater brake pedal force is required and the pedal travel is longer The stopping distance Is increased If necessary apply full pressure to the brake pedal Possible solution gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center immediately gt Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced braking responsiveness vy Do not drive any further Call Roadside Assistance Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center immediately vy Practical hints What to do if ae Left display Right display Possible cause Possible solution consequence The battery is no longer gt Stop the vehicle immediately in a safe location and charging Possible causes check the poly V belt e alternator malfunctioning If it is broken e broken poly V belt gt Do not continue to drive Otherwise the engine will overheat due to an
211. ermittent wiping BE Do not leave windshield wipers on an intermittent setting when the vehicle is taken to an automatic car wash or during windshield cleaning Wipers will operate in the presence of water sprayed on the windshield and wipers may be damaged as a result T If you have set intermittent wiping dirt on the surface of the rain sensor or optical effects may cause the windshield wipers to wipe in an undesired fashion This could then damage the windshield wiper blades or scratch the windows You should therefore switch off the windshield wipers when weather conditions are dry The intermittent wiping interval is depen dent on the wetness of the windshield gt Turn the combination switch in direc tion of arrow 2 to position I After the initial wipe pauses between wipes are controlled by the rain sensor i Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the vehicle is at a standstill and a front door is opened This protects persons getting into or out of the vehicle from being sprayed Intermittent wiping will be continued when e all doors are closed and the gear selector lever is in drive position D or reverse gear R or e the wiper setting is changed using the com bination switch Getting started Driving R Single wipe gt Press combination switch briefly in direction of arrow Q to the resistance point The windshield wipers wipe one time without washer fluid Wiping with windshield washer
212. es Benz Center or Roadside Assistance Have the damaged tire replaced If tire inflation pressure is at least 20 psi 1 3 bar inflate tire to correct pressure see placard on driver s door B pillar and contact a nearest qualified workshop e g an authorized Mercedes Benz Center to have the damaged tire replaced Recommended duration of use A maximum of 300 miles 500 km at or below 50 mph 80 km h with the recommended tire inflation pressure Practical hints Flat tire aS gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Warning A N Have worn or damaged tires replaced in pairs front pair or rear pair an make sure the tires rotate in the direction specified gt page 262 Otherwise the driving stabili ty of the vehicle will be adversely affected especially when driving at high speeds Warning A N Follow recommend tire inflation pressures Do not underinflate tires Underinflated tires wear excessively and or unevenly adversely affect handling and fuel economy and are more likely to fail from being overheated Do not overinflate tires Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort wear unevenly increase stopping distance and result in sudden deflation blowout because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris potholes etc Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit or vehicle capacity weight as indicated on the placard on the dr
213. es Benz may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Checking the engine oil level When checking the oil level e the vehicle must be parked on level ground e the engine must be at normal operating temperature min 80 C gt Wait for at least 30 seconds with engine still at idle gt Measure engine oil level with engine still at idle Operation Engine compartment poa The oil dipstick and the cap are located on the passenger side in the engine compartment 4 Oil dipstick 2 Filler cap gt Pull out oil dipstick Q and wipe it off gt Reinsert the oil dipstick fully into the guide gt Pull out the oil dipstick again after 3 seconds Bi 253 b gt Operation Engine compartment ae fv Oil dipstick The engine oil level is correct when it is between lower mark min and upper mark max of the oil dipstick P18 00 2091 31 gt Top up the engine oil if necessary The filling quantity between the upper and lower marks on the oil dipstick is approximately 2 1 US gt 2 0 1 254 Adding engine oil Warning A The filler cap on the filler neck could be hot Use a rag when you unscrew the filler cap Otherwise you could burn yourself T Only use approved engine oils and oil filters required for vehicles with Maintenance System For a listing of approved engine oils and oil fil ters contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Cen ter or visit www mbusa com U
214. essages in the multifunction display 339 Wear 239 Brakes 236 Excessive loads 239 Warning lamp 29 307 Break in period 234 Bulbs Messages in the multifunction display 346 Replacing 361 C CAC 403 California retail buyers and lessees impor tant notice for 15 Call priority Tele Aid 220 CAN system 403 Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants 393 Cargo area see Trunk Cassette player 154 Catalytic converter 245 CD changer 158 Location 159 CD player 127 Center console Lower part 32 Upper part 31 Central locking Index Automatic 104 139 Central locking switch 31 Locking unlocking from inside 105 Central locking switch 105 Child restraints 60 Children in the vehicle 76 Airbags 63 Indicator lamp passenger front air bag 70 Infant and child restraint systems 60 70 79 Occupant Classification System OCS 67 Passenger front air bag off indicator lamp 70 317 Cigarette lighter 210 Cleaning Soft top 300 Clock 29 133 Setting time 134 Closed circuit racing Brakes 239 Cockpit 26 403 Cold tire inflation pressure 286 411 index Combination switch 27 51 110 Control and operation of radio transmitters 244 Control system 117 403 Multifunction display 117 Multifunction steering wheel 118 Control system menus 120 7225S menu 123 AUDIO menu 127 Settings menu 129 Standard display menu 122 TEL menu 141 Trip computer menu 139 Vehicle status message memory menu 128 Control system submenus Instrument cluster 132 Li
215. estraint toddler restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child Children can be killed or seriously injured by an inflating air bag Note the following important information when you place a child in the passenger seat e Your vehicle is equipped with air bag technology designed to turn off the pas senger front air bag and the passenger knee air bag in your vehicle when the OCS senses the weight of a typical 12 month old child or less along with the weight of a standard appropriate child restraint on the passenger seat 77 b gt b gt Safety and Security as Occupant safety 78 A child in a rear facing child restraint on the passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the passenger front air bag inflates in a collision which could occur under some circumstances even with the air bag technology installed in your vehicle If you install a rear facing child restraint on the passenger seat make sure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is illuminated indicating that the passenger front air bag and the passen ger knee air bag are deactivated Should the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while the restraint is installed please check in stallation Periodically check the PAS SENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp while driving to make sure the PASSEN GER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is illuminated If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
216. et 245 Operation a Driving instructions Coolant temperature Warning A N Warning A N During severe operating conditions and Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to stop and go city traffic the coolant e Driving when your engine is overheated your health All exhaust gas contains carbon temperature may rise close to can cause some fluids which may have monoxide CO and inhaling it can cause approximately 248 F 120 C leaked into the engine compartment to unconsciousness and possible death catch fire You could be seriously The engine should not be operated with burned Do not run the engine in confined areas the coolant temperature over 248 F e Steam from an overheated engine can such as a garage which are not properly 120 C Doing so may cause serious E A a a oC an Seer ventilated If you think that exhaust gas engine damage which is not covered by the just by opening the hood Stay away fumes are entering the vehicle while driving Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty from the engine if you see or hear steam have the cause determined and corrected immediately If you must drive under these conditions drive only with at least one window fully open at all times coming from it Turn off the engine get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down 246 Vv At the gas station Refueling AN Warning Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous It burns viol
217. existing charge in the battery while the vehicle is parked and not being driven for long periods of time on average approximately 3 weeks or more Not driving the vehicle for such extended periods may cause the charge in the vehicle battery to drop 372 Using the charging point The charging point for the battery charger is located next to the CD changer on the left hand side in the trunk P82 00 2530 31 1 Charging point gt Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch Open the cover of the charging point 1 Connect the battery charger with the charging point 1 Observe and follow the separate operating instructions for the battery charger Charge up the battery The battery charger switches off automatically when the battery is sufficiently charged Y Towing the vehicle Mercedes Benz recommends that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift dolly equipment Ba Use flatbed or wheel lift dolly equipment with SmartKey in starter switch turned to position 0 Do not tow with sling type equipment Towing with sling type equipment over bumpy roads will damage radiator and supports To prevent damage during transport do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or suspension parts i Do not tow start the vehicle When circumstances do not permit the recommended towing methods the vehi cle may be towed with all wheels on the ground only so far
218. f a typical 12 month old child or less along with the weight of a standard appropriate child restraint on the passenger seat Safety and Security Occupant safety a A child in a rear facing child restraint on the passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the passenger front air bag and or the passenger knee air bag inflate in a collision which could occur under some circumstances even with the air bag technology installed in your vehicle If you install a rear facing child restraint on the passenger seat make sure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is illuminated indicating that the passenger front air bag and the passen ger knee air bag are deactivated Should the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while the restraint is installed please check in stallation Periodically check the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp while driving to make sure the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is illuminated If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp goes out or gt gt 69 Safety and Security as Occupant safety b gt remains out do not transport a child on the passenger seat until the system has been repaired A child in a rear facing child restraint on the passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the passenger front air bag and or the passenger knee air bag inflate If you place a child in a forward facing child restraint on the passenger se
219. f con nected switches off If you must use this phone we recommend that you use it only with the ve hicle at a standstill in a safe location The multi function display in the instrument cluster is available for use After the Tele Aid call has end ed the optional mobile phone switches on again A PIN entry might be necessary 220 Remote door unlock In case you have locked your vehicle unin tentionally e g SmartKey inside vehicle and the reserve SmartKey is not handy gt Contact the Mercedes Benz Response Center at 1 800 756 9018 in the USA or 1 888 923 8367 in Canada You will be asked to provide your pass word which you provided when you completed the subscriber agreement gt Then return to your vehicle and pull the trunk recessed handle for a minimum of 20 seconds until the SOS button is flashing The message connecting Cal ap pears in the multifunction display As an alternative you may unlock the vehi cle via Internet in the My Tele Aid section of Owner s Online using the ID and pass word USA only The Response Center will then unlock your vehicle with the remote door unlocking feature The remote door unlock feature is available if the relevant cellular phone network is available The SOS button will flash and the message Connecti ng Cal will appear in the multifunc tion display to indicate receipt of the door unlock command Once the vehicle is unlocked a Resp
220. fe to do SO Switching on headlamps Low beam headlamps The exterior lamp switch is located on the dashboard to the left of the steering wheel Exterior lamp switch Off 2 Low beam headlamps on gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to position Jey The low beam headlamps come on High beam The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column Combination switch 1 High beam 2 High beam flasher gt Pushcombination switch in direction of arrow 1 The high beam headlamps and high beam headlamp indicator lamp EDJ in the instrument cluster come on gt page 29 For more information on headlamps see Lighting gt page 106 Getting started Driving E Turn signals The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column Combination switch 1 Turn signals right 2 Turn signals left Press the combination switch up Q or down 2 The corresponding turn signal indicator lamp EJ or EEJ in the instrument cluster flashes gt page 29 The combination switch resets automati cally after major directional changes 51 Getting started Driving To signal minor directional changes such as changing lanes press combination switch to point of resistance only and release The corre sponding turn signals will flash three times Windshield wipers The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column
221. forma tion Booklet or simply call the Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance Center in the USA at 1 800 FOR MERCedes or Customer Service in Canada at 1 800 387 0100 It is in your own interest that we can contact you should the need arise If you sell your Mercedes please leave all literature with the vehicle to make it avail able to the next operator If you bought this vehicle used be sure to send in the Notice of Purchase of Used Car found in the Service and Warranty In formation Booklet or call the Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance Cen ter in the USA at 1 800 FOR MERCedes or Customer Service in Canada at 1 800 387 0100 Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada If you plan to operate your vehicle in for eign countries please be aware that e service facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available e unleaded gasoline for vehicles with cat alytic converters may not be available the use of leaded fuels will damage the catalysts e gasoline may have a considerably low er octane rating and improper fuel can cause engine damage Introduction Operator s Manual Mercedes Benz SLR McLaren compliance The Mercedes Benz SLR McLaren vehicle does not comply with the state certifica tion regulations of select states It is not permitted to register the vehicle in such states Check with an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for details 17 Introduction Where to find it
222. ft turn left two stops Indicator lamp for parking lamps Indicator lamp for front fog lamps Indicator lamp for rear fog lamp i If you hear a warning signal you have forgot ten to switch off the low beam headlamps or the parking lamps before opening the driver s door In addition the message RJ i ghts Are Still n appears in the multifunction display Switch off the headlamps or the parking lamps If the Message Swi tch off lights or re nove key appears in the multifunction display remove the SmartKey from the starter switch or switch off the automatic headlamp mode T Failure to switch off the headlamps when leaving the vehicle may result in a discharged battery Low beam headlamps The low beam headlamps can be switched on and off with the exterior lamp switch using the manual headlamp mode gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to position ey The following lamps switch on e Low beam headlamps e Tail and parking lamps e License plate lamps e Side marker lamps Automatic headlamp mode The following lamps switch on and off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light e Low beam headlamps e Tail and parking lamps e License plate lamps e Side marker lamps A If the exterior lamp switch is set to BQ the headlamps will not be automatically switched on under foggy conditions Warning To minimize risk to you and to others activate headlamps by turning exterior lamp switch t
223. g attempts there could be a malfunction in the engine electronics or in the fuel supply system gt Notify an authorized Mercedes Benz Center or call Roadside Assistance Parking brake k i LS 1 Release button 2 Parking brake lever Warning A N When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could release the parking brake which could result in an accident and or personal serious injury Getting started Driving Pull lever 2 upwards slightly press release button Q and move the lever down to the stop The warning lamp USA only or Canada only in the instrument cluster goes out 49 Getting started Driving Driving off gt Depress the brake pedal The gear selector lever lock is released gt Place the gear selector lever in drive position D or reverse gear R A It is dangerous to shift the gear selector le ver out of park position P or neutral position N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the en gine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal Warning 50 A
224. g instructions eens 235 Engine compartment 250 196 Drive sensibly save fuel 235 HOOO eere a EE E 250 Synchronizing power windows 198 Drinking and OFiVing 00eeeeeee 235 Engine Of eeessssssseeeeceeeceeeees 253 Opening and closing the soft top 198 PC ANG aE E EE 235 Transmission fluid level 254 Wind screen ccccccccccccersseeseseeees 201 Power assistance ceeeeeeeeeeeeees 236 SOO Gis secssetesaunoncancatacceacsasasesceteees 255 Linkage COVELS cceseeeeeeseeeeeeees 202 PAK CS ares senses ZOO PGW E 256 Driving SYSTEMS ee 205 Driving Off Sa scascessosgcssenstessonesedan sees 239 Batteries ccessesssssssssssessseesees 256 Cruise Control ccceeeeeeeeeeeees 205 E E E 240 Windshield washer system and head Useful features sssssssssssssererers 209 ig E E E S 240 lamp cleaning system 66 257 Map pocket in passenger footwell 209 Hydroplaning ccccccceceeeceeeeeeeees 241 Tires and wheels ecce 259 Storage compartments 209 Tire traction ccccccccssessseeceeeees 241 Important guidelines 006 259 Parcel net in trunk ssseeeee 210 Tire speed rating ccsseeeseeeeees 242 Tire care and maintenance 260 Ashtray and cigarette lighter 210 Winter driving instructions 242 Direction of rotation 06 262 Power OUutlet
225. ge essesesessseseseses 381 Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet eneee 381 Identification labels eneeee 382 Engine NUMDET ccccssssseeeeees 382 Layout of poly V belt drive 383 EVI EOT E EE 384 RIMS and tires eeeeeeseeeeereeee 385 Mixed size tires 386 Winter tireS noesscsscescsccerecrree 388 Electrical system cccccseseeceneeees 390 Main dimensions sses 391 Contents ETA A E A 392 Fuels coolants lubricants etc 393 Capacities ceeeccesssceeseceeecenes 393 Approved engine OIls 0006 395 Engine oil additives c seeeee 395 Air conditioning refrigerant 396 Brake TU Ci casienacousessetansciwivvanntes 396 Premium unleaded gasoline 396 Fuel requirement sccceeeeees 397 Gasoline additives ccceeeceeeee 397 COO aI a seeen 398 Windshield washer system and head lamp cleaning system 66 401 O Technical terms 0 000 402 Y Product information Please observe the following in your own best interest We recommend using Genuine Mercedes Benz Parts as well as conversion parts and accessories explicitly approved by us for your vehicle model We have tested these parts to determine their reliability safety and special suitabili ty for Mercedes Benz vehicles We are unable to make an assessment for other products and therefore cannot be held res
226. ge 70 e the impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold Knee air bags P91 60 2575 31 1 Knee air bag driver s side 2 Knee air bag passenger side The knee air bags are located on the lower instrument panel They are designed to op erate together with the front air bags in certain frontal impacts exceeding a preset threshold The knee air bags operate best in conjunction with a properly positioned and fastened seat belts and when the foot well is kept clear of objects Head thorax air bags PO1 6 3410 31 1 Head thorax air bag The head thorax air bags are deployed e inside impacts exceeding a preset de ployment threshold e onthe impacted side of the vehicle e independently of the front air bags The head thorax air bags are not deployed in side impacts which do not exceed the system s deployment threshold Occupant Classification System The Occupant Classification System OCS automatically turns the passenger front air bag and passenger side knee air bag on or off based on the classified occupant weight category determined by weight sensor readings from the passenger seat ap The system does not deactivate the head thorax air bag and the emergency tension ing device Occupants must sit properly belted in a position that is as upright as possible with their back against the seat backrest and feet on the floor to be correctly classified If the occupant s weight is transferred to anoth
227. ge after an accident for example The hood could otherwise come loose while the vehicle is in motion and injure you and or others Pai T 4 Fan PBS 40 2656 31 gt Pull the hood upwards in the center against the resistance of the gas filled Spring struts Ba Make sure the rollers at the rear of the hood are engaged and the guide pins line up with the guide holes Otherwise the hood may be damaged gt Hold the front center part of the hood with both hands and push it back wards After pushing the hood back wards about half way you will feel the hood passing a crest and the resulting force pulling the hood away from you At that point let go of the hood and let it fall onto the latches The hood should now be locked and entirely closed gt Check that the hood is properly closed If the hood is not properly engaged repeat the closing procedure Engine oil The amount of oil your engine needs will depend on a number of factors including driving style Higher oil consumption can occur when e the vehicle is new e the vehicle is driven frequently at higher engine speeds Engine oil consumption checks should only be made after the vehicle break in period Oil consumption of the SLR is slightly higher than other vehicles Please check the engine oil level frequently pg Do not use any special lubricant additives as these may damage the drive assemblies Using special additives not approved by Merced
228. ges between the roll over bars and the rear window when the soft top is closed as a storing space T When you open or close the soft top make sure e there is sufficient clearance as the soft top swings upwards e that the soft top fabric is not frozen e that the soft top is not dirty or wet e that no items are placed on the soft top Otherwise the soft top or other vehicle compo nents could be damaged i Please keep in mind that weather conditions can sometimes change rapidly Make sure to close the soft top when leaving the vehicle If water enters the vehicle interior vehicle elec tronics could be damaged which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Controls in detail Open air i Your vehicle is equipped with a semi auto matic soft top This means that you will have to release or lock the soft top manu ally by means of a handle The soft top can be opened or closed electrically using the buttons on the soft top switch 1 Handle Handle serves to release or lock the soft top 199 Controls in detail Open air The soft top switch is located on the lower part of the center console Soft top switch cover 2 Cover 3 To open the soft top 4 To close the soft top 200 Opening the soft top ee Make sure that the soft top is dry before opening it Otherwise water may enter the inte rior gt Switch on the ignition gt Fold down handle Q gt Turn the handle
229. ghting 134 Time 133 Vehicle 138 Controller Area Network see CAN Coolant 249 255 398 121 130 412 Anticorrosion antifreeze mixing ratio and quantity 400 Capacities 394 Checking coolant level 249 255 Messages in the multifunction display 340 Temperature 246 Temperature gauge 115 Warning lamp 29 310 Courtesy lighting 113 Cruise control 27 205 404 Messages in the multifunction display 322 Curb weight 286 Customer Assistance Center see CAC D Daytime running lamp mode 108 Setting 135 Deep water see Standing water Defogging Windshield 192 Defrosting Front 192 Defrosting Rear 183 Delayed switch off Exteriorlamps 136 Interior lighting 137 Department of Transportation see DOT Differential Message in the multifunction display 343 Difficulties While driving 54 With starting 49 Digital clock see Clock Digital speedometer 122 Dimensions Vehicle 391 Direction of rotation Tires 262 Display elements Audio system 146 Displays Digital speedometer 122 Maintenance service indicator 294 Multifunction display 117 Outside temperature 116 122 Symbol messages 332 Text messages 321 Vehicle status messages Distance toempty 140 Distance to empty range Trip computer 140 Door Control panel 34 Entry lamps 112 Handle Inside 34 Handle Outside 39 Locking unlocking SmartKey 39 98 Message in the multifunction 128 319 display 353 Opening from inside outside 39 101 Remote door unlock Tele Aid 220
230. goes out or remains out do not transport a child on the pas senger seat until the system has been repaired A child in a rear facing child restraint on the passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the passenger front air bag and or the passenger knee air bag inflate If you place a child in a forward facing child restraint on the passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible use the proper child restraint recom mended for the age size and weight of the child and secure child restraint with the vehicle s seat belt according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions For children larger than the typical 12 month old child the passenger front air bag may or may not be activated gt page 68 Warning A N Infants and small children should never share a seat belt with another occupant During an accident they could be crushed between the occupant and seat belt A child s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and or the child is not properly secured in the child restraint A Children too big for a toddler restraint must ride in seats using regular seat belts Position the shoulder belt across chest and shoulder not face or neck A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over 41 Ib until they reach a height where a lap shoulder belt fits properly without a
231. h 3 Tow away alarm off button 4 Release button for storage compartment under armrest Soft top switch 6 ESP switch 7 Passenger front air bag off indicator lamp Gear selector lever for automatic transmission 9 Parking brake Page 44 102 95 209 200 86 70 171 49 59 Y Overhead control panel Item C Left reading lamp on off 2 Temperature sensor for automatic climate control 3 Right reading lamp on off 4 Interior lighting control Hands free microphone for Tele Aid emergency call system and telephone see separate operating instructions Interior rear view mirror 7 Garage door opener Tele Aid emergency call system button Page 112 184 112 112 212 44 181 221 219 At a glance Overhead control panel 33 At a glance Control panel on the door sill Item Page Door handle Switches for opening closing 196 door windows Switch for seat adjustment 34 Unlocking Adjusting Driving Parking and locking Getting started Sa Unlocking The Getting started section provides an overview of the vehicle s most basic func tions First time Mercedes Benz owners should pay special attention to the infor mation given here Warning A N When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the v
232. h a door window gt Swing respective sun visor down gt Disengage the sun visor from mounting 3 When the sun visor is disengaged from mounting 3 vanity mirror lamp 2 switches off gt Pivot the sun visor to the side BE 70 avoid damage to vanity mirror cover make sure it is closed before pivoting the sun visor to the side Vanity mirror gt Swing respective sun visor down gt Flip up vanity mirror cover Q to access the vanity mirror Vanity mirror lamp 2 comes on gt After using the vanity mirror flip down vanity mirror cover Q gt Swing the sun visor up Rear window defroster The rear window defroster uses a large amount of power To keep the battery drain to a minimum switch off the defroster as soon as the rear window Is clear The defroster is automatically deactivated after approximately 6 to 17 minutes of operation depending on the outside temperature Warning A N Any accumulation of snow and ice should be removed from the rear window before driving Visibility could otherwise be impaired endangering you and or others Activating gt Press button Ralf on the automatic climate control panel gt page 186 The indicator lamp on the button comes on Controls in detail Good visibility 9 i Ifthe rear window defroster switches off too soon and the indicator lamp starts flashing this means that too many electrical consumers are operating simultaneously and the
233. h vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration General Depending on the design standards used the tire size molded into the sidewall may have no letter or a letter preceding the tire size designation No letter preceding the size designation as illustrated above Passenger car tire based on European design standards Letter P preceding the size designation Passenger car tire based on U S design standards Letter LT preceding the size designation Light Truck tire based on U S design standards Letter T preceding the size designation Temporary spare tires which are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tire width The tire width G gt page 277 indicates the nominal tire width in mm Operation Tires and wheels Aspect ratio The aspect ratio 2 gt page 277 is the dimensional relationship between tire section height and section width and is expressed in percentage The aspect ratio is arrived at by dividing section height by section width Tire code The tire code gt page 277 indicates the tire construction type The R stands for radial tire type Letter D means diag onal or bias ply construction letter B means belted bias ply construction At the tire manufacturer s option any tire with a speed capability above 149 mph 240 km h can include a ZR in the size designation for example 245 40 ZR
234. has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile 1 6 km Curb weight The weight of a motor vehicle with stan dard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel oil and coolant and if so equipped air conditioning and additional optional equipment but without passen gers and cargo DOT Department of Transportation A tire branding symbol which denotes the tire meets requirements of the U S Department of Transportation GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating The GAWR is the maximum permissible axle weight The gross vehicle weight on each axle must never exceed the GAWR for the front and rear axle indicated on the certification label located on the driver s door A pillar GVW Gross Vehicle Weight The GVW comprises the weight of the vehicle including fuel tools spare wheel installed accessories passengers and cargo and if applicable trailer tongue load The GVW must never exceed the GVWR indicated on the certification label located on the driver s door A pillar GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating This is the maximum permissible vehicle weight of the fully loaded vehicle weight of the vehicle including all options passen gers fuel and cargo and if applicable trailer tongue load It is indicated on certification label located on the driver s door A pillar Kilopascal kPa The metric unit for air pressure There are 6 9 kPa to 1 psi another metric unit for air pressu
235. he codes of all three channels 225 Controls in detail ia Useful features Programming tips If you are having difficulty programming the integrated remote control here are some helpful tips e Check the frequency of the hand held remote control typically located on the reverse side of the remote The in tegrated remote control is compatible with radio frequency devices operating between 280 390 MHz e Put anew battery in hand held remote control This will increase the likeli hood of the hand held remote control sending a faster and more accurate sig nal to the integrated remote control e While performing step 3 hold hand held remote control 6 at differ ent lengths and angles from the signal transmitter button or you are programming Attempt varying angles at the distance of 2 to 5 in 5 to 12 cm away or the same angle at varying distances 226 e If another hand held remote control is available for the same device try the programming steps again using that other hand held remote control Make sure new batteries are in the hand held remote control before beginning the procedure e Straighten the antenna wire from the garage door opener assembly This may help improve transmitting and or receiving signals Q Certain types of garage door openers are in compatible with the integrated remote control If you Should experience further difficulties with programming the integrated re
236. hicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle A child s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and or serious personal injury Warning A N Only Mercedes Benz SLR McLaren Roadster 7225 Because of the carbon fiber the footwell could be slippery when wet Be careful when exiting the vehicle with wet shoe soles you could slip on it gt Exit the vehicle and close all doors Opening a door causes the door win dows on that side of the vehicle to open slightly They will return to the up position when the door is closed ER The door windows will not open or close if the battery is discharged or the door windows are impeded by ice In this case open or close the door with increased caution Do not attempt to force the door opened or closed Doing so may damage the door seals or the side window Getting started Parking and locking kg D f you hear a warning signal you have forgot ten to switch off the headlamps before opening the driver s door In addition the message RSH Li ghts Are Stil On appears in the multifunction display witch off the headlamps Press the lock button on the SmartKey gt page 38 With the hood trunk and all doors closed all turn signal lamps flash three times The anti theft alarm system is armed For more information see Locking and unlocking gt page 98 57 Occupant safety Panic ala
237. hicle by Jacking it up incorrectly Always use winter tires at temperatures below 45 F 7 C and whenever wintry road conditions prevail Not all M S rated tires provide special winter performance Make sure the tires you use show the mountain snowflake marking on the tire sidewall These tires meet specific snow traction performance requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association RMA and the Rubber Association of Can ada RAC and have been designed specif ically for use in snow conditions Use of winter tires is the only way to achieve the maximum effectiveness of the ABS and ESP in winter operation For safe handling make sure that all mounted winter tires are of the same make and have the same tread design A Winter tires with a tread depth of less than 1 in 4 mm must be replaced They are no longer suitable for winter operation in par ticular because they do not provide suffi cient grip This could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and cause an acci dent Warning Always observe the speed rating of the winter tires installed on your vehicle If the maximum speed for which your tires are rated is below the speed rating of your vehicle you must place a notice to this effect where it will be seen by the driver Such notices are available from your tire dealer or from any authorized Mercedes Benz Center After you have fitted the winter tires restart the TPMS gt page 274 Operation
238. hin 5 seconds you again pull the switch past the resistance point and release the automatic reversal will not function Controls in detail Open air 7 i If the upward movement of the window is blocked during the closing procedure the window will stop and open slightly Remove the obstruction pull the switch again past the resistance point and release If the window still does not close when there is no obstruction then pull and hold the switch again The window will then close without the obstruction sensor function Stopping the door windows gt Press or pull respective switch again 197 Controls in detail a Open air Synchronizing power windows The power windows must be synchronized each time e after the battery has been disconnected e if the power windows cannot be fully opened Express open or closed Express close Switch on the ignition gt page 40 Pull the power window switches until the windows are closed Hold the switches for approximately 1 second The power windows are synchronized 198 Opening and closing the soft top For safety reasons the soft top can only be opened and closed when the vehicle is stationary Also for safety reasons the door windows open automatically if the soft top is not opened or closed completely and a door is open Warning A N To prevent possible accidents only drive the vehicle with the soft top either completely closed and locked or fu
239. hold it up until the de sired speed is reached gt Release the cruise control lever The new speed is set 207 Controls in detail es Driving systems Fine adjustment in 1 mph Setting to last stored speed Canada 1 km h increments Resume function Faster Warning A N gt Briefly tip the cruise control lever in a direction of arrow 1 The speed stored in memory should only be set again if prevailing road conditions per Slower mit Possible acceleration or deceleration differences arising from returning to preset speed could cause an accident and or serious injury to you and or others gt Briefly tip the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 2 gt Briefly push the cruise control lever to position 4 The cruise control resumes the last set speed gt Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal 208 YV Useful features Map pocket in passenger footwell Warning J Do not place heavy or fragile objects or ob jects having sharp edges in the map pocket In an accident during hard braking or sud den maneuvers they could be thrown around inside the vehicle and cause injury to vehicle occupants Gp Canada only The compact guide is located in the map pocket Storage compartments Warning A N To help avoid personal injury during a colli sion or sudden maneuver exercise care when storing objects in the vehicle Put lug gage or cargo in the trunk Do not pile lug gag
240. hone 212 Answering acall 142 Dialing 143 Ending a call 143 Hands free microphone 33 Loading phone book 143 Messages in the multifunction display 345 Operation 141 162 Redialing 144 Signal strength 141 Temperature Interior temperature 189 Outside temperature 116 Sensor Interior 33 Sensor outside 116 Tether attachment points see Children in the vehicle Tightening torque Wheel bolts 290 291 407 Time 133 TIN 281 288 Tire and Loading Information 263 Placard 263 Terminology 286 Tire Identification Number see TIN Tire inflation pressure Checking Checking electronically 271 Checking manually 271 TIREFIT kit 356 365 407 Tire inflation pressure 367 Using 365 Index Tires 259 385 Air pressure 286 Care and maintenance 260 Cleaning 262 Combination low tire pressure TPMS malfunction telltale 29 315 Direction of rotation Spinning 262 Driving instructions 240 Hydroplaning 241 Important guidelines 259 Important notes Tire inflation pressure 269 Inflation pressure 249 268 270 283 Information placards 263 Inspection 260 Load rating 277 282 288 Loading terminology 286 Messages in the multifunction display 329 351 Ply composition and material used 286 288 Problems under overinflation 275 Retreads 259 Rims and tires 385 423 index Rotation 289 Towing 373 Opening 100 102 Service life 261 Transmission damage 375 Opening in an emergency 357 Size designation 277 Towing eye bolt 356
241. horized Mercedes Benz Center Warning A N Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive substances Therefore keep the batteries out of reach of children If a battery is swallowed seek medical help immediately Warning A N SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate ma terial which may require special handling and regard for the environment Check with your local government s disposal guidelines California residents see www dtsc ca gov HazardousWaste Per chlorate index cfm Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling Replacement batteries Lithium type CR 2025 or equivalent Practical hints Replacing SmartKey batteries i When inserting the batteries make sure they are clean and free of lint i When replacing batteries always replace both batteries The required replacement batter ies are available at any Mercedes Benz Center gt Remove the mechanical key out of the SmartKey gt page 357 359 Practical hints E i Replacing SmartKey batteries 1 Mechanical key 2 Unlocking the battery compartment 3 Removing the battery compartment 4 Slide gt Insert mechanical key Q in side opening push gray slide 4 in direction of arrow 2 The battery compartment is unlatched gt Pull battery compartment
242. ht Circuit i Headlamp Mode Co P54 32 4954 31 gt Press button or E to select manual operation manual or daytime running lamp mode const ant activated With daytime running lamp mode activated and the exterior lamp switch in position WEJ or BZ the low beam headlamps are switched on when the engine is running In low ambient light conditions the following lamps will switch on additionally e Parking lamps e Tail lamps e License plate lamps e Side marker lamps For more information on the daytime running lamp mode see Daytime running lamp mode gt page 108 i For safety reasons resetting the Li ghti ng submenu to factory settings while driving gt page 129 will not deactivate the daytime running lamp mode You see the following message in the right multi function display Cannot be fully reset to factory settings while dri vi ng Controls in detail Control system ia Setting locator lighting With the locator lighting feature activated and the exterior lamp switch in position A the following lamps will switch on during darkness when the vehicle is unlocked with the SmartKey e Parking lamps e Tail lamps e License plate lamps e Side marker lamps e Front fog lamps The locator lighting switches off when the driver s door is opened If you do not open a door after unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey the lamps will switch off automatically after approxi mately 40 secon
243. ible cause consequence Possible solution The passenger front air bagand Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and the passenger knee air bag are check the passenger seat for the following activated while driving even though a child small individual or object below the system s weight threshold is on the pas Remove child and child restraint from passenger seat senger seat or the passenger seat is empty Objects on the seat or forces acting on the seat may make the system sense supplemental weight Switch off the ignition gt page 40 vy Apply the parking brake gt page 55 gt Make sure that no objects which are applying supplemen tal weight onto the seat are present The system may rec ognize such supplemental weight and sense that an occupant on the passenger seat is of a greater weight than actually present gt Keep the seat unoccupied close the passenger door and switch on the ignition gt page 40 Monitor the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp gt page 70 and the multifunction display in the instrument cluster gt page 117 for the following Continued on next page Practical hints What to do if Le Leftdisplay Rightdisplay Possible cause consequence Possible solution With the seat unoccupied and the ignition switched on e the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp gt page 70 should illuminate and remain illuminated indicating that the OCS gt page 67 has
244. identical but mirror inverted Warning UN Do not use damaged covers Damaged covers could come loose while driving and Cover 5 Lock hit other road users Tab Holder G Bodywork Slot BE Do not use damaged covers Damaged Sealing gt Press down on lock and turn it covers could come loose while driving and gt Open the trunk lid clockwise by 90 damage the vehicle gt Fit tabs of cover between gt Hold the lock in this position and insert sealing and bodywork holder into slot gt Press down on the cover and turn the lock counter clockwise by 90 gt D 203 Controls in detail i Open air The cover is properly locked when the white markings face each other 1 Lock 2 Cover Warning AN gt Open the trunk lid gt Press down on lock and turn it Covers that are not properly locked could Bee clockwise by 90 come loose while driving and hit other road users gt Lift cover 2 slightly and pull it out in Therefore make sure that the covers are direction of the arrow properly locked gt Repeat the above steps for the passen ger side cover gt Store both covers into the bag and put the bag in the trunk 204 Y Driving systems The driving system of your vehicle is described on the following pages e Cruise control with which the vehicle can maintain a preset speed For information on the BAS ABS and ESP see Driving safety systems
245. ii ciii Temp ie ps P _ p cea p P54 32 4950 31 gt Press button or E to select the desired setting The selected display appears in the left multifunction display The option not selected will appear in the right multifunction display when scrolling through the standard display gt page 122 Selecting the language gt Move the selection marker with button Or to the instr Guster submenu gt Press button JM or Keg repeatedly until you see this message in the left multifunction display Language The selection marker is on the current setting Se Language b an ais P54 32 4335 31 gt Press button or E to select the language to be used for the multi function display messages Available languages e German e English e French e Italian e Spanish e Dutch e Danish e Swedish e Portuguese e Turkish Controls in detail Control system ia Time submenu Access the Ti ne Submenu via the set ti ngs menu Use the Ti ne submenu to change the time settings The following functions are available Function Page Setting time minutes 134 Setting time hours 134 133 Controls in detail mz Control system Setting time minutes gt lt gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Ti ne submenu Press button J or Ref repeatedly until you see this message in the left multifunction display Set Ti ne M nute s The selection
246. ildren 12 years old or under use an appropri ately sized infant restraint toddler re straint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child 3 Always wear seat belts properly If you believe that even with the use of these guidelines it would be safer for your passenger seat occupants to have the pas senger head thorax air bag deactivated then deactivation can be accomplished upon your written request to do so at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center at an additional cost Please contact your local authorized Mercedes Benz Center or call the Customer Assistance Center in the USA at 1 800 FOR MERCedes 1 800 367 6372 or Customer Service in Canada at 1 800 387 0100 for details 63 Safety and Security as Occupant safety Air bags are designed to activate only in cer Safety guidelines for the seat belt Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges tain frontal impacts front air bags knee air bags and side impacts head thorax air bags which exceed preset thresholds Only during these types of impacts will they provide their supplemental protection The driver and passenger should always wear their seat belts Otherwise it is not possible for the air bags to provide their supplemental protection In cases of other types of impacts and impacts below air bag deployment thresholds air bags will not deploy The driver and passenger will then be protected to the extent possible by a properly fast
247. in an accident and or serious personal injury 41 Getting started I adjusting The seat adjustment switch is located on the door sill 1 Seat fore and aft adjustment 2 Seat height 3 Seat angle 42 Seat fore and aft adjustment gt Slide the switch forwards or backwards in the direction of arrow Q i When moving the seat make sure that there are no items in the footwell or behind the seat otherwise you could damage the seat Seat height gt Slide the switch up or down in the direction of arrow 2 Seat angle gt Slide the switch up or down in the direction of arrow 8 Steering wheel A Warning Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving Adjusting the steering wheel while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Even with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch the steering wheel can be ad justed Therefore do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle A child s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an acci dent and or serious personal injury The stalk for steering wheel adjustment is located on the lower left of the steering column 1 Adjusting steering column in or out 2 Adjusting steering column up or down Adjusting steering column in or out gt
248. ing A malfunction in the system has been detected if the EGS indicator lamp e fails to go out after approximately 4 seconds after the engine was started e does not come onat all e comes on after the engine was started or while driving For more information see the Practical hints section gt page 314 Warning A N Modifications to or work improperly con ducted on restraint systems or their wiring as well as tampering with interconnected electronic systems can lead to the restraint systems no longer functioning as intended Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices ETDs for example could deploy inadvert ently or fail to deploy in accidents although the deceleration threshold for air bag de ployment is exceeded Therefore never modify the restraint systems Do not tamper with electronic components or their soft ware Warning A N In the event that the R indicator lamp comes on during driving or does not come on at all the SRS self check has detected a malfunction For your safety we strongly recommend that you contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center immediately to have the system checked otherwise the SRS may not deploy when needed in an accident which could result in serious personal or fatal injury or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury In addition improper repair work on the SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS inopera tive or causing
249. ing possible The light sensor is malfunction gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center ing The headlamps switch on immediately automatically To switch off the headlamps U S vehicles only gt Inthe control system set lamp operation to manual mode gt page 134 gt Switch on headlamps using the exterior lamp switch 347 Practical hints pe What to do if Left display 10 e a 348 Right display Possible cause consequence Low Beam The left low beam lamp is Left malfunctioning Low Beam The right low beam lamp is Ri ght malfunctioning Marker Lanp The front left side marker lamp Front Left is malfunctioning Marker Lanp The front right side marker Front Ri ght lamp is malfunctioning Marker Lanp The rear left side marker lamp Rear Left is malfunctioning Marker Lanp The rear right side marker lamp Rear Ri ght is malfunctioning Parking Lanp The left front parking lamp is Front Left malfunctioning An auxiliary Auxiliary Bulb bulb is being used Parking Lanp The right front parking lamp is Front Ri ght malfunctioning An auxiliary Auxiliary Bulb bulb is being used Possible solution Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Replace the bulb as soon as possible Replace the bulb as soon as possible Replace the bulb as soon as possible Replace the bulb as soon as possible
250. ing a mobile telephone while driving a vehicle Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet approximately 14 m every second Observe all legal requirements 162 Various car telephone functions and oper ating steps for the car telephone can be performed and displayed via the audio system Further operating instructions not covered here can be found in the operating instructions for the multifunction steering wheel and the telephone Switching on the telephone gt Press button If you have programmed an unlock code for the telephone you must enter the code now gt Enter the code using buttons BEE to EJ gt If necessary correct number entered with the ar key Press key briefly to delete the last digit entered press key and hold to delete the complete number gt Press the key after entering correct code The telephone is unlocked If you have entered the wrong code you must re peat the entering procedure with the correct code Switching off the telephone gt Press button repeatedly until you see PHONE F in the display The receiving symbol in the display disappears Adjusting the volume gt Turn control knob ROJ during tele phone operation The volume increases or decreases de pending on the direction in which the knob is turned a The volume can be adjusted separately for the telephone and radio Pla
251. ing on off Temperature control left The automatic climate control is operation al whenever the engine is running You can operate the climate control system in ei ther the automatic or manual mode The system cools or heats the interior depend ing on the selected interior temperature and the current outside temperature A When operating the automatic climate con trol the air that enters the passenger com partment through the air vents can be very hot or very cold depending on the set tem perature This may cause burns or frostbite to unprotected skin in the immediate area of the air vents Always keep sufficient dis tance between unprotected parts of the body and the air vents If necessary use the air distribution controls gt page 190 to di rect the air to air vents in the vehicle interior that are not in the immediate area of unprotected skin Warning Nearly all dust particles pollutants and odors are filtered out before outside air en ters the passenger compartment through the air distribution system The air conditioning will not engage no cooling if the mode is activated gt page 194 A Follow the recommended settings for heat ing and cooling given on the following pages Otherwise the windows could fog up impairing visibility and endangering you and or others Warning Controls in detail Automatic climate control a i Severe conditions e g strong air pollution may require rep
252. ing so that the air stream will cool down the brakes gt The message disappears after driving carefully for a few minutes Practical hints What to do if ae Left display Right display Possible cause Possible solution consequence USA only Brake There are malfunctions but the Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center A Canada only Servi ce electro hydraulic brake system immediately Requi red is operating normally Rel ease You are driving with the parking gt Release the parking brake gt page 49 Parking Brake brake set OQ Brake War The brake pads have reached Have the brake pads replaced as soon as pos their wear limit sible HB Brake pad thickness must be visually ae is unlocked by remote control when the checked by a qualified technician at the intervals Warning Z driver or passenger door is opened when the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position 1 when the brake pedal is specified in the Maintenance Booklet Excessive load on the brake system causes in Have brake pad replacement and other work creased wear of brake pads and brake disks If on the electro hydraulic brake system car the brake pads have to be replaced multiple ried out by qualified technicians only Con depressed or when the parking brake is times within one maintenance service interval tact your Mercedes Benz Center for further released the brake disks must be checked Observe the information The electro hydrau
253. intenance instructions as outlined in your Maintenance Booklet T To prevent damage to the catalytic converters only use premium unleaded gasoline in this vehicle Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation should be repaired promptly Otherwise exces sive unburned fuel may reach the catalytic converter causing it to overheat and potentially start a fire Warning A N As with any vehicle do not idle park or operate this vehicle in areas where combus tible materials such as grass hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire Warning A N The exhaust areas on the engine hood and between the doors and front wheels get very hot Avoid contact with them otherwise there is the risk of severe burns Operation Driving instructions koad Emission control Certain systems of the engine serve to keep the toxic components of the exhaust gases within permissible limits required by law These systems of course will function properly only when maintained strictly according to factory specifications Any adjustments on the engine should therefore be carried out only by qualified Mercedes Benz Center authorized techni cians Engine adjustments should not be altered in any way Moreover the specified service jobs must be carried out regularly according to Mercedes Benz servicing requirements For details refer to the Maintenance Bookl
254. interior floor 257 gt D Operation Lae Trunk gt gt gt Lift up the interior floor 1 panel at The quick release fasteners 4 have to be Closing the washer fluid reservoir loop 2 pa al not turned when you close gt Press cap tothe ileraeelcuilnill gt Fold the outer edges of the interior l it engages fully MOOT IOWANGS NEOVIA Opening the washer fluid reservoir For more information see Windshield gt Remove the interior floor in direction of washer system and headlamp cleaning system gt page 401 PO do eo2 6 31 1 Cap for windscreen washer reservoir gt Pull up cap by the tab _ 4 Quick release fastener Cover gt Turn quick release fasteners 4 anti clockwise and remove cover 5 258 Vv Tires and wheels For safety reasons only use tires and rims which have been tested and approved by Mercedes Benz for use on SLR vehicles Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for information on tested and recommended rims and tires for summer and winter operation They can also offer advice concerning tire service and purchase Warning VAN Replace rims or tires with the same designa tion manufacturer and type as shown on the original part Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for further informa tion If incorrectly sized rims and tires are mounted e The wheel brakes or suspension components can be damaged e The operating clearance of the
255. ion Tires and wheels in Potential problems associated with underinflated and overinflated tires each tire appear in the display or the following message appears in the dis play Tire pressure di spl ayed after dri ving for a few m nut es Press the reset button gt page 114 The following message will appear in the multifunction display Restart tire pressure noni tor The following message will appear in the multifunction display Ti re Pressure Mbni tor Restart ed After driving a few minutes the system verifies that the current tire inflation pressures are within the system s specified range Afterwards the current tire inflation pressures are accepted as reference pressures and then moni tored If you wish to cancel activation gt Press the E button Underinflated tires Underinflated tires can cause excessive and uneven tire wear adversely affect fuel economy lead to tire failure from being overheated adversely affect handling characteristics A Warning Follow recommended tire inflation pressures Do not underinflate tires Underinflated tires wear excessively and or unevenly adversely affect handling and fuel economy and are more likely to fail from being overheated 275 Operation re Tires and wheels Overinflated tires Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling characteristics cause uneven tire wear be more prone to damage from road hazards
256. ith suitable soft top cleaner and a soft brush Always brush from the front to the rear along the grain of the fabric 301 Where will f Unlocking in Replacing Sma Replacing bi keL T DST Practical hints pe What to do if Lamps in instrument cluster Problem 304 The yellow ABS ESP warn ing lamp comes on while the engine is running General information If any of the following lamps in the instru ment cluster fails to come on during the Possible cause consequence Risk of accident The ESP has been switched off When the ESP is switched off it will not stabilize the vehicle if the system recog nizes that the vehicle starts to skid or that a wheel is spinning Risk of accident The ESP is not operational due to a malfunction bulb self check when switching on the ignition have the respective bulb checked and replaced if necessary Suggested solutions gt y Switch the ESP back on gt page 87 Exceptions gt page 86 If leaving the ESP switched off adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather conditions If the ESP cannot be switched on gt gt Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Read and observe additional messages in the multifunction display gt page 319 Continue driving with added caution gt Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail ing road and weather co
257. its center level 150 Returning audio functions to factory settings H r ms a nl mpm i T P82 60 4085 31 gt Regardless of operating mode press and hold aup key longer than 2 seconds reset will appear in the display All settings for bass treble and balance are returned to the center level and the volume is set to a predefined level Audio system sound selection EXT gt Regardless of operating mode press the aupkey You see the sound settings menu on the display gt Press the ext key P82 60 4065 31 gt Press one of the function keys You can select from among the following settings e rv The tone level is set to the Driver position sound is directed toward the passengers e sp The tone level is set for Speech optimizing the sound for the spoken word e ane The tone level is set for Ambience producing a three dimensional sound e F The audio system sound selection is turned off Telephone muting The radio will switch to telephone mode when a call is incoming The current audio source is muted Radio operation Selecting radio mode gt Press button gt You can now receive radio stations over the analog FM AM or WB station frequencies Analog station frequencies Selecting the band You can select from among FM AM or WB frequency bands Weather band gt page 154 g FM frequency band FM 87 7 107 9 MHz AM frequency
258. iver s door B pillar Overloading the tires can overheat them possibly causing a blowout Center as soon as possible to obtain a new TIREFIT kit Bring used TIREFIT materials to an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for proper disposal Warning A N Do not exceed vehicle speed of 50 mph 80 km h A TIREFIT repair is not designed to operate at higher speeds The sticker must be attached on the instru ment cluster where it will be easily seen by the driver Vehicle handling characteristics may change Adapt your driving accordingly gt Replace your TIREFIT container every 4 years Replacement containers are available at your authorized Mercedes Benz Center 369 Practical hints Ei Batteries Your vehicle is equipped with two batter ies e The starter battery located in the trunk e The battery for electrical consumers located in the trunk 370 Warning Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injury or death Never lean over batteries while connecting you might get injured Observe all safety instructions and precau tions when handling automotive batteries gt page 256 Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes skin or clothing In case it does immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary A battery will also produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep flames or s
259. iving speeds You should wait until the tires are cold before adjusting the tire inflation pressure some vehicles may have supplemental tire inflation pressure information for vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded vehi cle condition If such information is provid ed it can be found on the tire inflation pressure label located on the inside of the fuel filler flap 269 Operation re Tires and wheels Tire inflation pressure changes by approxi mately 1 5 psi 0 1 bar per 18 F 10 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire inflation pressure where the temperature is different from the outside temperature 270 Checking tire inflation pressure Regularly check your tire inflation pressure at least once a month Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold The tires can be considered cold if the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km If you check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are warm the vehicle has been driven for several miles or sitting less than 3 hours the reading will be approximately 4 psi 0 3 bar higher than the cold reading This is normal Do not let air out to match the specified cold tire in flation pressure Otherwise the tire will be underinflated A Follow recommend tire inflation pressures Warning Do not underinflate tires Underinflated tires wear excessively and or unevenly
260. king on the vehicle set the A parking brake and move gear selector lever to position P Otherwise the vehicle could roll away 173 Controls in detail a Automatic transmission Gear ranges With the gear selector lever in drive position D and driving in shift program C or S you can select a gear range for the automatic transmission to operate within Gear selector lever gt page 175 You can limit the gear range by pressing the gear selector lever to the left D and reverse the gear range limit by pressing the gear selector lever to the right D Steering wheel gearshift paddles gt page 177 You can limit the gear range by pulling the left gearshift paddle and reverse the gear range limit by pulling the right gearshift paddle 174 The selected gear range appears in the right multifunction display gt page 117 Ge If when driving in shift program C and S the maximum engine speed for the gear range has been reached the transmission shifts up auto matically even if the gear range is restricted In shift program MAN the transmission will not shift up automatically Effect WE The transmission shifts through fourth gear only MEW The transmission shifts through third gear only With this selection you can use the braking effect of the engine Effect BE The transmission shifts through second gear only Allows the use of engine s braking power when driving e on steep downgr
261. l pump Please contact gas station personnel in case labels on the pump cannot be found gt Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle unit cuts out do not top off or overfill 247 b gt Operation ed At the gas station b gt For more information on gasoline see Pre Check regularly and before a long trip Warning A mium unleaded gasoline gt page 396 see Fu CO 5555JISJSJJJWYY Cl requirements gt page 397 or contact an Overfilling of the fuel tank may create authorized Mercedes Benz Center or visit pressure in the system which could cause a www mbusa com USA only gas discharge This could cause the gas to Leaving the engine running and the fuel filler cap spray back out when removing the fuel open can cause the malfunction indicator pump nozzle which could cause personal lamp USA only or the RE malfunction indica injury tor lamp Canada only to illuminate For more information see Practical hints gt Replace fuel filler cap by turning it gt page 309 clockwise until it audibly engages Make sure to close the fuel filler flap before locking your vehicle as the flap locking pin pre vents closing after you have locked the vehicle gt Close the fuel filler flap until you hear the latch close shut 1 Coolant 2 Engine oil 3 Brake fluid i Opening the hood see page 250 248 Coolant For normal replenishing use water pota ble water quality
262. lacement of the filter before its scheduled interval A clogged filter will reduce the air volume to the interior If the vehicle interior is hot ventilate the interior before driving off The automatic climate control will then adjust the interior temperature to the set value much faster Keep the air intake grille in front of the wind Shield free of snow and debris 187 Controls in detail a Automatic climate control Deactivating the automatic climate control system A When the automatic climate control system is switched off the outside air supply and circulation are also switched off Only choose this setting for a short time Other wise the windows could fog up impairing visibility and endangering you and or others Warning Deactivating It is possible to completely deactivate the automatic climate control system gt Press button W gt page 186 The indicator lamp on the button comes on 188 Under certain circumstances e g when the fuel system is too hot and needs to be cooled the cooling switches on again automatically The red lamp on the button the automatic climate control panel flashes After cooling the fuel system sufficiently the air conditioning switches off again and the red lamp stops flashing Reactivating gt Press button W gt page 186 The indicator lamp on the button goes out or gt Turn one of the temperature controls on the automatic climate control
263. lamps e Side lamps e Tail lamps 361 Practical hints Replacing bulbs Front lamps Rear lamps Lamp Type Lamp Type Additional turn signal LEDs Brake parking lamp LEDs 2 Turn signal PY 21W 9 Turn signal lamp LEDs 3 Side marker lamp WY 5 W Side marker lamp P21W Parking lamp W5W QD High mounted brake LEDs Low andhigh beam D2S 35 W lamp lamp 2 License plate lamp C5W High beam flasher H7 55 W 3 Rear fog lamp P21W Front fog lamp H3 55 W Backup lamp P21W 5 Reflector P82 10 4715 31 362 Y Replacing wiper blades Removing wiper blades Warning A N For safety reasons remove SmartKey from starter switch before replacing a wiper blade Otherwise the motor could suddenly turn on and cause injury Warning A N Wiper blades are components that are sub ject to wear and tear Change the wiper blades twice a year preferably in the spring and fall Otherwise the windows will not be properly wiped As a result you may not be able to observe surrounding traffic condi tions and could cause an accident T The hood must be opened gt page 250 before folding the wiper arms away from the windshield You could otherwise damage the hood and or the wiper arm gt Remove the SmartKey from starter switch T Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts They could tear gt Fold the wiper arm forward You must feel the wiper arm engage in position gt
264. lay Ac Right display Dri ver Fasten Seat Belt Passenger Fasten Seat Belt EE Possible cause consequence You have forgotten to fasten your seat belt Your passenger has forgotten to fasten seat belt You are driving with the hood open You are attempting to drive with one or more doors open This message will appear whenever the trunk lid is open You are driving with the hood and the trunk lid open Practical hints What to do if fa Possible solution gt Fasten your seat belt gt Fasten your seat belt gt Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so gt Close the hood gt page 250 Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident gt Close the doors gt Close the trunk lid gt page 103 vy Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so Close the hood gt page 250 and the trunk lid gt page 103 Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident 353 Practical hints pe What to do if Left display a 354 Right display Tele Aid noper ati ve Top Up VASher FI ui d Top Qper ati on Qnl y At Standstill Top Lowering Top Cperati on Pl ease Vit See Oper Manual Possible cause conse quence One or more main functions of the Tele Aid system are malfunctioning The washer fluid level has dropped to about of total reservoir capacity You have trie
265. le the nearest Mercedes Benz Center or Mercedes Benz USA products and services is available to you For more details concerning the Tele Aid system please visit www mbusa com and use your ID and password sent to you separately to learn more USA only Controls in detail Useful features a i If the indicator lamp in the Information button is flashing continuously and no voice connection to the Response Center was established then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an Information call e g the relevant cellular phone network is not available The message Cal Failed appears in the multifunction display Information calls can be terminated using the button on the multifunction steering wheel 219 Controls in detail ia Useful features Call priority If other service calls such as a Roadside Assistance call or Information call are active an Emergency call is still possible In this case the Emergency call will take priority and override all other active calls The indicator lamp in the respective button flashes until the call is concluded Emer gency calls can only be terminated by a Re sponse Center or Customer Assistance Center representative whereas Roadside Assistance and Information calls can also be terminated by pressing button on the multifunction steering wheel cp When a Tele Aid call has been initiated the audio system is muted and the selected mode radio or CD pauses The mobile phone i
266. lic brake Failure to deactivate the system prior to information given in the Maintenance Booklet system must be deactivated prior to working maintenance will cause brake pistons to e an AUMONZEA MErGERESAENZ on the system High pressure is intermit extend and brake fluid to leak which may a tently built up in the system as part of its result in injuries contusions and acid automatic self test In addition the system burns see Electro hydraulic brake sys is automatically activated when the vehicle tem gt page 87 339 Practical hints pe What to do if Left display Right display Possible cause consequence Top Up The coolant level is too low gt Cool ant See Qper Manual gt The cooling fan for the coolant gt is malfunctioning gt gt Warning A N Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts You could be seriously burned 340 Possible solution Add coolant gt page 255 Comply with all warnings while doing so If you have to add coolant frequently have the cooling system checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center immediately Observe the coolant temperature gauge in the instru ment cluster gt page 29 If the coolant temperature is below 248 F 120 C you may continue driving to the nearest specialist workshop Avoid placing heavy loads on the engine e g by drivi
267. lied with two SmartKeys each with remote control and a removable mechanical key The SmartKey provides an extended oper ating range To prevent theft however it is advisable to only unlock the vehicle when you are in close proximity to it The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks e the doors e the trunk e the fuel filler flap e the storage compartment between the backrests e the storage compartment under the armrest P80 35 2197 31 SmartKey with remote control Lock button Unlock button for trunk 3 Mechanical key locking tab 4 Unlock button Battery check lamp 6 Panic button T To prevent possible malfunction avoid exposing the SmartKey to high levels of electromagnetic radiation When you unlock the vehicle the electro hydraulic brake system is activated A When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle It is possible for children to open a locked door from the inside which could result in an accident and or serious personal injury Warning USA only This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interfer ence and 2 this device must accept any interference re ceived including interference that may cause u
268. ll be muted and high speed tuning will take place until the button is released Automatic seek tuning gt Select the desired frequency band zi as Ta C h RIIS mane Samm H i ae ae oa it al i j OM WE uD as PEZ 60 4757 31 gt Press either the EXE or EG button The radio will tune to the next higher or next lower receivable frequency Scan tuning e Starting scan tuning gt Select desired frequency band P82 60 4754 31 gt Press button sc will appear in the display The ra dio briefly tunes in all receivable stations on the band selected The first scan cycle will tune in only the stations with a strong signal The second scan cycle will tune in every receivable station e Ending scan tuning gt Press button or ENI Rg BSB or BEG button sc disappears from the display Manual station memory Presets You can store ten AM and ten FM stations e Storing stations gt Tune in the desired station gt Press and hold desired station button I to BE until a brief signal tone is heard The frequency is stored on the selected station button The frequency band and station button number are shown in the up per left hand corner of the display e Retrieving a station from memory gt Press desired station button MEE to EE Controls in detail Audio system a Automatic station memory Autostore The Autostore memory function provides an additional memory lev
269. lly after an ac cident if the force of the impact exceeds a preset threshold The vehicle locks automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph 15 km h or more You could therefore lock yourself out when the vehi cle is pushed or is on a test stand You can deactivate the automatic locking using the control system gt page 139 Locking and unlocking from the inside You can lock or unlock the vehicle from in side using the central locking switches This can be useful for example if you want to unlock the passenger door from the in side or want to lock the vehicle before starting to drive The central locking switch does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap and the storage compartments You can open a locked door from the in side Open door only when conditions are safe to do so A When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle A child s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and or serious personal injury Warning The switches are located on the upper part of the center console Central locking switches 1 Locking 2 Unlocking Controls in detail Locking and unlocking i Locking gt Press central locking switch Q If all the doors are clos
270. lly lowered into its storage compartment If the soft top does not open or close com pletely the soft top hydraulic system is de pressurized and the soft top is lowered e after approximately seven minutes when the ignition is switched on e after approximately 15 seconds when the ignition is switched off Shortly before the soft top is lowered a warning will sound and the symbol and the message Top Lowering appear in the multifunction display Lock the soft top again before driving any further Otherwise the unlocked soft top could open while the vehicle is in motion and cause you to lose control of the vehicle You or others could be injured as a result A When opening or closing the soft top make sure that nobody is trapped or injured by the moving parts such as the soft top linkage Warning If potential danger exists release the soft top switch The soft top folding mechanism stops immediately A When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle A child s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and or serious personal injury Warning T The opened soft top is stored behind the roll over bars Never sit on the stored soft top and never store objects on it You will otherwise damage the soft top Never use the space that emer
271. lock iss Engine oiltemperature 311 indicator 7 Fuel gauge with WW Fuel reserve warning 311 lamp 29 At a glance Multifunction steering wheel 30 P46 10 2898 31 Item Q Left multifunction display in the speedometer Right multifunction display in the tachometer Operating control system 3 Selecting the submenu or set ting the volume Press button up to increase E down to decrease 4 Telephone Press button to take a call to dial to redial to end a call to reject an incoming call Page 117 117 118 118 Item Menu systems Press button for next menu for previous menu Moving within a menu Press button Ka for next display B for previous display Page 118 118 Vv Center console Upper part Item Central locking switch 2 Hazard warning flasher on off switch 3 Central unlocking switch 4 Air temperature controls for center and side air vents Air volume controls for center and side air vents 6 Selects the shift program mode Page 105 111 105 190 191 75 At a glance Center console Item Page 7 Selects the Airbrake mode 90 Selects the manual shift 179 program mode 9 Audio system 120 145 Automatic climate control 184 QD Engine start button 48 31 At a glance Center console Lower part 32 Item Exterior rear view mirror adjustment 2 Remote trunk opening switc
272. lt in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire You can be seriously burned h the brake warning lamp illumi result in an accident Have your brake system checked immediately if the brake warning lamp stays on Do not add T If you find that the brake fluid in the brake brake fluid system before checking the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks 307 Practical hints pe What to do if Problem Possible cause consequence Suggested solutions USA only There is a malfunction in gt Have the vehicle checked as soon as possi ay Canada only e The fuel injection system ble by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center An on board diagnostic connector is used by The yellow engine malfunc The ignition system the service station to link the vehicle to the eee The emission control system shop diagnostics system It allows the accu while the engine is running Ea rate identification of system malfunctions e Systems which effect emissions through the readout of diagnostic trouble Such malfunctions may result in excessive codes It is located in the front left area of emissions values and may switch the the footwell next to the parking brake pedal engine to Its limp home emergency operation mode Gp Some states may by law require you to visit a workshop as soon as the engine malfunction indicator lamp comes
273. lways set the parking brake in addition to shifting automatic transmission to park position P When parked on an incline turn front wheels towards the road curb gt Turnthe SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 and remove the SmartKey from the starter switch The immobilizer is activated gt The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter switch with the gear selector lever in park position P Releasing seat belts gt Press the seat belt release button gt page 46 Allow the retractor to completely rewind the seat belt by guiding the latch plate i Make sure the seat belt retracts fully so that the seat belt and or latch plate cannot get caught or pinched in the door or in the seat mechanism This can damage the seat belt and impair the effectiveness of the seat belt and or cause damage to the door and or door trim panel Such damage is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Damaged seat belts must be replaced Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Locking Warning A N To prevent possible personal injury always keep hands and fingers away from the door openings when closing the doors Be espe cially careful when small children are around Before closing doors make sure there is no possibility of someone getting caught in a door during closing Warning A N When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the ve
274. ly deletes these messag es when the cause for the messages has been rectified Settings menu In the setti ngs Menu there are two functions e The function To reset press reset but ton for 3 seconds with which you can reset most the settings to those set at the factory e A collection of submenus with which you can make individual settings for your vehicle The following settings and submenus are available Function Page Resetting to factory settings 129 Submenus in the Settings menu 130 Instrument cluster submenu 132 Time submenu 133 Lighting submenu 134 Vehicle submenu 138 Resetting to factory settings You can reset the functions of most of the submenus to the factory settings For safety the Li ght Grcuit Head anp Mode Submenu in the Li ghti ng Menu can be reset with the vehicle at standstill only gt Press button or repeatedly until you see the setti ngs Menu in the multifunction display ee E gzon _ PEP To reset press i Settings reset button For 3 seconds Bia p nn i Pod 32 1904 8 31 gt Press the reset button in the instru ment cluster gt page 114 for approxi mately 3 seconds In the right multifunction display you will see the request to press the reset button again to confirm Controls in detail Control system ia gt Press the reset button again The functions of most the submenus will reset to factory settings a The settings you have changed will not
275. ly voltage gt Press button or repeatedly until you see the 722S menu Press button J repeatedly until you see the vehicle supply voltage 1 Vehicle supply voltage 2 Gear indicator poma Bav 2 1 p me P54 32 3900 3 123 Controls in detail a Control system RACETIMER A The RACETIMER feature is only for use on roads and in conditions where high speed driving is permitted Racing on public roads is prohibited under all circumstances and the driver is and must always remain responsible for following posted speed limits Warning The RACETIMER allows you to time and save driving stretches in hours minutes and seconds gt Press button or repeatedly until you see the 722S menu Press button J repeatedly until you see the RACETIMER 124 ET aien a one A 2 D _ p gt a P54 32 3901 3 1 Lap 2 RACETIMER 3 Gear indicator i You can start the RACETIMER when the engine is running or the starter switch is in position 2 gt page 40 While the RACETIMER is being displayed you cannot adjust the volume using buttons or E Starting the RACETIMER gt Press button ES The timer starts Displaying intermediate time gt Press button EE while the timer is running The intermediate time is shown for 5 seconds Stopping the RACETIMER gt Press button ES The timer stops When you stop the vehicle and turn the SmartKey to position 1 gt page
276. many notches as possible and move the gear se lector lever to park position P before loos ening the wheel bolts Otherwise the vehicle may move and cause an accident and or serious personal injury Warning BE Do not use air tools such as an impact wrench when installing or removing the anti theft wheel nuts An impact wrench can damage the anti theft wheel nuts and the wheel nut key or cause them to malfunction i Store wheel bolts and anti theft wheel nuts not currently in use in a safe place to avoid damage to the threads A l P40 10 3244 31 1 Anti theft wheel nut 2 Wheel nut key Removing anti theft wheel nuts gt Unscrew anti theft wheel nut Q using wheel nut key 2 Replace anti theft wheel nut with one of the regular wheel bolts gt Fasten the wheel bolt and tighten it with a torque wrench to a tightening torque of 95 Ib ft 130 Nm Warning A N The wheels could come loose if the wheel bolts are not tightened to a torque of 95 lb ft 130 Nm Have the tightening torque checked after changing a wheel Fitting anti theft wheel nuts gt Unscrew a wheel bolt from one of the wheels gt Replace that wheel bolt with one of the anti theft wheel nuts 1 delivered with your vehicle gt Fasten anti theft wheel nut Q using wheel nut key 2 and tighten with a torque wrench to a tightening torque of 95 lb ft 130 Nm Warning A N The wheels could come loose if the whe
277. marker is on the minute setting 2 _ Set Time ah ian Mirusteds CP Wmm p a p pa h P54 32 4953 31 Press button or E to set the minutes 134 Setting time hours gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Ti ne submenu gt Press button EAN or ed repeatedly until you see this message in the left multifunction display set Ti ne Hour The selection marker is on the hour setting SE_ pe Set m N at Hour y Ey 01 p T w i T P54 32 4952 31 gt Press button or E to set the hour Lighting submenu Access the Li ghti ng Submenu via the Settings Menu Use the Li ght i ng sub menu to change the lamp and lighting settings on your vehicle The following functions are available Function Page Setting daytime running lamp 135 mode USA only Setting locator lighting 135 Setting night security illumina 136 tion Headlamps delayed switch off Setting interior lighting delayed 137 switch off Setting daytime running lamp mode USA only This function is not available in countries where the daytime running lamp mode is manda tory and therefore in a constant mode gt Move the selection marker with button or E to the Li ghti ng sub menu gt Press button JM or eg repeatedly until you see this message in the left multifunction display Li ght Grcuit Headl anp Mbde The selection marker is on the current setting Lig
278. mber of occupants that can be in the vehicle The Tire and Loading Information placard showing the seating capacity is located on the driver s door B pillar gt page 263 Data shown on Tire and Loading Information placard example are for illustration purposes only Seating data are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustrations below Refer to Tire and Loading Information placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle P40 00 2063 31 1 Seating capacity on the Tire and Loading Information placard Steps for determining correct load limit The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49 Code of U S Federal Regulations Part 575 pursuant to the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966 Step 1 gt Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on your vehicle s Tire and Loading Infor mation placard Step 2 gt Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle Step 3 gt Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX Ibs Step 4 gt The resulting figure equals the avail able amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ibs passengers in your vehicle the amount of available carg
279. mbined weight of all occupants 175 Ibs 370 Ibs Available cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight total load limit from Tire and Loading Information placard minus combined weight of all occupants 1500 Ibs 175 Ibs 1325 Ibs 1500 Ibs 370 Ibs 1130 Ibs Certification label Even after careful determination of the combined weight of all occupants cargo and the trailer tongue load if applicable gt page 267 as to not exceed the permis sible load limit you must make sure that your vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehi cle Weight Rating GVWR and the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for either the front or rear axle You can obtain the GVWR and GAWR from the certification la bel The certification label can be found on the driver s door A pillar see Technical data gt page 382 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The total weight of the vehicle all occupants all cargo and the trailer tongue load gt page 267 must never exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The to tal allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle front or rear To assure that your vehicle does not ex ceed the maximum permissible weight limits GVWR and GAWR for front and rear axle have the loaded vehicle including driver passengers and all cargo and if ap plicable trailer fully loaded weighed on a suitable commercial scale Operation Tires and wheels nn Trailer tongue load The tongue loa
280. miles 15000 km in that time The maintenance service indicator will notify you when the next maintenance ser vice is due within the next 12 months or 10000 miles 15000 km whichever comes sooner T Failure to have the vehicle maintained in ac cordance with the Maintenance Booklet and maintenance service indicator at the designated times mileage will result in vehicle damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty 294 T Excessive load on the brake system causes increased wear of brake pads and brake disks If the brake pads have to be replaced multiple times within one maintenance service interval the brake disks must be checked Observe the information given in the Maintenance Booklet and contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Before the next maintenance service is due one of the following messages will ap pear in the right multifunction display while you are driving or when you switch on the ignition Service In Days Service In Mles When the maintenance service is due the following message appears in the multi function display Servi ce Due Now Clearing the maintenance service indicator message Sa The maintenance service indicator mes sage is automatically cleared after 30 sec onds when you switch on the ignition You can also clear it yourself 1 Reset button gt Press reset button Q The maintenance service indicator message is cleared and the standard display
281. mirrors A Warning Exercise care when using the passen ger side exterior rear view mirror The mirror surface is convex outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view Objects in mirror are closer than they appear Check your in terior rear view mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes 44 The buttons are located on the lower part of the center console 1 Driver s side exterior rear view mirror button 2 Passenger side exterior rear view mirror button 3 Adjustment button Switch on the ignition gt page 40 Press button for the driver s side exterior rear view mirror or button 2 for passenger side exterior rear view mirror gt Push adjustment button up down left or right according to the desired setting At low ambient temperatures the exterior rear view mirrors will be heated automatically For more information see Rear view mir rors gt page 181 Getting started Driving R Y Driving Bas teniie IE Saf DES In the same crash the possibility of injury or Warning A N Make sure that absolutely no objects are ob structing the pedals range of movement Keep the drivers footwell clear of all obsta cles If there are any floormats or carpets in the footwell make sure the pedals still have sufficient clearance During sudden driving or braking maneu vers the objects could get caught between the pedals You could then no longer brake o
282. mote control contactan authorized Mercedes Benz Center or call Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance Center in the USA at 1 800 FOR MERCedes or Customer Service in Canada at 1 800 387 0100 USA only This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interfer ence and 2 this device must accept any interference re ceived including interference that may cause undesired operation Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Canada only This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference re ceived including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Floormat driver s side Warning J When you are using floormats make sure there is enough clearance and that the floormats are securely fastened Floormats must always be securely fastened using eyelets Q and retainer pins 2 Before driving off check that the floormats are securely in place and adjust them if necessary A loose floormat could slip and hinder proper functioning of the pedals Do not place several floorma
283. n gt page 186 The control button is engaged The M0 symbol on the control button comes on Deactivating gt Press control button gt page 186 once more The control button sticks up slightly The Egy symbol on the control button goes out Adjust the air volume manually gt page 191 Controls in detail Automatic climate control ia Setting the temperature Use temperature controls 6 and G to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment You should raise or lower the temperature setting in small increments preferably starting at 72 F 22 C The automatic climate control will adjust to the set temperature as fast as possible Increasing gt Turn temperature control and or gt page 186 slightly clockwise The automatic climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature 189 Controls in detail a Automatic climate control Decreasing gt Turn temperature control and or gt page 186 slightly counterclockwise The automatic climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature Adjusting the temperature for the center and side air vents When outside temperatures are low you can manually raise the air temperature for the center and side air vents The controls 3 are located between the center air vents gt page 185 Turning on warm air gt Press the lef
284. n authorized Mercedes Benz Center 244 Control and operation of radio transmitters Radio and telephone Warning Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle safely Only operate the radio or telephone if road weather and traffic conditions permit Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet approximately 14 m every second Observe all legal requirements Telephones and two way radios Warning A N Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built in or attached antenna i e with out being connected to an external antenna from inside the vehicle while the engine is running Doing so could lead to a malfunc tion of the vehicle s electronic system possibly resulting in an accident and personal injury Radio transmitters such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit should only be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on the outside of the vehicle Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use of an external antenna Catalytic converter Your Mercedes Benz is equipped with monolithic type catalytic converters an important element in conjunction with the oxygen sensors to achieve substantial control of the pollutants in the exhaust emissions Keep your vehicle in proper operating condition by following our recommended ma
285. n display in red color Some low priority messages go out after a few seconds Certain messages of high priority cannot be cleared from the multifunction display using the reset button gt page 29 or button MAN Red m z or on the multifunction steering wheel Other messages of high priority and messages of less immediate priority can be cleared from the multifunction display using the reset button or button EN ed mz or on the multifunction steering wheel They are then stored in the vehicle status message memory gt page 128 Remember that clearing a message will only make the message disappear Clearing a message will not correct the condition that caused the message to appear Practical hints What to do if Se Warning A N All categories of messages contain important information which should be taken note of and where a malfunction is indicated addressed as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Failure to repair condition noted may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty or result in property damage or personal injury 319 Practical hints py What to do if Warning A N No messages will be displayed if either the instrument cluster or the multifunction display is inoperative As a result you will not be able to see infor mation about your driving conditions such as speed or outside temperature warn ing indicator lamps malfunction w
286. n the control system displays The first function displayed in each menu will Controls in detail Control system ia Menu 6 Trip computer Menu 7 Telephone gt page 139 gt page 141 Fuel consumption Loading Statistics since start phone book Searching for name in phone book Fuel consumption statistics since the last reset Resetting fuel con sumption statistics Distance to empty automatically show you which part of the system you are in 121 Controls in detail a Control system Standard display menu The left multifunction display shows the outside temperature and main odometer while the trip odometer and the clock ap pears in the right multifunction display This is the standard display Standard display 1 Main odometer 2 Outside temperature or speed 3 Current gear selector lever position gear range 4 Trip odometer Automatic transmission shift program mode 6 Clock gt Press button or repeatedly until you see the standard display in the multifunction display Calling up digital speedometer or out side temperature a Ifyou have selected the digital speedometer for the standard display gt page 132 select the outside temperature display here gt Press button Reg or until you see the digital soeedometer or de pending on the chosen setting the out side temperature in the right multifunction display You can modify the standard display menu
287. nce Start Engi ne Warning VAN Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide CO and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and possible death Do not run the engine in confined areas such as a garage which are not properly ventilated Possible cause consequence The battery has insufficient voltage and cannot supply sufficient power to the electro hydraulic brake system Considerably greater brake pedal force is required and the pedal travel is longer The stopping distance is increased Practical hints What to do if ae Possible solution gt Start the engine As soon as the engine is running the message disappears 337 Practical hints pe What to do if Left display Right display USA only Brakes Over heat ed Canada only even greater care Warning A N Overheating of the brake system will short en the service life of the brake disks The brake disks could fail Have the brake disks checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center 338 Possible cause consequence The brake system is overheated Drive on but wth due to an excessive load on the 5 brakes Possible solution vy Relieve the load on the brake system Drive more smoothly and think ahead to avoid unnecessary braking gt Use the engine s braking power more frequent ly Shift into a lower gear gt page 174 gt Cautiously continue driv
288. nd held remote con trols used to operate devices such as garage door openers gate openers or other devices compatible with HomeLink or some other systems Before the integrated remote control can be used it must be programmed to the ga rage door opener gate operator or other device you wish to operate See the follow ing instructions for programming information 221 Controls in detail a Useful features Interior rear view mirror with integrated re mote control O Signal transmitter button Indicator lamp Needed for programming not part of vehicle equipment 222 Hand held remote control of ga rage door opener gate operator or other device Hand held remote control button Warning A N Before programming the integrated remote control to a garage door opener or gate operator make sure people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent po tential harm or damage When programming a garage door opener the door moves up or down When programming a gate operator the gate opens or closes Do not use the integrated remote control with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U S federal safety standards this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1 1982 A garage door that cannot detect an object signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U S federal safety standards When pr
289. nd the gear range With the MAN shift program activated you can use the gear selector lever to manually shift the gears i For information on using the gear selector lever in shift program MAN see Manual shift program page 178 T Allow engine to warm up under low load use Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only when the vehicle is stopped Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period when driving off on slippery road surfaces This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty The following instructions describe opera tion of the gear selector lever when driving in the shift program C or S 175 Controls in detail a Automatic transmission Limiting gear range Warning A N On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control Your vehicle s ABS will not gt prevent this type of loss of control Briefly press the gear selector lever to the left in the D direction The transmission will shift to the next lower gear as permitted by the shift program This action simultaneously limits the gear range of the trans mission gt page 174 i To avoid overrevving the engine when down Shifting the transmission will not shift to a lower g
290. ndesired operation Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment i Canada only This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference re ceived including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment T If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey then the batteries in the Smart Key are discharged the SmartKey is malfunc tioning or the vehicle battery is drained e Check the batteries in the SmartKey gt page 100 and replace them if necessary gt page 359 e Use the mechanical key to unlock the vehicle gt page 357 e Have the vehicle battery and the battery con nections checked Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center If the SmartKey is malfunctioning contact Road side Assistance or an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Controls in detail Locking and unlocking i Factory setting Global unlocking gt Press button Igy All turn signal lamps flash once The anti theft alarm system is disarmed The vehicle will lock again automatically and rearm the anti theft alarm system within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking if neither door nor trunk is ope
291. nditions Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Practical hints What to do if a Problem Possible cause consequence Suggested solutions The yellow ABS ESP warn Risk of accident gt When driving off apply as little throttle as me lemo eanes wile The ESP ABS or traction control has esa ele aani come into operation because of detected traction loss in at least one tire vy While driving ease up on the accelerator gt Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail The cruise control is deactivated ing road and weather conditions gt Do not deactivate ESP Exceptions gt page 86 Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident 305 Practical hints pe What to do if Problem 306 The yellow ABS indicator lamp comes on while the engine is running Possible cause consequence Risk of accident The ABS has detected a malfunction and has switched off The BAS and the ESP are also switched off If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning other systems such as the automatic transmission may also be malfunctioning The electro hydraulic brake system is still functioning normally but without ABS available The charging voltage has fallen below 10 volts The ABS has switched off The battery may not be charged sufficiently Suggested solutions gt Continue driving with added caution Wheels may lock d
292. ned the SmartKey is not inserted in the starter switch the central locking switch is not activated 99 Controls in detail a Locking and unlocking Global locking gt Press button eg With the trunk and all doors closed all turn signal lamps flash three times The anti theft alarm system is armed Selective setting If you frequently travel alone you may wish to reprogram the SmartKey so that pressing only unlocks the driver s door interior storage compartments and the fuel filler flap gt Press and hold buttons and simultaneously for about 6 seconds un til battery check lamp flashes twice The SmartKey will then function as follows 100 Unlocking driver s door and fuel filler flap gt Press button once All turn signal lamps flash once The anti theft alarm system is disarmed Global unlocking gt Press button twice All turn signal lamps flash once The anti theft alarm system is disarmed Global locking gt Press button eg With the trunk and all doors closed all turn signal lamps flash three times The anti theft alarm system is armed Restoring to factory setting gt Press and hold buttons and simultaneously for about 6 seconds un til battery check lamp G gt page 98 flashes twice Unlocking and opening the trunk You can unlock the trunk separately A minimum height clearance of 5 9 ft 1 66 m is required to open the trunk lid gt Press and hold button u
293. nflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause excessive heat build up and possible tire failure 285 Operation fa Tires and wheels Tire ply material 1 Plies in sidewall 2 Plies under tread i For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration This marking tells you about the type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread 286 Tire and loading terminology Accessory weight The combined weight in excess of those standard items which may be replaced of automatic transmission power steering power brakes power windows power seats radio and heater to the extent that these items are available as factory installed equipment whether installed or not Air pressure The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascal kPa or bars Aspect ratio Dimensional relationship between tire section height and section width expressed in percentage Bar Another metric unit for air pressure There are 14 5038 pounds per square inch psi to 1 bar there are 100 kilopascals kPa to 1 bar Bead The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim Cold tire inflation pressure Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle
294. nforma tion on the installation of an approved external antenna Refer to the radio trans mitter operation instructions regarding use of an external antenna A Please do not forget that your primary re sponsibility is to drive the vehicle A driver s attention to the road must always be his her primary focus when driving For your safety and the safety of others we rec ommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a telephone call Warning If you choose to use the telephone while driving please use the hands free device and only use the telephone when road weather and traffic conditions permit Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a mobile telephone while driving a vehicle Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet approximately 14 m every second Observe all legal requirements You can take and place telephone calls using the and buttons on the steering wheel To carry out other tele phone functions use the control system gt page 141 See separate instruction manual for instructions on how to operate the telephone Qe For additional information on operating the telephone using the audio system head unit see Telephone operation gt page 162 For additional information on operating the tele phone using the multifunction steering wheel see TEL menu gt page 141
295. ng uphill as well as stop and go traffic Have the fan replaced as soon as possible T Do not ignore the low engine coolant level warning Extended driving with the message and symbol displayed may cause serious engine damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Do not drive without sufficient amount of coolant in the cooling system The engine will overheat causing major engine damage Practical hints What to do if ae Left display Right display Possible cause Possible solution consequence E Cool ant The coolant is too hot gt Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe oe Among other possible causes to Glo ee sw tch engine off the poly V belt could be gt Turn off the engine DOKEN gt Check the poly V belt If it is broken gt Do not continue to drive Otherwise the engine will over heat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center If it is intact gt Wait for the message to disappear before restarting the engine Doing otherwise could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited War ranty Continued on next page 341 Practical hints pe What to do if Left display Right display Possible cause Possible solution consequence gt Observe the coolant temperature gauge in the instrument cluster gt page 29 If the temperature rises ag
296. nger seat as far as pos sible rearward from the dashboard when the seat is occupied e Occupants especially children should never place their bodies or lean their heads in the area of the door where the head thorax air bag inflates This could result in serious injuries or death should the air bag be deployed Always sit as upright as possible properly use the seat belts and an appropriately sized in fant or toddler restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injuries to you or other occupants If you sell your vehicle it is important that you make the buyer aware of this safety information Be sure to give the buyer this Operator s Manual Warning A N There is a possibility of a head thorax air bag related injury if occupants especially chil dren are not properly seated or restrained when next to a head thorax air bag which needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in order to do its job To help avoid the possibility of injury please follow these guidelines 1 Occupants especially children should never place their bodies or lean their heads in the area of the door where the head thorax air bag inflates This could result in serious injuries or death should the head thorax air bag be deployed Safety and Security Occupant safety p 2 Always sit as upright as possible prop erly use the seat belts and for ch
297. ngine coolant is a mixture of water Diea e a illeioexcass n 4 l tif pressure If opened immediately scald The coolant level is correct if the level and anticorrosion antifreeze ing hot fluid and steam will be blown out d ni a e for cold coolant reaches the upper When checking coolant level under pressure pp mark on the bracing rib of the ex e Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine pansion tank arrow parts Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into e for warm coolant is approximately e the coolant temperature must be be contact with hot engine parts 0 4 in 1 cm higher low 158 F 70 C Warning A N In order to avoid potentially serious burns e the vehicle must be parked on level ground gt Add coolant as required gt Replace and tighten cap For more information see Coolants gt page 398 e Use extreme caution when opening the hood if there are any signs of steam or coolant leaking from the cooling system or if the coolant temperature gauge indi cates that the coolant is overheated e Do not remove pressure cap on coolant reservoir if coolant temperature is above 158 F 70 C Allow engine to gt Using a rag turn cap slowly approxi cool down before removing cap The mately one half turn to the left to coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and release any excess pressure is under pressure 1 Expansion tank 255 Operation fo Trunk Batteries
298. ns repeat the steps above starting with step 3 Gate operator Canadian programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for the integrated signal transmitter to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner If you live in Canada or if you are having difficulties programming a gate operator regardless of where you live by using the programming procedures replace step 4 with the following Step 4 gt Press and hold the signal transmitter button or Do not release this button until it has been success fully trained gt While still holding down the signal transmitter button or cycle your hand held remote control button 6 as follows Press and hold button 6 for 2 seconds then release it for 2 seconds and again press and hold it for 2 seconds Repeat this se quence on the hand held remote con trol until the frequency signal has been learned Upon successful training indi cator lamp Q will flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds gt Proceed with programming step 5 and step 6 to complete a Upon completion of programming the inte grated remote control make sure you retain the hand held remote control that came with the ga rage door opener gate opera
299. ntil the trunk lid unlocks and opens slightly Checking the batteries gt Press button or a Battery check lamp gt page 98 comes on briefly to indicate that the SmartKey batteries are in order If battery check lamp 8 does not come on briefly during check then the SmartKey batteries are discharged Replace the batteries gt page 359 You can obtain the required batteries at any authorized Mercedes Benz Center aD If the batteries are checked within signal range of the vehicle pressing button or will lock or unlock the vehicle accordingly Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key you should do the following gt Have the SmartKey deactivated by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center gt Report the loss of the SmartKey or the mechanical key immediately to your car insurance company gt If necessary have the trunk lock replaced Any authorized Mercedes Benz Center will be glad to supply you with a replacement Opening the doors i Ensure sufficient side and overhead clear ance prior to opening the doors see Main di mensions gt page 391 Opening from the outside For information on opening the doors from the outside see Getting started gt page 39 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking ai Opening from the inside You can open a locked door from the in side Open the door only if the vehicle is stationary and when con
300. o Observe the traffic situation around you Lock the soft top gt page 198 355 Practical hints DI Where will find 2 First aid kit The first aid kit is located on the right hand side in the trunk P4 20 5030 31 1 First aid kit 2 Retaining strap gt Open the retaining strap 2 gt Remove the first aid kit Check expiration dates and contents for completeness at least once a year and replace missing expired items 356 TIREFIT kit electric air pump towing BE Your vehicle is equipped with a front towing eye bolt and vehicle literature portfolio eye bolt only SS ee ee ee ee You cannot tow other vehicles with your vehicle The TIREFIT kit the electric air pump the vehicle literature portfolio and the towing eye bolt are located on the right hand side underneath the floor in the trunk 1 Vehicle literature portfolio 2 TIREFIT kit electrical air pump 3 Towing eye bolt Y Unlocking in an emergency Unlocking the vehicle Unlocking the trunk If you cannot unlock the trunk with the SmartKey open the trunk with the mechanical key Unlocking the trunk with the mechanical key will trigger the anti theft alarm system when the door is opened To cancel the alarm insert the SmartKey in the starter switch The handle is located above the rear license plate recess PBO 20 2642 31 1 Mechanical key locking tab 2 Mechanical key gt Press locking
301. o and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 1400 750 5x150 650 Ibs Step 5 gt Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4 Step 6 if applicable gt If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be trans ferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle gt page 267 Operation Tires and wheels nn The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load Capacities with varying seating configura tions and number and size of occupants The following examples use a load limit of 1500 Ibs This is for illustration purposes only Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on the vehicle s Tire and Loading Informa tion placard gt page 264 265 Operation re Tires and wheels Example Combined weight limit of occupants and cargo from Tire and Loading Infor mation placard 1 1500 Ibs 2 1500 Ibs Number of Occupants weight occupants driver and passengers 1 Occupant 1 175 Ibs 2 Occupant 1 175 Ibs Occupant 2 195 Ibs The higher the weight of all occupants the less cargo and luggage load capacity is available For more information see Trailer tongue load gt page 267 266 Co
302. o hydraulic brake system enters its emergency operation mode the driver must apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and depress the pedal much fur ther than normal to obtain braking effect 336 brake pedal force is gt Do not drive any further required and the pedal y Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by blocking the travel is longer The stop ping distance Is in creased If necessary apply full pressure to the or brake pedal If necessary apply full pressure to the brake pedal Brakes are only applied to the front wheels Stopping distance is increased If there is a malfunction in the electro hydraulic brake system we recom mend that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the ground using flatbed or ap propriate wheel lift dolly equipment wheels with wheel chocks or other sizeable objects gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center gt Call for Roadside Assistance A tow bar must be used if circumstances do not permit the use of the recommended towing methods and the vehicle requires towing with all four wheels on the ground Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is only permissible for distances up to 30 miles 50 km and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph 50 km h For more infor mation see Towing the vehicle gt page 373 Left display Right display USA only Reduced O Canada only Brake Effect Start Engi ne I ncr eased St oppi ng Di sta
303. o when driving or when traffic and or ambient lighting conditions require you to do So In low ambient lighting conditions only switch from position R to with the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location Switching from Mg to will briefly switch off the headlamps Doing so while driving in low ambient lighting conditions may result in an accident The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid to the driver The driver is responsible for the operation of the vehicle s lights at all times gt Controls in detail Lighting a Turn the exterior lamp switch to position Eig With the SmartKey in starter switch position 1 the tail and parking lamps the license plate lamps and the side marker lamps will switch on and off depending on the brightness of the ambient light When the engine is running the low beam headlamps the tail and park ing lamps the license plate lamps and the side marker lamps will switch on and off depending on the brightness of the ambient light Canada only High beam headlamps are only available with the exterior lamp switch in position Boy 107 Controls in detail ia Lighting Daytime running lamp mode In Canada the daytime running lamp mode is mandatory and therefore in a constant mode In the USA the daytime running lamp mode is deactivated by default Activate the day time running lamp mode using the control system see Setting daytime running lamp mode USA only
304. oad rating i For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration The maximum tire load is the maximum weight the tires are designed to support Operation Tires and wheels nn Maximum tire inflation pressure Always follow the recommended tire inflation pressure gt page 268 for proper tire inflation Warning A N Never exceed the max tire inflation pressure Follow recommended tire inflation pressures Warning A N Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit or vehicle capacity weight as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard located on the drivers door B pillar Overloading the tires can over heat them possibly causing a blowout Overloading the tires can also result in han dling or steering problems or brake failure E ES aot F Do not underinflate tires Underinflated tires wear excessively and or unevenly For more information on tire load rating Q Maximum permissible tire inflation adversely affect handling and fuel economy pressure and are more likely to fail from bein gt page 278 y 8 overheated For illustration purposes only Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary Do not overinflate tires Overinflated tires from data shown in above illustration can adversely affect handling and ride For information on calculating total and cargo load capa
305. of repair of the same or different sub stantial defects or malfunctions for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days Written notification should not be sent to a dealer it should be addressed to Mercedes Benz USA LLC Customer Assistance Center Attn SLR Liaison Three Paragon Drive Montvale NJ 07645 0350 15 Introduction Operator s Manual Maintenance The Maintenance Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be performed at regular intervals Always have the Maintenance Booklet with you when you take the vehicle to an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center for service The service advisor will record each ser vice in the booklet for you 16 Roadside Assistance The Mercedes Benz Roadside Assistance Program provides factory trained technical help in the event of a breakdown Calls to the toll free Roadside Assistance number 1 800 FOR MERCedes in the USA 1 800 387 0100 in Canada will be answered by Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance Representatives 24 hours a day 365 days a year For additional information refer to the Mercedes Benz Roadside Assistance Pro gram brochure in the USA or the Road side Assistance section of the Service amp Warranty Information booklet in Canada in your vehicle literature portfolio Change of address or ownership If you change your address be sure to send in the Change of Address Notice found in the Service and Warranty In
306. ogramming a garage door opener it is advised to park the vehicle outside the garage Do not run the engine while programming the integrated remote control Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health All gas contains carbon monoxide CO and in haling it can cause unconsciousness and possible death Programming the integrated remote control Step 1 gt Switch on the ignition gt page 40 Step 2 gt If you have previously programmed a signal transmitter button and wish to retain its programming proceed to step 3 If you are programming the integrated remote control for the first time press and hold the two outer signal transmit ter buttons 2 and 4 and release them only when indicator lamp begins to flash after approximately 20 seconds do not hold the button for longer than 30 seconds This proce dure erases any previous settings for all three channels and initializes the memory If you later wish to program a second and or third hand held transmitter to the remaining two signal transmitter buttons do not repeat this step and begin directly with step 3 Step 3 gt Hold the end of hand held remote control of the device you wish to train approximately 2 to 5 in 5 to12 cm away from the signal trans mitter button or to be programmed while keeping indicator lamp in view Step 4 gt Using both hands simultaneously press hand held remote control
307. oid high speed cornering Do not exceed a speed of 125 mph 200 km h e Do not drive at engine speeds above 4500 rpm e Try to avoid heavy load on the engine driving at full throttle and driving at high engine speeds maximum of 7 of top speed of each gear during this break in period e Avoid accelerating by kick down e Change gears in good time e Do not attempt to slow the vehicle down by shifting to a lower gear using the gear selector lever Select positions 3 2 or 1 only when driving at moderate speeds for hill driving After 1000 miles 1500 km you may grad ually bring the vehicle up to full road and engine speed All of the above instructions also apply when driving the first 1000 miles 1500 km after the engine or the rear differential has been replaced ce Always obey applicable speed limits Operation Driving instructions ho Y Driving instructions Drive sensibly save fuel Drinking and driving Pedals Fuel consumption to a great extent depends on driving habits and operating conditions To save fuel you should e Keep tires at the recommended tire inflation pressures e Remove unnecessary loads e Allow engine to warm up under low load use e Avoid frequent acceleration and deceleration e Have all maintenance work performed at the intervals specified in the Maintenance Booklet and as required by the maintenance service display Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Cen
308. on gt page 280 i Tire load rating gt page 277 and tire speed rating 6 gt page 277 are also referred to as service description Tire speed rating The tire speed rating gt page 277 indicates the approved maximum speed for the tire Warning A N Even when permitted by law never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and or personal injury and possible death for you and for others a Tire load rating gt page 277 and tire speed rating 6 gt page 277 are also referred to as service description Summer tires Index Speed rating Q up to 100 mph 160 km h R up to 106 mph 170 km h S up to 112 mph 180 km h T up to 118 mph 190 km h H up to 130 mph 210 km h V up to 149 mph 240 km h W up to 168 mph 270 km h Y up to 186 mph 300 km h Y above 186 mph 300 km h ZR above 149 mph 240 km h At the tire manufacturer s option any tire with a speed capability above 149 mph 240 km h can include a ZR in the size designation for exam ple 245 40 ZR18 To determine the maximum speed capability of the tire the service description for the tire must be referred to The service description Operation Tires and wheels is comprised of the tire
309. on Check local require ments 308 Problem Possible cause consequence USA only The fuel filler cap is not closed tightly Ew Canada only The yellow engine malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving i Some states may by law require you to visit a workshop immediately as soon as the engine malfunction indicator lamp comes on Check local requirements Practical hints What to do if a Suggested solution gt Check the fuel filler cap gt page 247 If it is not closed properly gt Close the fuel filler cap If it is closed properly gt Have the fuel system checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center 309 Practical hints pe What to do if Problem Possible cause consequence Suggested solution lt The red coolant temperature There is insufficient coolant in the reservoir Immediately add coolant to prevent en warning lamp comes on while gine from overheating gt page 255 the engine is running If this warning lamp comes on frequently Have the cooling system checked by there is a leak in the cooling system an authorized Mercedes Benz Center If the coolant level is correct the electric gt If the coolant temperature is below radiator fan may be broken 248 F 120 C you can continue driv ing to the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center gt Avoid high engine loads e g driving uphill and stop and go driving lt The red coolant temperature The coolant temperatu
310. on control to a position between two symbols Opening the center air vents gt Turn thumbwheel 7 gt page 185 upward Center air vents 2 and 4 gt page 185 are open Closing the center air vents gt Turn thumbwheel 7 gt page 185 downward Center air vents 2 and 4 gt page 185 are closed Opening the side air vents gt Turn thumbwheel 6 and gt page 185 upward The corresponding side air vent is open Closing the side air vents gt Turn thumbwheel 6 and gt page 185 upward The corresponding side air vent is closed ap The air vents are continuously variable Controls in detail Automatic climate control Adjusting air volume Use air volume control 9 gt page 186 for both automatic gt page 188 and manual air volume adjustment Nine blower speeds are available gt Press control button gt page 186 The control button sticks up slightly The A symbol on the control button goes out Automatic air volume control is switched off The air volume is ad justed corresponding to the set blower speed Maximum cooling MAX COOL If the left and right air distribution controls as well as the airflow volume control are set to W and there is a high need for cooling MAX COOL is activated This provides the fastest possible cooling of the vehicle interior when the soft top is closed 191 Controls in detail a Automatic climate control Front defr
311. on reacts by adjusting its gear shift program During the brief warm up transmission up Se shifting is delayed This allows the catalytic con peal ia eal for automatic verter to heat up more quickly to operating temperature P Park position R Reverse gear N Neutral D Drive position i The current gear selector lever park position P reverse gear R neutral position N or drive position D appears in the right multifunc tion display page 117 169 Controls in detail a Automatic transmission Warning A N It is dangerous to shift the gear selector lever out of park position P or neutral position N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal 170 Shifting procedure The automatic transmission selects indi vidual gears automatically depending on e the gear selector lever drive position D gt page 171 with gear ranges gt page 174 e the selected shift program C MAN S gt page 175 e the position of the accelerator pedal gt page 173 e the vehicle speed The current gear selector lever position P R N D the gear range 1 2 3 4 and the shift program c m s are shown in the standard display gt page
312. onse Center specialist may attempt to establish voice contact with the vehicle occupants If the trunk recessed handle was pulled for more than 20 seconds before door unlock authoriza tion was received by the Response Center you must wait 15 minutes before pulling the trunk recessed handle again Stolen Vehicle Recovery services In the event your vehicle was stolen gt Report the incident to the police The police will issue a numbered incident report p gt Pass this number on to the Mercedes Benz Response Center along with your password issued to you when you subscribed to the service The Response Center will then attempt to covertly contact the vehicle s Tele Aid system Once the vehicle is locat ed the Response Center will contact the local law enforcement and you The vehicle s location will only be provided to law enforcement If the anti theft alarm or the tow away alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds a call to the Response Center is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system provided Tele Aid service was subscribed to and properly activated and that necessary cellular service and GPS coverage are available See anti theft alarm system gt page 93 and tow away alarm gt page 95 Controls in detail Useful features Garage door opener The integrated remote control is capable of operating up to three separately controlled devices It provides a convenient way to re place up to three ha
313. ont wheels are in a straight ahead position Set the parking brake Move the gear selector lever to park position P Turn off the engine gt page 56 Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch Open door only when conditions are safe to do so gt Have any passenger exit the vehicle at a safe distance from the roadway Sealing tires with TIREFIT Small tire punctures particularly those in the tread can be sealed with TIREFIT TIREFIT can be used in ambient tempera tures down to 4 F 20 C Warning Practical hints Flat tire a A TIREFIT is a limited repair device TIREFIT cannot be used for cuts or punctures larger than approximately 0 16 in 4 mm and tire damage caused by driving with extremely low tire inflation pressure or on a flat tire or a damaged wheel Do not drive the vehicle under such circumstances Contact your nearest Mercedes Benz Center for assistance or call Roadside Assistance T After using TIREFIT the tire inflation pressure sensor may have to be replaced gt Foreign objects e g screws or nails should not be removed from the tire gt Take TIREFIT the sticker and the electric air pump out of the trunk 365 b gt Practical hints pa Flat tire b gt max Oimn max IO npr P40 10 4773 31 Two part sticker 1 Sticker for instrument cluster 2 Sticker for wheel gt Attach sticker part Q where it will be easily seen by
314. or a voice connection to the Center and the occupants of the vehicle Response Center will be established automatically soon after the emergency call has been initiat ed The Response Center will attempt to determine more precisely the nature of the accident provided they can speak to an occupant of the vehicle Warning A N If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is flashing continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established then the Tele Aid system could b The 911 emergency call system is a public service Using it without due cause is a criminal Close cover 1 after the emergency offense call is concluded Warning A N If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the vehicle e g smoke or fire in the vehicle ve hicle in a dangerous road location please do not wait for voice contact after you have pressed the emergency button Carefully leave the vehicle and move to a safe loca tion The Response Center will automatically e Cover contact local emergency officials with the not initiate an emergency call e g the rele SOS button vehicle s approximate location if they re vant cellular phone network is not available eive an automatic SOS signal andicannot We mE aae e e i EPEAT ii B E PEET TOVE make voice contact with the vehicle multifunction display for approximately The cover will open occupants 10 seconds gt Press SOS button 2 briefly Should this occur
315. or sill 34 _ a Getting started ce ceeeeeeees 36 WNOCK INS srren AS 38 Starter switch positions 40 PLCLIPIG INE seia nE R 41 ES A ies au coteacincs a pease eee eres 41 Steering wheel ccssesccrsesseees 42 IV INGOT G gt iststtiadiaa sien tectuasuntene oeaamoumuadeceune 43 DVI E soera ar xe 45 Fastening the seat belts 45 Starting the engine sssensseeeseeee 47 Parking Drake cccssssccesseeeeees 49 Driving Off ee cecccseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 50 Switching on headlamps 51 Turn signals lt ccoxesesssastnnsarcensesetamienennes 51 Contents Windshield WIpers cssecceeeeeees sp Problems while driving 0066 54 Parking and lOCKING cccccseescceeeeees 55 Parking Drake ssesseesssessssesssseesseee 55 Switching off headlamps 56 Turning off the engine 00c68 56 Releasing seat belts cce 56 LOCKRING arree 57 SSS SSS Safety and Security 0 00 58 Occupant Safety cccccesseccceeeeseeees 60 Alf AGS eera 62 Occupant Classification System 67 SEAT DOMES eroui 72 Children in the vehicle 0068 76 Panie alati siraseianiee kinan 81 ACHVATN Eeuna 81 De ACTIVATING ccceesecceseeccnessscees 81 Driving safety systems ceeeccee eee 82 AD een sensor cunseetatennes 82 DA oaeee 8
316. oster You can use this setting to defrost the windshield for example if it is iced up You can also defog the windshield and the door windows i Keep this setting selected only until the windshield or the door windows are clear again Activating gt Press button Keg gt page 186 The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air conditioning switches to the following functions automatically e cooling on to dehumidify e maximum blower speed and heating power e air flows onto the windshield and the door windows e the air recirculation mode is switched off 192 Deactivating gt Press button Keg gt page 186 The indicator lamp on the button goes out Defrosting is turned off The previous settings are in effect again The cooling remains switched on Windshield fogged on the outside Q Keep this setting selected only until the windshield is clear again gt Switch the windshield wipers on gt page 52 If the automatic air distribution and air volume are switched off gt Turn air distribution controls and gt page 186 to position mm or Keg or gt Press control buttons and gt page 186 The control buttons are engaged The EG symbol on the control buttons come on Air distribution and air volume are adjusted automatically Air recirculation mode Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle from the ou
317. overs The integrated restraint system includes SRS driver air bag passenger air bag knee air bags head thorax air bags Emergency Ten sioning Device ETD and seat belt force limiters The system is designed to en hance the protection offered to properly belted occupants in certain frontal front air bags knee air bags and ETD and side head thorax air bags and ETD im pacts which exceed preset deployment thresholds 73 gt gt b gt Safety and Security as Occupant safety 74 Never wear the shoulder belt under your arm against your neck or off your shoul der In a frontal crash your body would move too far forward That would in crease the chance of head and neck in juries The belt would also apply too much force to the ribs or abdomen which could severely injure internal organs such as your liver or spleen Never wear belts over rigid or breakable objects in or on your clothing such as eyeglasses pens keys etc as these might cause injuries Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips and not across the abdo men If the belt is positioned across your abdomen it could cause serious person al injuries in a crash Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another per son or other objects Seat belts should not be worn twisted In a crash you wouldn t have the full width of the seat belt to manage impact forces The
318. owkey The highlighted Romin the display disappears Repeat The repeat function RPT repeats the cur rent track e Switching on repeat fry CY AUD T Pa2 60 4067 31 gt Press the rpt key RPT Is highlighted in the display e Switching off repeat gt Press the rpt key The highlighted ret in the display disappears i The random play and repeat function cannot be used simultaneously Controls in detail Audio system a Track and time display Pry CY TT Fa OP ae a a i li ary om on roa RDM RPT AUD T P82 60 4070 31 gt Press the tT key The number of the track being played and the elapsed playing time appear in the display gt Press the tT key The total number of tracks and the total playing time of the CD appear in the display You see the CD main menu again after 8 seconds 161 Controls in detail ma Audio system Telephone operation A Please do not forget that your primary re sponsibility is to drive the vehicle A drivers attention to the road must always be his her primary focus when driving For your safety and the safety of others we rec ommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a telephone call Warning If you choose to use the telephone while driving please use the hands free device and only use the telephone when road weather and traffic conditions permit Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from us
319. page 293 A On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control Your vehicle s ABS will not prevent this type of control loss Warning Road salts and chemicals can adversely affect braking efficiency Increased pedal force may become necessary to produce the normal braking effect Depressing the brake pedal periodically when traveling at length on salt strewn roads can bring road salt impaired braking efficiency back to normal If the vehicle is parked after being driven on salt treated roads the braking efficiency should be tested as soon as possible after driving is resumed A Make sure not to endanger any other road users when carrying out these braking maneuvers Warning A If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow make sure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe and from around the vehicle with the engine running Otherwise deadly carbon monoxide CO gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death Warning To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation open a window slightly on the side of the vehicle not facing the wind A The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice Warning For more info
320. parks away from battery avoid improper connection of jumper cables smoking etc Ba You must not jump start the vehicle other wise the vehicle electrical systems could be damaged Only use the battery charge unit tested and ap proved by Mercedes Benz for use on the SLR to charge the battery or maintain the battery charge Using other battery chargers may cause damage to the vehicle and or personal injury Information on charging the batteries gt page 371 Have the batteries checked regularly by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Refer to Maintenance Booklet for maintenance intervals or contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for further information fit is necessary to replace the batteries contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Warning A N Do not place metal objects on the battery as this could result in a short circuit Use leak proof batteries only to avoid the risk of acid burns in the event of an accident Practical hints Batteries Le Charging the batteries Warning A N The brake system requires electrical power to operate A malfunction in the vehicle s power supply or electrical system may impair brake sys tem operation and switch it into its emer gency operation mode The same applies if battery is disconnected To brake the driver must then apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and depress the pedal much further to obtain the expected braking ef fect If necess
321. ped with a tire pressure monitor ing system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated Accord ingly when the low tire pressure telltale illu minates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significant ly underinflated tire causes the tire to over heat and can lead to tire failure Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehi cle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the drivers responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale USA only Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is com bined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists Operation Tires and wheels nn When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intend ed TPMS malfunctions may o
322. peed set The last stored speed is canceled when you turn off the engine Controls in detail Driving systems a Setting a higher speed Depressing the accelerator pedal doesnot Depress the cruise control lever to deactivate the cruise control After brief acceler position 2 and hold it down until the ae ation e g for passing the cruise control will desired speed is reached Warning A resume the last speed set gt Release the cruise control lever If you increase the set vehicle speed keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has made the necessary adjust Setting a lower speed The new speed is set ae When you use the cruise control lever to de ments Warning A N celerate the transmission will automatically vehicle speed to ie P Da If you decrease the set vehicle speed keep brake the vehicle sufficiently that the prevailing road conditions and legal speed limits permit Otherwise sudden and unexpected acceleration of the vehicle could cause an accident and or serious in jury to you and others Decrease the set vehicle speed to a value that the prevailing road conditions and legal speed limits permit Otherwise sudden and unexpected acceleration of the vehicle could cause an accident and or serious in jury to you and others in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has made the necessary adjust ments gt Lift the cruise control lever to position Q and
323. placard with re gards to loading your vehicle Operation Tires and wheels in Tire and Loading Information Warning A N Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driv er s door B pillar Overloading the tires can overheat them possibly causing a blowout Overloading the tires can also result in han dling or steering problems or brake failure Tire and Loading Information placard i Data shown on Tire and Loading Information placard example are for illustration purposes only Load limit data are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustrations below Refer to Tire and Loading Information placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle 263 Operation ae Tires and wheels P40 00 2062 31 1 Load limit information on the Tire and Loading Information placard The Tire and Loading Information placard showing the load limit information is locat ed on the driver s door B pillar gt Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX los on this Tire and Loading Informa tion placard The combined weight of all occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue load if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced in that statement 264 Seating capacity The seating capacity gives you important information on the nu
324. play Headl anps Del ayed Swtch off The selection marker is on the current setting lt Suwitoh iu AK lt aa o d p P54 32 4956 31 gt Press button or E to switch the headlamps delayed shut off feature Q Or of gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to position Egy before turning off the engine gt page 106 The headlamps delayed switch off feature is activated You can temporarily deactivate the headlamps delayed switch off feature gt Before leaving the vehicle turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 gt Then turn it to position 2 and back to 0 The delayed switch off feature is deac tivated It will reactivate as soon as you reinsert the SmartKey in the starter switch Setting interior lighting delayed switch off Use this function to set whether you would like the interior lighting to remain on for 10 seconds during darkness after you have removed the SmartKey from the starter switch gt Move the selection marker with button or to the Li ghti ng submenu Controls in detail Control system gt Press button EAN or eg repeatedly until you see this message in the left multifunction display 1 nt eri or Li ght ing Del ayed Swtch off The selection marker is on the current setting Interior Lighting Delayed Suite gt G OFF gt Press button or E to switch the interior lighting delayed feature Or Of te _ PS4 32 4957 31 137 Cont
325. ponsible for them even if in indi vidual cases an official approval or authori zation by governmental or other agencies should exist Use of such parts and acces sories could adversely affect the safety performance or reliability of your vehicle Please do not use them Introduction Product information Genuine Mercedes Benz Parts as well as conversion parts and accessories ap proved by us are available at any autho rized Mercedes Benz Center where you will receive comprehensive information also on permissible technical modifications and where proper installation will be per formed 13 Introduction Operator s Manual This Operator s Manual contains a great deal of useful information We urge you to read it carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving For your own safety and longer service life of the vehicle we urge you to follow the instructions and warnings contained in this manual Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Your vehicle may have some or all of the equipment described in this manual Therefore you may find explanations for optional equipment not installed in your vehicle If you have any questions about the operation of any equipment any autho rized Mercedes Benz Center will be glad to demonstrate the proper p
326. quent owner that it is equipped with an SRS by alerting them to the applicable section in the Operator s Manual Safety and Security Occupant safety a Front air bags 1 Driver air bag 2 Passenger air bag Driver and passenger air bags are deployed e inthe event of certain frontal impacts e if impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold e independently of the head thorax air bags 65 Safety and Security a Occupant safety The front air bags in this vehicle have been designed to inflate in two stages This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation that are based on the rate of relevant vehicle deceler ation as assessed by the air bag control unit On the passenger side the front air bag deployment ts additionally influenced by the passenger s weight category as identified by the Occupant Classification System OCS gt page 67 The lighter the passenger side occupant the higher the vehicle deceleration rate required for the second stage inflation of the air bag The air bags will not deploy in impacts which do not exceed the system s deployment thresholds You will then be protected by the fastened seat belts 66 The passenger air bag will only be de ployed if e the system based on the OCS weight sensor readings senses that the pas senger seat is occupied e the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the lower part of the center console Is not lit gt pa
327. r On the rear left pull down the dust cover below the bumper Pull down the dust cover on the left side of the vehicle On the front left pull down the dust cover below the bumper gt D 229 Controls in detail a Useful features gt gt Roof and trunk lid racks Warning A N This vehicle has not been designed to accommodate any type of roof or trunk lid rack Therefore do not fit such accessories Otherwise the rack could fall off and this P00 70 2004 31 could result in an accident and or serious gt To remove the dust cover follow the personal injury above steps in reverse order Ba Do not use any type of roof or trunk lid rack Otherwise you will damage the bodywork or paintwork of your vehicle 230 The first 1000 miles 1500 km Driving instructions At the gas station Engine compartment Trunk Tires and wheels Winter driving Operation The first 1000 miles 1500 km In the Operation section you will find detailed information on operating main taining and caring for your vehicle 234 The more cautiously you treat your vehicle during the break in period the more satis fied you will be with its performance later on You should therefore observe the fol lowing for the first 1000 miles 1500 km e Drive at varying but moderate road and engine speeds e Do not drive faster than 150 mph 240 km h e Break in new tires for the first 100 miles 160 km therefore av
328. r Mercedes Benz models are available Genuine Mercedes Benz parts are subject ed to stringent quality inspections Each part has been specifically developed manufactured or selected for and adapted to Mercedes Benz vehicles Therefore Genuine Mercedes Benz parts should be installed Ba Do not use non genuine Mercedes Benz parts and accessories not authorized by Mercedes Benz Doing so could damage the vehicle which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Also it could compromise the vehicle s durability or safety Y Warranty coverage Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the warranties printed in the Service and Warranty Information booklet Any autho rized Mercedes Benz Center will exchange or repair any defective parts originally in Stalled in the vehicle in accordance with the terms of the following warranties e New Car Limited Warranty e Emission System Warranty e Emission Performance Warranty e California Maine Massachusetts and Vermont Emission Control system Warranty At time of printing the decision regarding compli ance with Vermont certification regulations was still pending The vehicle may not be permitted to be registered in Vermont Check with an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for details Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes Benz Spare Parts and Accessories warranties copies of which are available at any Mercedes Benz Center Technical data
329. r accelerate This could lead to accidents or injury Warning A N Always fasten your seat belt before driving off Always make sure your passenger is properly restrained Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident You and your passenger should always wear seat belts If you are ever in an accident your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled Without your seat belt buckled you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it You can be seriously injured or killed death is lessened if you are wearing your seat belt The air bags can only provide the protection they were designed to afford if the occupants are using their seat belts gt page 72 Warning A N Children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropri ately sized infant restraint toddler restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child For additional infor mation see Children in the vehicle gt page 76 A child s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and or the child is not properly secured in the child restraint 45 Getting started Driving Warning A N Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat
330. r safety and the safety of others se lecting features through the multifunction steering wheel should only be done by the driver when traffic and road conditions permit it to be done safely Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet approximate ly 14 m every second The control system relays information to the multifunction display Controls in detail Control system ia Multifunction display The multifunction display consists of the display fields in the speedometer and the tachometer In its default state the left display field shows the outside tempera ture and main odometer while the trip odometer and the clock appears in the right display field This default setting is referred to as the standard display Standard display 1 Main odometer 2 Outside temperature or speed 3 Current gear selector lever position gear range 4 Trip odometer Automatic transmission shift program mode 6 Clock Controls in detail a Control system Multifunction steering wheel Left multifunction display in the Menu systems l speedometer Press button The displays in the multifunction display l and the settings in the control system are Right multifunction display in the for next menu controlled by the buttons on the multi tachometer for previous menu function steering wheel gt page 30 Operating the control system er
331. r you and or others Warning A N In case of an accident liquid electrolyte may escape from the mirror housing if the mirror glass breaks Electrolyte has an irritating effect Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with eyes skin clothing or respiratory system In case it does immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary T Electrolyte drops coming into contact with the vehicle paint finish can be completely removed only while in the liquid state and by applying plenty of water 182 Warning A N Exercise care when using the passen ger side exterior rear view mirror The mirror surface is convex outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view Objects in mirror are closer than they appear Check your interior rear view mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes Sun visors The sun visors protect you from sun glare while driving Warning A N Do not use the driver s side vanity mirror while driving Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed while vehicle is in motion Reflected glare can endanger you and or others P68 60 2164 3 1 Vanity mirror cover 2 Vanity mirror lamp 3 Mounting 4 Holder for gas cards Glare through the windshield gt Make sure the sun visor is properly engaged in mounting 3 Swing the respective sun visor down When you do not experience glare anymore swing the sun visor up Glare throug
332. re has exceeded gt Stop as soon as possible in a safe loca warning lamp comes on while 248 F 120 C tion and allow the engine and coolant the engine is running and you to cool down hear a warning sound S serious burns which can occur just by open PUTE eevee OPALANIE CONGIHONS SE Warning Z N stop and go traffic the coolant tempera ing the engine hood Stay away from the en ae l ture may rise close to 248 F 120 C gine if you see or hear steam coming from it Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire You could be seriously burned Steam from an overheated engine can cause 310 Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from other traffic Turn off the engine get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down pg The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248 F 120 C Do ing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Problem i o The red Airbrake warning lamp comes on while driving and you hear a warning sound The red gearshift indicator lamp comes on while driving The yellow fuel reserve warn ing lamp comes on while driving The engine oil temperature indicator comes on in the tachometer while driving Possible cause consequence The Airbrake or the central locking system is malfunc
333. re is bars There are 100 kilopascals kPa to 1 bar Maximum load rating The maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire Maximum loaded vehicle weight The sum of curb weight accessory weight total load limit and production options weight Operation Tires and wheels nn Maximum tire inflation pressure This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire under normal driving conditions Normal occupant weight The number of occupants the vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 68 kilograms 150 Ib Occupant distribution The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their designated seating positions Production options weight The combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over 5 Ib 2 3 kilograms in excess of those standard items which they replace not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight including heavy duty brakes ride levelers roof rack heavy duty battery and special trim 287 Operation re Tires and wheels PSI Pounds per square inch A standard unit of measure for air pressure gt bar kilopascal kPa Recommended tire inflation pressure Recommended tire inflation pressure for normal driving conditions is listed on the Tire and Loading Information placard locat ed on the driver s door B pillar Provides best handling tread life and riding com fort If so equipped
334. re is insuffi cient voltage in the battery The system re sponds automatically by deactivating the rear window defroster As soon as the battery has sufficient voltage the rear window defroster automatically switches back on automatically Deactivating gt Press button Rall again The indicator lamp on the button goes out 183 Controls in detail a Automatic climate control 184 CMO Meo Re ce i For draft free ventilation move the sliders for the center air vents to the middle position Function Left side air vent adjustable Left center air vent adjustable Air temperature controls for center and side air vents Right center air vent adjustable Right side air vent adjustable Air volume control for right side air vent Air volume control for center air vents Air volume control for left side air vent Automatic climate control panel Controls in detail Automatic climate control i 185 Controls in detail a Automatic climate control Automatic climate control panel 186 GE Ole Function Air distribution left automatic or manual operation Front defroster Air recirculation Rear window defroster gt page 183 Air distribution right automatic or manual operation Ol OO YOO Function Temperature control right Automatic climate control on off entire system Residual heat ventilation Air volume control automatic or manual operation AC cool
335. re not i If it was not possible to release the hood folded away from the windshield Otherwise the pull the release lever downwards more firmly windshield wipers or the hood could be dam aged Make sure there is sufficient clearance before opening the hood A minimum clearance in front of the vehicle of 1 3 ft 40 cm is required The release lever is located in the driver s footwell P88 40 2653 31 2 Hood latch The hood latches are located in the upper air intake next to the headlamp units gt Pull the hood latches 2 This completes the second stage 1 Release lever The hood folding mechanism is disengaged in two stages gt Pull release lever downwards This completes the first stage Operation Engine compartment PBS 40 2654 31 gt Pull the hood towards you to the stop gt gt 251 Operation od Engine compartment b gt PB8 40 7655 31 gt Press the front part of the hood The hood opens and will automatically be held in position by gas filled spring struts BE Make sure there is sufficient clearance be fore opening the hood A minimum overhead clearance of 6 6 ft 2 0 m is required 252 Closing A When closing the hood use extreme caution not to catch hand or fingers Be careful that you do not close the hood on anyone Warning Make sure the hood is securely engaged be fore driving Do not continue driving if the hood can no longer enga
336. re you and or others Warning A N The exhaust areas on the engine hood and between the doors and front wheels get very hot Avoid contact with them otherwise there is the risk of severe burns 250 Warning A N If you see flames or smoke coming from the engine compartment or if the coolant tem perature gauge indicates that the engine is overheated do not open the hood Move away from the vehicle and do not open the hood until the engine has cooled If neces sary call the fire department Warning A N You could be injured when the hood is open even when the engine is turned off Parts of the engine can become very hot To prevent burns let the engine cool off com pletely before touching any components on the vehicle Comply with all relevant safety precautions Warning A N To help prevent personal injury stay clear of moving parts when the hood is open and the engine is running The radiator fan may also start at any time automatically even after the SmartKey has been removed from the starter switch Stay clear of fan blades Warning A N The engine is equipped with a transistorized ignition system Because of the high voltage it is dangerous to touch any components ignition coils spark plug sockets diagnos tic socket of the ignition system e with the engine running e while starting the engine e if ignition is on and the engine is turned manually T Make sure the windshield wipers a
337. read depth approaches in 3 mm the adhesion properties on a wet road are sharply reduced Warning Depending upon the weather and or road surface conditions the tire traction varies widely Operation Tires and wheels el 1 TWI Tread Wear Indicator The treadwear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread 261 Operation re Tires and wheels Storing tires Direction of rotation Loading the vehicle T Keep unmounted tires in a cool dry place Unidirectional tires offer added advan Two labels on your vehicle show how much tS le tages such as better hydroplaning perfor weight it may properly carr Protect tires from contact with oil grease and BES To benefit h E 8P i amp y PORSA y gasoline IAEE EG S saleable yor oe 1 The Tire and Loading Information make sure the tires rotate in the direction placard can be found on the driver s Cleaning tires PREIA door B pillar This placard tells you im By Never use a round nozzle to power wash An arrow on the sidewall indicates the portant information about the number tires The intense jet of water can result in intended direction of rotation spinning of of people that can be in the vehicle and damage to the tire the tire the total weight that can be carried in Always teohceadamaged tie the vehicle It also contains information Warning IN on the proper size and recommended tire inflation pressures for the original Warning A E oy ccc eee equipmen
338. requent washing reduces and or elimi nates the aggressiveness and potency of the above adverse influences More frequent washings are necessary to deal with unfavorable conditions e near the ocean e in industrial areas smoke exhaust emissions e during winter operation 297 Operation fa Vehicle care You should check your vehicle from time to time for stone chipping or other damage Any damage should be repaired as soon as possible Vehicle washing i When washing the vehicle fine and rigid particles in sponges or brushes could scratch or otherwise damage the paint This applies to both hand wash or automatic car wash Mercedes Benz recommends you to have your vehicle cleaned at an automatic car wash from the start preferably one without brushes or to use plenty of water when hand washing your vehicle Do not wash the car in direct sunlight and when the body surface is hot In the winter remove salt residue quickly and thoroughly 298 Hand wash Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle in direct sunlight gt Only use a mild car wash detergent which is recommended by Mercedes Benz gt Only use a soft sponge or a washing brush gt Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a diffused jet of water Direct only a very weak spray towards the ventilation intake gt Use plenty of water and rinse the sponge and chamois frequently Rinse with clean water and thoroughly dry with a chamois
339. rip odometer coolant temperature warning lamp gt page 310 and a warning in the multifunction display gt Press button or repeatedly gt page 340 until you see the standard display in The engine should not be operated with the cool the multifunction display gt page 117 ant temperature above 248 F 120 C Doing so b Pressbatton Z or E manic may cause serious engine damage which is not trip odometer appears in the right covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty multifunction display During severe operating conditions e g gt Press and hold the cee button stop and go traffic the coolant temperature may gt page 114 until the trip odometer is rise Close to 248 F 120 C reset 115 Controls in detail i Instrument cluster Tachometer The red marking on the tachometer gt page 29 denotes excessive engine speed T Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds as it may result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty To help protect the engine the fuel supply is interrupted if the engine is operated within the red marking 116 Outside temperature indicator A The outside temperature indicator is not de signed to serve as an ice warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose Warning Indicated temperatures just above the freez ing point do not guarantee that the road sur face is free of ice The road may still be icy
340. rking on a surface subject to movement such as a ferry or auto train The button is located on the lower part of the center console 1 Tow away alarm off button 2 Indicator lamp Safety and Security Anti theft systems p gt Switch off the ignition and remove the SmartKey E You cannot disarm the tow away alarm while the ignition is switched on gt Press button Q Indicator lamp in button Q comes on briefly gt Exit and lock your vehicle with the SmartKey The tow away alarm remains disarmed until you lock your vehicle again Canceling the alarm To cancel the alarm gt Press button or on the SmartKey or gt Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch 95 Locking and unlocking Lighting Instrument cluster Control system Audio system Automatic transmission Good visibility Automatic climate control Open air Controls in detail a Locking and unlocking In the Controls in detail section you will find detailed information on how to oper ate the equipment installed on your vehi cle If you are already familiar with the basic functions of your vehicle this section will be of particular interest to you To quickly familiarize yourself with the ba sic functions of the vehicle refer to the Getting started section of this manual The corresponding page numbers are given at the beginning of each segment 98 SmartKey Your vehicle comes supp
341. rly closed Close the respective element and lock the vehicle again 94 Disarming the alarm system gt Unlock your vehicle with the SmartKey The turn signal lamps flash once to indicate that the alarm system is disarmed Go The alarm system will rearm automatically after approximately 40 seconds if neither a door nor the trunk lid was opened Canceling the alarm To cancel the alarm gt Press button or on the SmartKey or gt Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch Tow away alarm Once the tow away alarm is armed a visual and audible alarm will be triggered when someone attempts to raise the vehicle Ge The tow away protection alarm is triggered for example if the vehicle is lifted on one side If the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds a call to the Response Center is initiated auto matically by the Tele Aid system gt page 221 provided Tele Aid service was subscribed to and properly activated and that necessary cellular service and GPS coverage are available Arming tow away alarm gt Lock your vehicle with the SmartKey The tow away alarm is automatically armed after about 30 seconds a When you unlock your vehicle the tow away protection disarms automatically The tow away alarm remains disarmed until you lock the vehicle again Disarming tow away alarm To prevent triggering the tow away alarm switch off the tow away alarm feature before towing the vehicle or when pa
342. rm Driving safety systems Safety and Security as Occupant safety In this section you will learn the most im portant facts about the restraint systems of the vehicle The restraint systems are e Seat belts gt page 72 e Child restraints gt page 76 Additional protection potential provided by e Supplemental Restraint System SRS with e Air bags gt page 62 e Air bag control unit with crash sensors e Emergency Tensioning Device ETD for seat belts gt page 75 e Seat belt force limiter gt page 75 e Roll bars 60 Air bag system components with Passenger front air bag off indicator lamp gt page 70 e Passenger seat with Occupant Classifi cation System OCS gt page 67 Although independent systems their protective functions work in conjunction with each other i For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children see Children in the vehicle gt page 76 The SRS system conducts a self test when the ignition is switched on and in regular intervals while the engine is running This facilitates detection of malfunctions The E indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on when the ignition is switched on and goes out no later than a few seconds after the engine has been started The SRS components are in operational readiness if the EGS indicator lamp is not lit when the engine is runn
343. rmation see Winter driving gt page 292 Operation Driving instructions Standing water T Do not drive through flooded areas or water of unknown depth Before driving through water determine its depth Never accelerate before driving into water The bow wave could force water into the engine and auxiliary equipment thus damaging them If you must drive through standing water drive slowly to prevent water from entering the pas senger compartment or the engine compart ment Water in these areas could cause damage to electrical components or wiring of the engine or transmission or could result in water being in gested by the engine through the air intake caus ing severe internal engine damage Any such damage is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty 243 Operation ia Driving instructions Passenger compartment Warning A N Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible In an accident during hard braking or sud den maneuvers loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle and cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle The trunk is the preferred place to carry objects Driving abroad Abroad there is an extensive Mercedes Benz service network at your disposal If you plan to drive into areas which are not listed in the index of your Mercedes Benz Center directory you should request pertinent information from a
344. rocedures 14 We continuously strive to improve our product and ask for your understanding that we reserve the right to make changes in design and equipment Therefore information illustrations and descriptions in this Operator s Manual might differ from your vehicle Optional equipment is also described in this manual including operating instruc tions wherever necessary Since they are special order items the descriptions and illustrations herein may vary slightly from the actual equipment of your vehicle If there are any equipment details that are not shown or described in this Operator s Manual an authorized Mercedes Benz Center will be glad to inform you of correct care and operating procedures The Operator s Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept with the vehicle Service and warranty information The Service and Warranty Information Booklet contains detailed information about the warranties covering your Mercedes Benz including e New Car Limited Warranty e Emission System Warranty e Emission Performance Warranty e California Maine Massachusetts and Vermont Emission Control system Warranty California Maine Massa chusetts and Vermont only e State Warranty Enforcement Laws Lemon Laws At time of printing the decision regarding compli ance with Vermont certification regulations was still pending The vehicle may not be permitted to be registere
345. rols in detail mz Control system Vehicle submenu Access the veni c e submenu via the Set ti ngs Menu Use the veni c e submenu to make general vehicle settings The following functions are available Function Page Setting station selection mode 138 radio Setting automatic locking 139 138 Setting radio station selection mode Use the Press button in audio node aa function to select the manual or memory m Press button in _ 4 i audio mode station selection mode for the radio y i p gt page 127 a P54 32 5206 31 gt Press button or E to select the desired station selection mode You can select gt Move the selection marker with button or BSH to the veni c e submenu gt Press button or R4 repeatedly until you see this message in the left multifunction display Press buttonin audi o node e Stati on Search selects next receivable station The selection marker is on the current e memory selects next stored station setting Setting automatic locking Use this function to activate or deactivate the automatic central locking With the automatic central locking system activated the vehicle is centrally locked at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph 15 km h gt Move the selection marker with button or BSH to the veni c e submenu gt Press button EA or Keg repeatedly until you see the following message in the left multifunction display Aut on
346. rom starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle A child s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and or serious personal injury After switching off the ignition gt page 40 or removing the SmartKey from the starter switch the door windows can be operated e until you open a door e for atleast 5 minutes if no door was opened gt Switch on the ignition gt page 40 Opening the door windows gt C gt Pull switch G or 2 to the resistance Press switch 1 or 2 to the resistance point The corresponding window will move downwards until you release the switch losing the door windows point The corresponding window will move upwards until you release the switch A If you pull and hold the switch up when closing the window and upward movement of the window is blocked by some obstruc tion including but not limited to arms hands fingers etc the automatic reversal will not operate Warning Fully opening the door windows Express open gt Press switch 4 or 2 past the resistance point and release The corresponding window opens completely Fully closing the door windows Express close gt Pull switch 4 or 2 past the resistance point and release The corresponding window closes completely Warning UN Driver s door only If wit
347. roppings immediately Bird droppings are caustic and can cause leaks in the soft top Do not remove ice and snow with sharp edged devices i Do not clean the soft top with e gasoline or benzine e thinner e taror stain remover e other organic solvents i Do not choose final hot wax conservation when taking the vehicle to an automatic car wash i As it has a two tone design the soft top con sists of a special fabric The appearance of the fabric may change after opening and closing the soft top several times A change in fabric color or bright lines along the soft top folds may be no ticed The genuine appearance will be restored when you clean the soft top with water gt page 301 and then let it dry using a heat source insolation for example If you intend to park your vehicle for an extended period of time observe the fol lowing e Park the vehicle with closed dry soft top e When parking in confined areas make sure that the soft top remains dry and ensure good ventilation e When parking the vehicle in the open place a suitable cover over the soft top Operation Vehicle care fn Cleaning the soft top In case of light soiling cleaning the soft top dry or spray or clean with water should be sufficient If necessary clean the soft top with water and a soft brush Always brush from the front to the rear along the grain of the fabric In case of heavy soiling or stains clean the soft top w
348. rt gt Press the ashtray insert into the holder until you hear it click into place Cigarette lighter Warning A N Never touch the heating element or sides of the lighter they are extremely hot Hold the knob only Make sure that any children traveling with you do not injure themselves or start a fire with the hot cigarette lighter When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle A child s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and or serious personal injury Switch on the ignition gt page 40 Push in cigarette lighter The cigarette lighter pops out automat ically when hot Controls in detail Useful features i The lighter socket can accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories up to a maximum of 85 W designed for use with the standard cigarette lighter plug type Keep in mind how ever that connecting accessories to the lighter socket for example extensive connecting and disconnecting or using plugs that do not fit prop erly can damage the lighter socket With the socket damaged the lighter may no longer be able to be placed in the heating pushed in posi tion or the lighter may pop out too early with the lighter not hot enough To help avoid damaging the cigarette lighter socket we recommend connecting 12V
349. se serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty T Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brakes reduces engine performance and causes premature brake and drivetrain wear 239 Operation ia Driving instructions Parking Warning A N Do not park this vehicle in areas where com bustible materials such as grass hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire To reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to the vehicle drivetrain as a result of vehicle movement before turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle always e Keep right foot on brake pedal e Pull the parking brake lever up as many notches as possible e Move the gear selector lever to park position P e Slowly release brake pedal e When parked on an incline turn front wheels towards the road curb 240 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch aes to position O and remove Take the SmartKey with you and lock Warning A N vehicle when leaving If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance or you suspect that possi ble damage to your vehicle has occurred you should turn on the hazard warning flash ers carefully slow down and drive with cau tion to an area which is a safe distance from the road Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody for possible damage If the
350. selector switch to the desired setting I H or HI ae The currently selected manual shift program I Hor III does not appear in the right multifunc tion display The current setting is indicated only on the program mode selector switch Q Downshifting A On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control Your vehicle s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control Warning gt Pull the left shift paddle gt page 177 or gt Briefly press the gear selector lever to the left in the D direction The transmission shifts to the next lower gear 179 gt D Controls in detail a Automatic transmission gt gt When you brake or stop the transmission shifts down to a gear from which you can easily accelerate or take off Upshifting i In the manual program mode M the trans mission will not upshift even if the engine has reached its overrewing range Shift up to the next gear before the engine has reached its over revving range Make absolutely certain that the engine speed does not reach the red marking on the tachometer gt page 28 Otherwise the en gine could be damaged which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty gt Pull the right shift paddle gt page 177 or gt Briefly press the gear selector lever to the right in the D direction The transmis
351. senger s seat belt remain unfastened after 60 seconds the warning chime stops sounding The seat belt telltale stops flashing but continues to be illuminated The seat belt telltale will only go out if both the driver s and the passenger s seat belt with the passenger seat occupied are fastened or the vehicle is standing still and a door is opened For more information see the Practical hints section gt page 312 Emergency Tensioning Device ETD seat belt force limiter The seat belts are equipped with emergency tensioning devices and seat belt force limiters The ETD is designed to activate in the following cases e in frontal or rear end impacts exceed ing the system deployment threshold e inside collisions exceeding the deploy ment threshold on the far side of the impact e ifthe restraint systems are operational and functioning correctly see EES in dicator lamp gt page 60 e in certain vehicle rollovers if the system determines an additional degree of protection Safety and Security Occupant safety a The ETDs will only activate if the seat belts are fastened latch plate properly inserted into buckle In an impact ETDs remove slack from the seat belts in such a way that the seat belts fit more snugly against the body Seat belt force limiters reduce the force exerted by the seat belts on occupants during a crash A An ETD that was activated must be replaced Warning
352. shield wipers e High beam At a glance Cockpit Page 181 42 250 51 106 51 52 110 27 At a glance p Instrument cluster x100 1 min iH i miles m P 12 30 em M P54 32 5241 31 28 Item 1 Coolant temperature gauge with wre Coolant temperature warning lamp 2 Speedometer with BRAKE UN _ gt A g Brake warning lamp USA only Brake warning lamp Canada only ABS ESP warning lamp Gearshift indicator lamp Airbrake warning lamp Left turn signal indicator lamp Right turn signal indicator lamp Page 115 310 307 307 304 311 311 Item 3 Left multifunction display with e Outside temperature e Main odometer 4 Reset button Tachometer with Om mae High beam headlamp indicator Engine malfunction in dicator lamp USA only Engine malfunction in dicator lamp Canada only Antilock Brake System ABS indicator lamp Combination low tire pressure TPMS mal function telltale USA only Low tire pressure tell tale Canada only Page 116 117 114 116 110 308 308 306 3195 At a glance Instrument cluster oo Item Page ES Supplemental 314 Restraint System SRS indicator lamp eae Seat belt telltale 312 Right multifunction display with e Current gearselectorlever 117 position gear range 11 174 e Trip odometer 117 e Automatic transmission 117 shift program mode 175 e C
353. sing it All turn signals will flash three times to confirm locking 103 Controls in detail i Locking and unlocking Trunk emergency release The emergency release button is located on the inside of the trunk lid With the emergency release button the trunk can be opened from inside the trunk P80 20 3011 31 Emergency release button gt Briefly press emergency release button The trunk unlocks and the trunk lid opens slightly gt Push up the trunk lid to fully open 104 The emergency release button unlocks the trunk while the vehicle is standing still or in motion Illumination of the emergency release button e The button will flash for 30 minutes after opening the trunk e The button will flash for 60 minutes after closing the trunk The emergency release button does not open the trunk lid if the vehicle battery is discharged or disconnected If the vehicle has previously been locked from the outside with the SmartKey opening the trunk from the inside using the emergency release button will trigger the anti theft alarm system To cancel the alarm do one of the following e Press button or on the SmartKey e nsert the SmartKey in the starter switch Automatic locking The doors and the trunk lock automatically when the vehicle is set into motion You can open a locked door from the in side Open door only when conditions are safe to do so The doors unlock automatica
354. sion shifts to the next higher gear 180 If the red gearshift indicator lamp comes on in the speedometer display gt page 29 shift to the next higher gear The fuel supply will otherwise be interrupt ed to prevent the engine from overrevving Mercedes Benz SLR McLaren Roadster 7228 If you have selected the 722S menu gt page 123 and up appears in the right multifunction display in addition to the red gearshift indicator lamp p amp g shift to the next higher gear The fuel supply will other wise be interrupted to prevent the engine from overrevving Deactivating manual gearshift program gt Turn program mode selector switch Q gt page 175 to the shift program C or S The selected gearshift program ap pears in the right multifunction display Emergency operation Limp Home Mode If vehicle acceleration becomes less re sponsive or sluggish or the transmission no longer shifts the transmission is most likely operating in limp home emergency operation mode In this mode only second gear and reverse gear can be activated gt Stop the vehicle in a safe location gt Move gear selector lever to park position P Turn off the engine Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting Restart the engine Move gear selector lever to drive position D for second gear or reverse gear R gt Have the transmission checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Y
355. splay Right display Possible cause Possible solution consequence Turn Si gnal The left front turn signallampis Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as Front Left malfunctioning An auxiliary possible Auxiliary Bulb bulb is being used Turn Si gnal The right front turn signal lamp gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as Front Ri ght is malfunctioning An auxiliary possible Auxiliary Bulb bulb is being used Turn Si gnal The left rear turn signal lamp is gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as Rear Left malfunctioning An auxiliary possible Auxiliary Bulb bulb is being used Turn Si gnal The right rear turn signallamp gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as Rear Ri ght is malfunctioning An auxiliary possible Auxiliary Bulb bulb is being used 350 Left display Right display Pl ease correct the tire pressure Cauti on Tire Defect Check Tires Practical hints What to do if ae Possible cause Possible solution consequence The tire inflation pres gt Check and correct tire inflation pressure as required sure is too low in one or gt page 270 more tires One or more tires are gt Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt avoiding abrupt steering and deflating braking maneuvers Observe the traffic situation around you The respective tire is in gt Temporarily repair tire using TIREFIT gt page 365 or contact
356. ssure gt page 288 REST Residual Engine Heat Utilization Feature that uses the engine heat stored in the coolant to heat the vehi cle interior for a short time after the engine has been turned off Rim gt page 288 RON Research Octane Number The Research Octane Number for gaso line as determined by a standardized method It is an indication of a gaso line s ability to resist undesired detona tion knocking The average of both the MON Motor Octane Number and RON Research Octane Number is posted at the pump also known as ANTI KNOCK INDEX Electro hydraulic brake system Electronically controlled hydraulic braking system for increased braking safety and comfort Shift lock When the vehicle is parked this lock prevents the gear selector lever from being inadvertently moved out of park position P without SmartKey turned and brake pedal depressed Sidewall gt page 288 SRS Supplemental Restraint System Seat belts Emergency Tensioning De vice ETD and air bags Though inde pendent systems they are closely interfaced to provide effective occu pant protection Tele Aid Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response automatic and manual emergency Roadside Assistance and Information Tele Aid is initially activated by completing a subscriber agreement and placing an acquaintance call The Tele Aid system is operational provided that the
357. stalled by an authorized multifunction display Mercedes Benz Center 329 Practical hints pe What to do if Left display Right display Ti re Pressure Wheel Sensor M ssi ng Moni t or Ti re Pressure Current y Moni t or Unavai abl e Warning A N Do not drive with a flat tire A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle You may lose control of the vehicle Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build up and possibly a fire 330 Possible cause consequence Possible solution One or more wheels without appropriate gt Have the TPMS checked by an autho wheel sensors mounted e g spare wheel rized Mercedes Benz Center The respective tire is indicated by gt Have appropriate wheel sensors in instead of the tire inflation pressure in the stalled by an authorized multifunction display Mercedes Benz Center The TPMS is unable to monitor the tire pres As soon as the causes for the malfunc sure due to a nearby radio interference tion are no longer present the TPMS source automatically becomes active again after a few minutes driving Left display Transm ssi on Transm ssi on Right display Servi ce Requi red Shift To N Practical hints What to do if ae Possible cause consequence Possible solution The provided operating safety of the gt Drive with added caution and have automatic transmission is reduced the system checked at an authorized M
358. stalled in your vehicle The menus are described on the following pages 119 Controls in detail an Control system Menus This is what you will see when you scroll The table on the next page provides an a through the menus overview of the individual menus From Start 135 Mi AT 1 30 H 17 3 MPG pees reset button S 26752 Miles ri SS or 3 seconds 4 P54 32 6750 311 120 Menus submenus and functions Menu D l Standard display Menu 2 722 S gt page 122 gt page 123 Digital soeedome Engine oil tem Selecting Menu 4 Vehicle status message memory Menu 6 Settings gt page 127 gt page 128 gt page 129 Calling up vehicle Resetting to fac ter Outside tem perature radio station malfunction warn tory settings a perature ing and system sta tus messages E stored in memory 2 3 Calling up mainte Vehicle supply Operatingthe Instrument clus w nance service voltage CD player ter submenu display Checking tire RACETIMER Time submenu O oO inflation pressure Overall analysis Lap analysis l l Only Mercedes Benz SLR McLaren Roadster 722 S 2 The Vehicle status message memory menu is only i gt The headings used in the menus table are designed to facilitate navigation within the sys tem and are not necessarily identical to those Lighting submenu Vehicle submenu displayed if there is a message stored shown i
359. t button red The indicator lamp on the button comes on Warm air will enter from the center and side air vents 190 Turning off warm air gt Press the left button red The indicator lamp on the button goes out The air from the outlets will return to the temperature set in the system Turning on cooler air gt Press the right button blue The indicator lamp on the button comes on Cooler air will enter from the center and side air vents Turning off cooler air gt Press the right button blue The indicator lamp on the button goes out The air from the outlets will return to the temperature set in the system Adjusting air distribution Use air distribution controls 1 and gt page 186 to separately adjust the air distribution on each side of the passenger compartment The following symbols are found on the controls Symbol Function Directs air through the cen ter and side air vents Directs air to the windows Directs air into the entire vehicle interior Directs air to the footwells gt Press control button 4 or gt page 186 until the control button sticks up slightly and the AJ symbol on the control button is out Automatic air distribution for the re spective side of the passenger compartment is switched off gt Turn control button to the desired symbol The air distribution is adjusted accord ing to the chosen setting Ge You can also turn the air distributi
360. t or higher speed 2 Sets current or lower speed 3 Cancels the cruise control 4 Resumes at last set speed Setting current speed gt Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed gt Briefly lift or depress 2 the cruise control lever The current speed is set 206 gt Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The cruise control is activated ae On uphill or downhill grades the cruise control may not be able to maintain the set speed Once the grade eases the set speed will be resumed Canceling the cruise control There are several ways to cancel the cruise control gt Step on the brake pedal The cruise control is canceled The last speed set is stored for later use gt Briefly push the cruise control lever to position G The cruise control is canceled The last speed set is stored for later use The cruise control is automatically can celled when e the vehicle speed is below 20 mph 30 km h e ESP is in operation or switched off with the ESP switch gt page 87 e you move the gear selector lever to neutral position N while driving i However the gear selector lever should not be moved to neutral position N while driving ex cept to coast when the vehicle is in danger of skidding e g on icy roads Ge Depressing the accelerator pedal does not deactivate the cruise control After brief acceler ation e g for passing the cruise contro will re sume the last s
361. t recent list of Bluetooth capable mobile phones that have been approved for use in your ve hicle For detailed instructions on how to pair the Bluetooth interface with the mobile phone please refer to the mobile phone operating instructions Tele Aid i In order to activate the Tele Aid system a subscriber agreement must be completed To ensure your system is activated and operational please press the button to perform the ac guaintance call Failure to complete either of these steps may result in a system that is not ac tivated If you have any questions regarding activation please call the Response Center at 1 800 756 9018 in the USA or 1 888 923 8367 in Canada Shortly after the completion of your Tele Aid acquaintance call you will receive a user ID and password in the mail You may use this password to access the Tele Aid section in Owner s Online at www mbusa com The My Tele Aid sec tion will give you access to account infor mation remote door unlock and more The Tele Aid system is available if e it has been activated and is operation al Activation requires a subscription for monitoring services connection and cellular air time e vehicle battery power is available e the relevant cellular phone network and GPS signals are available and pass the information on to the Response Center a Location of the vehicle on a map Is only pos sible if the vehicle is able to receive sign
362. t tires on your vehicle The wheels must be mounted corresponding to the labelling on the inside of the rim where LEFT refers to the left hand side of the vehicle and RIGHT to the right hand side of the vehicle both seen in direction of trav el When unidirectional tires are mounted make sure that they rotate in the direction specified Otherwise the driving stability of the vehicle will be adversely affected especially when driving at high speeds Have worn or damaged tires replaced in pairs front pair or rear pair an make sure the tires rotate in the direction specified gt page 262 Otherwise the driving stabili ty of the vehicle will be adversely affected especially when driving at high speeds 262 2 The certification label found on the driver s door A pillar gt page 382 tells you about the gross weight capacity of your vehicle called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR in cludes the weight of the vehicle all occupants fuel and cargo The certifi cation label also tells you about the front and rear axle weight capacity called the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the total allow able weight that can be carried by a sin gle axle front or rear Never exceed the GVWR or GAWR for either the front axle or rear axle POO 10 4173 31 1 Driver s door B pillar Following is a discussion on how to work with the information contained on the Tire and Loading Information
363. tab Q in the direction of arrow and at the same time remove mechanical key 2 completely out of the housing Practical hints Unlocking in an emergency ay Trunk lid lock 3 Unlocking gt Insert the mechanical key in the trunk lid lock Perform the following two steps simultaneously gt Turn the mechanical key counterclockwise to the stop to position G gt Pull the trunk lid handle and lift the trunk lid 357 Practical hints Unlocking in an emergency Unlocking the driver s door If you can no longer lock or unlock the doors using the SmartKey unlock the driver s door using the emergency release catch 0 Unlocking the driver s door with the emer gency release catch will trigger the anti theft alarm system To cancel the alarm insert the SmartKey in the starter switch 358 The emergency release catch is located on the left side in the trunk av P8O 20 2993 31 1 Emergency release catch gt Unlock the trunk gt page 357 gt Pull emergency release catch Q The door is unlocked f it still is not possible to unlock the door pull more firmly on the emergency release catch gt Open the door in the normal way gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Y Replacing SmartKey batteries If the batteries in the SmartKey are discharged the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked It is recommended to have the batteries replaced at an aut
364. ted in the display If the system does not detect a sound signal the cassette will automatically fast forward to the next sound signal Switching off the skip blank function gt Press the ss key The highlighted ss in the display disappears Dolby NR noise reduction system To enable optimum sound reproduction of cassettes recorded using Dolby B NR the Dolby NR system should be switched on The Dolby NR function should be switched off when playing cassettes not recorded with Dolby B NR a DOLBY and the double D symbol pq are trade marks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpora tion The Dolby noise reduction system is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Controls in detail Audio system a Switching on gt Press the nr key nr is highlighted in the display Switching off gt Press the nr key The highlighted nr in the display disappears 157 Controls in detail mz Audio system CD changer operation General notes Should excessively high temperatures oc cur while in CD mode Tene H will appear in the display and the CD will be muted The unit will then switch back to the last operating mode used until the tem perature has decreased to a safe operating level Co 5 a oe ce ee ie in E el HUD P82 60 4066 31 oe Ps e Should excessively low temperatures occur while in CD mode cp Tene Lowwill appear in
365. ter Fuel consumption is also increased by driving in cold weather in stop and go traffic on short trips and in hilly area Warning A N Drinking and driving and or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combina tions Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes perceptions and judgment The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident are greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs Warning Make sure that absolutely no objects are ob structing the pedals range of movement Keep the driver s footwell clear of all obsta cles If there are any floormats or carpets in the footwell make sure that the pedals still have sufficient clearance During sudden driving or braking maneuvers the objects could get caught between the pedals You could then no longer brake or accelerate This could lead to accidents and or injury 235 Operation ia Driving instructions Power assistance Brakes Warning A N The brake system requires electrical energy for operation A malfunction in the vehicle s power supply or electrical system may impair brake sys tem operation and switch it into its emer gency operation mode In such a case the red brake warning lamp gt page 307 and warning messages gt page 319 in the in strument cluster come on while driving To brake
366. the Mercedes Benz SLR McLaren Road ster 722 S Use of tires not specially approved for the Mercedes Benz SLR McLaren Roadster 722 S could result in unanticipated performance characteristics For more information contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center 389 Technical data a Electrical system Generator alternator Starter motor Battery Starter battery Battery for electrical consumers Spark plugs Electrode gap Tightening torque 390 Mercedes Benz SLR McLaren Roadster 14V 150A 12 V 1 7 kW 12 V 35 Ah 12 V 70 Ah NGK ILFR6A 0 031 in 0 8 mm 18 22 lb ft 25 30 Nm Mercedes Benz SLR McLaren Roadster 722 S 14V 150A 12 V 1 7 kW 12 V 35 Ah 12 V 70 Ah NGK ILFR6A 0 031 in 0 8 mm 18 22 lb ft 25 30 Nm YV Main dimensions Overall vehicle length Overall vehicle width Overall vehicle width doors open widest point Overall vehicle height Overall vehicle height doors open highest point Overall vehicle height soft top open highest point Wheelbase Track front Track rear Mercedes Benz SLR McLaren Roadster 183 3 in 4656 mm 75 1 in 1908 mm 111 7 in 2838 mm 50 4 in 1281 mm 80 5 in 2045 mm 63 0 in 1599 mm 106 3 in 2700 mm 64 5 in 1638 mm 61 8 in 1569 mm Technical data Main dimensions e Mercedes Benz SLR McLaren Roadster 722 S 183 3 in 4656 mm 75 1 in 1908 mm 111 7 in 2838 mm 50 0 in 1271 mm
367. the audio head unit gt Press the snokey for dialing to begin The telephone establishes the connection gt Wait until the emergency call center answers then describe the emergency Accepting an incoming call Accepting an incoming call in telephone mode With an incoming call a ringing tone can be heard and the caller s telephone num ber or the name under which this tele phone number has been saved in the telephone book appears on the display If the caller s number is not transmitted CALL Will appear in the display gt Press the snokey to accept call Controls in detail Audio system a Accepting an incoming call in cassette CD or radio mode If the telephone is activated in the back ground receiving symbol s visible on dis play the audio source is muted when a call is received The ringing tone is heard and the caller s telephone number or the name under which this telephone number has been saved in the telephone book ap pears on the display If the caller s number is not transmitted caLt appears in the display gt Press the snokey to accept the call 167 Controls in detail mz Audio system Muting a call lt is possible to mute a call the caller is then no longer able to hear you Mute on gt Press the mor key Mute off gt Press the mor key Terminating a call gt Press the enokey The current call is terminated 168 Call waiting If you receive another
368. the display but the CD will continue to play Handle CDs carefully to prevent interfer ence during playback Avoid fingerprints and dust on CDs Do not write on CDs or apply any labels or other material to them 158 Only use original CDs Using copied CDs may create problems during playback Clean CDs from time to time with a com mercially available cleaning cloth Do not use solvents anti static sprays etc for cleaning Replace the CD in its case after use Protect CDs from heat and direct sunlight HSE DIGITAL AUDIO Only use CDs which bear the label shown and that conform to the compact disc digital audio standard IEC 60908 You can therefore only use CDs with a maximum thickness of 1 3 mm Use of CDs which do not meet this standard may cause damage to the CD changer Do not play single CDs 80 mm with an adapter Your CD drive has been designed to play CDs which correspond to the IEC 60908 standard If you insert thicker data carriers e g ones that have data on both sides one side with DVD data the other side with audio data they cannot be ejected and will damage the drive A The CD changer is a Class 1 laser product There is a danger of invisible laser radiation if the cover is opened or damaged Do not remove the cover The CD changer does not contain any parts which can be ser viced by the user For safety reasons have any service work which may be necessary performed only by qualified
369. the driver must then apply signifi cantly greater brake pedal pressure and de press the pedal much further to obtain the expected braking effect If necessary apply full pressure to the brake pedal Brakes are only applied to the front wheels Stopping distance is increased If there is a malfunc tion in the electro hydraulic brake system we recommend that the vehicle be trans ported with all wheels off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift dolly equipment 236 A tow bar must be used if circumstances do not permit the use of the recommended towing methods and the vehicle requires towing with all four wheels on the ground Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is only permissible for distances up to 30 miles 50 km and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph 50 km h For more infor mation see Towing the vehicle gt page 373 With the engine not running there is no power assistance for the brake and steering systems In this case it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle Ge The brake system is designed to decelerate your SLR from high speeds at the best possible rate Depending on the applied brake force speed and ambient conditions the brake sys tem may produce a squeak type noise when you apply the brakes at a moderate rate e g at city traffic If you experience this noise you should occasionally test the
370. the driver on the instru ment cluster gt Attach sticker part 2 to the damaged tire close to the valve 366 Warning VAN Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to come in contact with hair eyes or clothing TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled swallowed or absorbed through the skin causes skin eye and respiratory irritation Any contact with eyes or skin should be flushed immediately with plenty of water If clothing comes in contact with TIREFIT change clothing as soon as possible In case of allergic reaction or rash consult a physician immediately Warning A N Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children If swallowed rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water Do not induce vomiting Consult a physician immediately Keep away from open flame or heat source f sealant has leaked out let it dry You can then peel it off If you get sealant on your clothing have it dry cleaned as soon as possible 1 TIREFIT container 2 Flap 3 Notch 4 Electrical plug Air hose 6 Flange gt Open flap on the electric air pump gt Pull plug and air hose G out of the pump housing gt Screw the air pump s air hose G onto flange 6 of the TIREFIT container gt Stick TIREFIT container Q upside down into notch of the electric air pump P40 10 2918 31 7 Tire valve Electric air pump switch 9 Pressure gauge and vent screw
371. the ground is only permissible for distances up to 30 miles 50 km and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph 50 km h For more infor mation see Towing the vehicle gt page 373 The electro hydraulic brake system is automatically activated when you e unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey e open the driver s or passenger door e turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 e depress the brake pedal e release the parking brake i If the electro hydraulic brake system is acti vated as the brake pedal is first depressed you may feel a reduced pedal resistance and longer pedal travel than normal When releasing the pedal you may also feel the brake pedal pulsate and you may hear a sound which is caused by the activation of the electro hydraulic brake system pump This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction Pedal travel returns to normal when you release the brake pedal and the sound soon ceases Ifyou experience the above while driving and the red brake warning lamp page 307 illumi nates and or warning messages appear in the multifunction display gt page 334 the brake system is malfunctioning Follow the instructions of the warning message s and have the brake system checked immediately A Have brake pad replacement and other work on the electro hydraulic brake system car ried out by qualified technicians only Con tact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for further information The
372. the indicator lamps in the SOS button in the Roadside Assistance button and or in the Information button do not come on dur ing the system self check or if any of these indicators remain illuminated continuously in red and or the message Tel e Ai d noper ati ve IS displayed in the multifunc tion display after the system self check a malfunction in the system has been detected If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above the system may not operate as ex pected In case of an emergency help will have to be summoned by other means Have the system checked at the nearest Mercedes Benz Center or contact the Re sponse Center at 1 800 756 9018 in the USA or 1 888 923 8367 in Canada as soon as possible Emergency Tensioning Devices ETDs or air bags have deployed An emergency call can also be initiated manually gt page 217 Once the emergency call is in progress the indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin to flash The message Connecti ng Cal appears in the multifunction display When the connection is established you see the message cal Connect ed in the multifunc tion display All information relevant to the emergency such as the location of the vehicle deter mined by the GPS satellite location sys tem vehicle model identification number and color are generated Controls in detail Useful features a A voice connection between the Response Initiating an emergency call manually gt Wait f
373. the recommended cold tire inflation pressures for maximum loaded vehicle weight The tire inflation pressures listed apply to the tires installed as original equipment Important notes on tire inflation pressure A Warning If the tire inflation pressure drops repeatedly e Check the tires for punctures from foreign objects e Check to see whether air is leaking from the valves or from around the rim Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure are also increased while driving depending on the driving speed and the tire load If you will be driving your vehicle at high speeds of 155 mph 250 km h or higher where it is legal and conditions allow consult the tire inflation pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap if available on how to adjust the cold tire inflation pressure If you do not adjust the tire infla tion pressure excessive heat can build up and result in sudden tire failure Operation Tires and wheels If your vehicle is not equipped with the tire inflation pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap contact your PLM or any au thorized Mercedes Benz Center for proper tire inflation pressure a Driving comfort may be reduced when the tire inflation pressure is adjusted to the value for speeds above 155 mph 250 km h as specified on the tire inflation pressure label located on the inside of the fuel filler flap Be sure to readjust the tire inflation pressure for normal dr
374. tion you can find us on the Mercedes Benz web site www mbusa com USA only or www mercedes benz ca Canada only Warning A To help avoid personal injury be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs Improper or incomplete service or the use of incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment which may in turn result in personal injury If you have any questions about carrying out any type of service turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes Benz Center We reserve the right to make changes in design and equipment Therefore information illustrations and descriptions in this Operator s Manual might differ from your vehicle Reprinting translation and copying even of excerpts is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing Press time May 22 2008 GSP OIS Printed in Germany Order No 6515 4817 13 Part No 199 584 1182 USA Edition A 2009
375. tioning You are driving with the manual shift pro gram The engine is in the overrevving range The fuel level has dropped below the reserve mark The fuel filler cap is not closed tightly The engine oil has not yet reached its operating temperature Practical hints What to do if a Suggested solutions gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center immediately gt Shift to the next higher gear Otherwise the fuel supply will be interrupted to prevent the engine from overrevwving gt Refuel at the nearest gas station gt page 247 gt Check the fuel filler cap gt page 247 gt Warm up the engine and do not drive at full power until the operating temperature has been reached The symbol will go out as soon as the engine oil has reached its operating temperature 311 Practical hints pe What to do if Problem l m hi S 312 The red seat belt telltale comes on for a maximum of 6 seconds after starting the engine You hear a warning chime for a maximum of 6 seconds after starting the engine The red seat belt telltale comes on while the vehicle is standing still and the engine is running or during driving Possible cause consequence The telltale reminds you and your passenger to fasten your seat belts before driving off You have forgotten to fasten your seat belt You and or your passenger have forgotten to fasten your seat belts There are items placed on
376. tomer Relations Department Mercedes Benz Canada Inc 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto Ontario M4G 4C9 21 Introduction Reporting safety defects For the USA only The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49 Code of U S Federal Regulations Part 575 pursuant to the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966 Reporting safety defects If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying Mercedes Benz USA LLC If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or Mercedes Benz USA LLC To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9 153 go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA Headquarters 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington DC 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov 22 Introduction Vehicle data recording Y Vehicle data recording Information regarding electronic recording devices Including notice pursuant to California Code 9951 Pl
377. tor or other device You may need it for use in other vehicles for fu ture programming of an integrated remote con trol or simply for continued use as a hand held remote control to operate the respective device in other situations Reprogramming a single signal transmitter button To program a device using a signal trans mitter button previously trained follow these steps gt Switch on the ignition gt page 40 gt Press and hold the desired signal transmitter button or Do not release the button gt Indicator lamp Q will begin to flash af ter 20 seconds Without releasing the signal transmitter button proceed with programming starting with step 3 Controls in detail Useful features ia Operation of integrated remote control gt Switch on the ignition gt page 40 gt Select and press the appropriate inte grated signal transmitter button 3 or 4 to activate the remote controlled device The integrated remote control trans mitter continues to send the signal as long as the button is pressed up to 20 seconds Erasing the integrated remote control memory gt Switch on the ignition gt page 40 gt Simultaneously press and hold outer signal transmitter buttons 2 and for approximately 20 seconds until indicator lamp Q flashes rapidly Do not hold for longer than 30 seconds The codes of all three channels are erased i Ifyou sell your vehicle erase t
378. tral position N There will then be no power assistance when steering and braking Practical hints Towing the vehicle p Transporting the vehicle The towing eye bolt can be used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter for transporting purposes gt Switch on the ignition gt page 40 gt Move the selector lever to neutral position N T Due to the low clearance height of the SLR care must be taken when loading and unloading from a transporter to avoid damaging the vehicle body work To secure the vehicle only tie it down by the wheels or tires Otherwise it could be damaged 375 Practical hints E Fuses T You must not change the fuses yourself as you could damage the vehicle electrical systems Have fuses changed at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center 376 Parts service Warranty coverage Identification labels Layout of poly V belt drive Engine Rims and tires Electrical system ca a E i EVENE EOE ip e Ti Weights a Ta Fuels coolants lubricants etc Technical data ae Parts service The Technical data section provides the necessary technical data for your vehicle 380 All authorized Mercedes Benz Centers maintain a stock of Genuine Mercedes Benz parts required for mainte nance and repair work In addition strate gically located parts distribution centers provide quick and reliable parts service More than 300 000 different parts fo
379. ts C onto retainers pins 2 in direction of arrow P 68 00 4596 31 gt Pull the floormats off retainers pins gt Remove the floormat l Dust cover gt Warning A N Allow the engine to cool down completely before slipping the dust cover on your vehi cle Otherwise you could be seriously burned when coming into contact with the hot exhaust system T To avoid damage to the vehicle and the dust cover observe the following gt e Use the dust cover only when the vehicle is garaged e Cover the vehicle only when the engine has cooled down completely e The vehicle as wellas the dust cover must be dry before slipping the dust cover on the vehicle e Make sure the dust cover is clean and dry before inserting it in the bag provided with the dust cover Ge Clean the dust cover according to the care label on the inside of the dust cover Slipping dust cover on off Place the rolled up dust cover with its dark grey side facing downwards on the vehicle roof Make sure the FRONT label is facing towards the front of the vehicle Roll the side that is labelled FRONT over the hood Roll the rear part over the tail end of the vehicle Unfold the dust cover Controls in detail Useful features a POO 70 2006 31 On the rear right pull down the dust cover below the bumper Pull down the dust cover on the right side of the vehicle On the front right pull down the dust cover below the bumpe
380. ts on top of each other as this may impair pedal movement Controls in detail Useful features a Installing Removing Example driver s side gt Pull the floormats off retainers pins 1 Eyelet gt Remove the floormat 2 Retainer pins gt Lay down the floormat gt Press eyelets 1 onto retainers pins 2 in direction of arrow 227 Controls in detail a Useful features Floormats Only Mercedes Benz SLR McLaren Roadster 722S BE 7o avoid damage to the carbon fiber surface Removing please make sure your shoe soles are free of Warning A N Because of the carbon fiber the footwell could be slippery when wet Be careful when entering exiting the vehicle with wet shoe soles you could slip on it When you are using floormats make sure there is enough clearance and that the floormats are securely fastened Floormats must always be securely fastened using eyelets Q and retainer pins 2 Before driving off check that the floormats are securely in place and adjust them if necessary A loose floormat could slip and hinder proper functioning of the pedals Do not place several floormats on top of each other as this may impair pedal movement 228 hard particles e g stones glass and avoid the use of small surface heels when driving the vehicle Installing iit P68 00 4597 31 Example driver s side 1 Eyelet 2 Retainer pins gt Lay down the floormat gt Press eyele
381. tside This setting cuts off the intake of outside air and recirculates the air in the passenger compartment A Fogged windows impair visibility endanger ing you and others If the windows begin to fog on the inside switching off the air recirculation mode immediately should clear interior window fogging If interior window fogging persists make sure the air conditioning gt page 194 is activated or press button Keg Warning Activating gt Press button gt page 186 The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air recirculation mode is activated auto matically e at high outside temperatures e if the concentration of carbon monoxide CO and nitrogen oxide NOx in the outside air increases for example in a tunnel A quantity of outside air is added after approxi mately 30 minutes If you have turned off the air conditioning gt page 194 or the outside temperature is be low 41 F 5 C the air recirculation mode will not switch on automatically Controls in detail Automatic climate control a Deactivating gt Press button gt page 186 The indicator lamp on the button goes out The manually selected air recirculation mode is deactivated automatically e after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is below approximately 41 F 5 C e after 5 minutes if the air conditioning Is turned off e after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above approximately
382. ty illumina tion Headlamps delayed switch off Setting interior lighting delayed switch off Controls in detail Control system ia Vehicle gt page 138 Setting station selection mode radio Setting automatic locking 131 Controls in detail mz Control system Instrument cluster submenu Access the instr Guster Submenu via the set ti ngs Menu Use the instr a us ter Submenu to change the instrument cluster display settings The following functions are available Function Page Selecting the digital soeedome 132 ter display Selecting the standard display 132 Selecting the language Ge 132 Selecting the digital speedometer display gt Move the selection marker with button Or to the tnstr Custer submenu gt Press button JM or Keg repeatedly until you see this message in the left multifunction display D gital Speedoneter The selection marker is on the current setting Ee Digital Speedometer Kilometers Miles B ae p y ae _ P54 32 4949 31 gt Press button or E to set the speedometer units to ki onet ers OF M I es Selecting the standard display gt Move the selection marker with button or E tothe instr a uster submenu gt Press button EAN or Keg repeatedly until you see this message in the left multifunction display Sel ect D spl ay The selection marker is on the current setting oo O Select Displa E Speed Display i
383. uminates If an adult oc cupant Is properly sitting on the passenger seat and the system senses the occupant as being an adult the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp will illuminate and go out after approximately 6 seconds If the seat is not occupied and the system senses the passenger seat as being empty the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp will illuminate and not go out 71 Safety and Security as Occupant safety Warning A N If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp should not illuminate the system is not functioning You must contact an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center before seating any child on the passenger seat For more information see the Practical hints section gt page 317 Warning A N Never place anything between seat cushion and child seat e g pillow since it reduces the effectiveness of the Occupant Classification System The bottom of the child seat must make full contact with the passenger seat cushion An incorrectly mounted child seat could cause injuries to the child in case of an accident instead of increasing protection for the child Follow the manufacturer s instructions for installation of child seats 72 Seat belts The use of seat belts and infant and child restraint systems is required by law in all 50 states the District of Columbia the U S territories and all Canadian provinces Even where this is not the case all vehicle occupants should hav
384. unintended air bag deploy ment Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians Con tact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Safety and Security Occupant safety a If it is necessary to modify an air bag system to accommodate a person with disabilities contact your local authorized Mercedes Benz Center or call the Customer Assistance Center at 1 800 FOR MERCedes 1 800 367 6372 for details 61 Safety and Security is Occupant safety Air bags Warning A N Air bags are designed to reduce the poten tial of injury and fatality in certain frontal impacts front air bags knee air bags or side impacts head thorax air bags However no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities The deployment of the air bags temporarily releases a small amount of dust from the air bags This dust however is neither injurious to your health nor does it indicate a fire in the vehicle The dust might cause some tem porary breathing difficulty for people with asthma or other breathing trouble To avoid this you may wish to get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so If you have any breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the vehicle after the air bag inflates then get fresh air by opening a window or door 62 Warning To reduce the risk of injury when the front air bags inflate it is very important for the driver and passenger to always be in a prop erly seat
385. unk lid racks 230 Terminology 286 Vehicle maximum load on the tire 289 Vehicle Recovery services Stolen Tele Aid 221 Vehicle status message memory menu 128 Vehicle washing 298 VIN 382 407 W Warning lamps see Lamps Indicator and warning Warning sounds Drivers seat belts 74 Exterior lamps 57 Parking brake 50 Warranty coverage 14 381 Washer fluid see Windshield washer fluid Washer reservoir level 257 Washing the vehicle 297 Wear pattern Tires 289 Wheel bolts Anti theft wheel nuts 290 Tightening torque 290 Wheels Sizes 386 Wheels Tires and 259 Wind screen 201 Windows see Power windows Windshield Cleaning 299 Index Defogging 192 Windshield washer fluid 257 401 Message in the multifunction display 354 Mixing ratio 401 Refilling 257 Wiping with 53 Windshield washer system 401 Windshield wipers 27 52 Cleaning wiper blades 299 Replacing wiper blades 363 Single wipe 53 Winter driving 292 Instructions 242 Snow chains 293 Tires 292 Winter tires 292 425 Service and Literature Your authorized Mercedes Benz Center has trained technicians and Genuine Mercedes Benz Parts to service your vehicle properly For expert advice and quality service contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle please contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle For further informa
386. ured or improperly positioned cargo increases a child s risk of injury in the event of e strong braking maneuvers e sudden changes of direction e an accident Infant and child restraint systems We recommend all infants and children be properly restrained at all times while the vehicle is in motion The passenger lap shoulder belt has a special seat belt retractor for secure fastening of child restraints To fasten a child restraint follow child restraint instructions for mounting Then pull the shoulder belt out completely and let it retract During seat belt retraction a ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate that the special seat belt retractor Is acti vated The seat belt is now locked Push down on child restraint to take up any Slack To deactivate release seat belt buckle and let seat belt retract completely The seat belt can again be used in the usual manner A Never release the seat belt buckle while the vehicle is in motion since the special seat belt retractor will be deactivated Warning The use of infant or child restraints is re quired by law in all 50 states the District of Columbia the U S territories and all Canadian provinces Infants and small children should be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system and properly secured in accordance with the manufacturers in structions for the child restraint that com plies with U S Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
387. uring hard braking reducing steering capability gt Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center immediately Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident gt Read and observe messages in the multifunction display gt page 319 When the voltage is above this value again the ABS is operational again and the ABS indicator lamp should go out If the ABS indicator lamp does not go out gt Have the generator alternator and the battery checked Problem Ho BRAKE BRAKE Warning Driving wit nated can Practical hints What to do if a Possible cause consequence Suggested solutions Canada only You are driving with the parking brake set Release the parking brake gt page 49 USA only The red brake warning lamp comes on while driving and you hear a warning sound Canada only Risk of accident gt Carefully stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe to do so and contact USA only e There is a malfunction in the feet een ee electro hydraulic brake system craigs use e ne tre eee The red brake warning lamp i not add brake fluid This will not solve the comes on while the engine is e There is insufficient brake fluid in the problem running and you hear a reservoir gt Read and observe messages in the warning sound l multifunction display gt page 319 AN Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can re su
388. urther Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by blocking the wheels with wheel chocks or other sizeable objects Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center The maximum speed is limited to 55 mph 90 km h oy gt Call for Roadside Assistance Warning A N Driving while this message is displayed can result in an accident Have your brake system checked immediately If the electro hydraulic brake system enters its emergency operation mode the driver must apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and depress the pedal much fur ther than normal to obtain braking effect 334 If necessary apply full pressure to the brake pedal Brakes are only applied to the front wheels Stopping distance is increased If there is a malfunction in the electro hydraulic brake system we recom mend that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the ground using flatbed or ap propriate wheel lift dolly equipment A tow bar must be used if circumstances do not permit the use of the recommended towing methods and the vehicle requires towing with all four wheels on the ground Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is only permissible for distances up to 30 miles 50 km and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph 50 km h For more infor mation see Towing the vehicle gt page 373 Practical hints What to do if ae Left display Right display Possible cause Possible solution consequence USA onl
389. usness and possible death Do not run the engine in confined areas such as garage which are not properly ventilated If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving have the cause determined and corrected immediately If you must drive under these conditions drive only with at least one window fully open 47 Getting started Driving Warning A N Make sure the cover of the start button is closed after starting the engine Otherwise you could be injured on the open cover in an accident or during driving maneuvers For information on turning off the engine see Turning off the engine gt page 56 Gearshift pattern 1 Cover P Park position with gear selector lever Start button lock gt Make sure the gear selector lever is set R Reverse gear N Neutral position D Drive position to park position P Do not depress the accelerator Switch on the ignition gt page 40 Lift up cover For more information see Automatic transmission gt page 169 vY v y Yy Press start button 2 once The engine starts gt Close cover Q 48 Starting difficulties If the engine does not start as described carry out the following steps gt Turnthe SmartKey inthe starter switch to position O and repeat starting procedure gt page 48 gt Remember that extended starting attempts can drain the battery If the engine does not start after several startin
390. vehicle is standing still and a door is opened 313 Practical hints pe What to do if Problem Possible cause consequence Suggested solution E The red SRS indicator lamp There is a malfunction in the restraint sys Drive with added caution to the comes on while the engine is tems The air bags or Emergency Tensioning nearest authorized running Device ETD could deploy unexpectedly or Mercedes Benz Center fail to activate in an accident Warning A N In the event that a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above the SRS may not be operational For your safety we strongly recommend that you contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center immedi ately to have the system checked otherwise the SRS may not be deployed when needed in an accident which could result in serious or fatal injury or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in an accident and or injury to you or to others 314 Problem USA only Combination low tire pressure TPMS malfunction telltale for the TPMS illuminates continuously Canada only Low tire pressure telltale for the TPMS illuminates continuously USA only Combination low tire pressure TPMS malfunction telltale for the TPMS flashes 60 seconds and then stays illuminated Possible cause consequence The TPMS detects a loss of pressure in at least one tire There is a malfunction in the TPMS Practical hints What to do if
391. vely reclined position as this can be dangerous You could slide un der the seat belt in a collision If you slide under it the seat belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck That could cause se rious or fatal injuries The seat back and seat belts provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and seat belts are properly positioned on the body Warning A N Your seat must be adjusted so that you can correctly fasten your seat belt gt page 45 Observe the following points e Adjust the seat to a comfortable seating position that still allows you to reach the accelerator brake pedal safely The po sition should be as far to the rear as pos sible consistent with ability to properly operate controls e Adjust the seat until a comfortable steering wheel position is reached with your arms slightly bent at the elbow e Never place hands under the seat or near any moving parts while a seat is being adjusted Failure to do so could result in an accident and or serious personal injury Getting started Adjusting es Warning A N When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Even with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch the seats can be operated Therefore do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle A child s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result
392. ving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction The traction grades from highest to low est are AA A B and C Those grades rep resent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance A The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Warning Temperature The temperature grades are A the high est B and C representing the tire s resis tance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high tem perature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and ex cessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Operation Tires and wheels poo A Warning The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underi
393. when needed in an accident which could result in serious or fatal injury or it might deploy Move the selector lever to park position P Move the selector lever to neutral position N Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center immediately Drive with added caution and have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center immediately unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could result in an accident and or injury to you or to others Practical hints What to do if ae Left display Right display Possible cause consequence Possible solution Ti re pressure di spl ayed after The tire inflation pressure is being checked gt Drive the vehicle for a few minutes dri vi ng for a few m nut es Ti re Pressure noper ati ve The TPMS is malfunctioning gt Have the TPMS checked by an Mbni t or authorized Mercedes Benz Center Ti re Pressure noper ati ve There are wheels without appropriate wheel gt Have the TPMS checked by an autho Mbni t or No Wheel Sensors sensors mounted e g winter tires rized Mercedes Benz Center gt Have appropriate wheel sensors in stalled by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Ti re Pressure Weel Sensor Mssing One or more sensors are defect e g battery gt Have the TPMS checked by an autho Moni t or is empty rized Mercedes Benz Center The respective tire is indicated by gt Have appropriate wheel sensors in instead of the tire inflation pressure in the
394. winter season or once a year in hot southern regions you should have the anticorrosion antifreeze concentration checked The coolant is also regularly checked each time you bring your vehicle to an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for service Windshield washer system and head lamp cleaning system Both the windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system are supplied from the windshield washer reservoir The windshield washer reservoir has a capacity of approximately 7 4 US qt 7 gt Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield Washer Concentrate and water or con centrate and commercially available premixed windshield washer sol vent antifreeze depending on ambient temperatures Warning A N Washer solvent antifreeze is highly flamma ble Do not spill washer solvent antifreeze on hot engine parts because it may ignite and burn You could be seriously burned Windshield and headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio For temperatures above freezing point use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate MB SummerFit and water e 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water 1 34 fl oz 40 ml MB SummerFit to 1 gal 4 0 I water For temperatures below freezing point use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate MB SummerFit and commercially avail able premixed windshield washer solvent antifreeze e 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts solvent 1 34 fl oz 40 ml MB SummerFit to 1 gal 4 0 I solv
395. y Check Risk of accident gt Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as Canada only 53ks To Level There is insufficient brake fluid ile Salle 10 CO Ge in the reservoir gt Do not drive any further gt Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Do not add brake fluid This will not solve the problem BE you find that the brake fluid in the brake Warning A N fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below have the brake system checked for brake Driving with the message Check Brake pad thickness and leaks FI uid Level displayed can result in an accident Have your brake system checked immediately Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire You can be seriously burned 335 Practical hints pe What to do if Left display Right display Possible cause Possible solution consequence USA only Reduced The electro hydraulic gt Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is Canada only Brake Ef fect brake system is in emer safe to do so Servi ce gency operation mode Apply the parking brake gt page 55 Requi red Considerably greater I ncr eased St oppi ng D stance Servi ce Requi r ed Warning A N Driving while these messages are displayed can result in an accident Have your brake system checked immediately If the electr
396. y The number of the current track is displayed after track EDM RFT AUD 1 P82 60 4068 31 If there is no CD in the selected maga zine slot you see no appears on the display with the corresponding slot number 160 Skipping tracks forward backward e Skipping tracks forward gt Press IXJ button The next track will be played e Skipping tracks backward gt Press E button If the track has been playing for more than 10 seconds it will revert to the start of that track If it has been playing for less than 10 seconds it will revert to the preceding track Pressing the EXE or EG button repeat edly will result in multiple tracks being skipped Fast forward reverse e Fast forward gt Press and hold EN button until desired point has been reached e Fast reverse gt Press and hold iM button until desired point has been reached a The relative time of the track is shown on the display during the search Scanning e Starting scan gt Press button Pg2 60 4069 31 sc appears in the display Each track on the current CD will be played for approximately 8 seconds in ascending order e Ending scan gt Press QO EN Eval lo BB button Random play The random play function RDM plays the tracks on the current CD in random order e Switching on random play AUD T Pa2 60 4067 31 gt Press the rowkey Rpmis highlighted in the display e Switching off random play gt Press the r
397. y 353 Proper use of 46 Safety guidelines 64 Telltale 312 Warning lamp 312 313 Seating capacity 264 seats 41 Selector lever see Gear selector lever Self test Lamps in the instrument cluster 304 OCS 71 Tele Aid 216 Service and warranty information 14 service intervals see Service indicator Service life Tires 261 Vehicle batteries 256 service see Maintenance Service Parts 380 Settings Control system menus 120 Control system submenus 121 Factory SmartKey 99 Individual Vehicle 129 Menus and submenus 119 Resetting to factory settings Control system 129 Selective SmartKey 100 Time 133 Index shift program mode selector switch Auto matic transmission 175 Shifting Automatic transmission 169 Side airvents 185 Side marker lamps Messages in the multifunction display 348 Replacing bulbs 362 Side windows see Power windows Sidewall 288 SmartKey see Key SmartKey Snow chains 293 Snow tires 292 Soft top Care 300 Messages in the multifunction display 354 Opening and closing 198 Soft top linkage Cover 202 Spare fuses 376 Spare parts service 380 Speed setting 421 index Cruise control 207 Speed settings Cruise control 208 Speedometer 29 SRS 60 406 Indicatorlamp 29 314 Messages in the multifunction display 328 Standing lamps 106 Standing water Driving trough 243 Start button 48 Starter battery 256 370 Starter switch 27 40 Starting difficulties Engine 49 Starting the engine 47 Steering wheel 42
398. y a remind er with respect to the operation of certain systems and do not replace the owner s and or driver s responsibility to maintain the vehicle s operating safety by having all required maintenance and safety checks Warning 128 performed on the vehicle and by bringing the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes Benz Center to address the malfunction and warning messages gt page 319 gt Press button or repeatedly until you see the vehicle status mes sage memory in the right multifunction display If the vehicle status message memory menu does not appear no messages have been stored If conditions have occurred causing status messages to be recorded the number of messages appears in the right multi function display Ta F 5 26753 Miles q pe A P54 32 4947 31 1 Number of recorded status messages gt Press button BVA or Ba The stored messages will now be displayed in the order in which they have occurred For malfunction and warning messages see Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display gt page 319 Should the vehicle s system record any conditions while driving the number of messages will reappear in the multifunc tion display when the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position O or removed from the starter switch If you switch off the ignition you will delete the vehicle status message memory ex cept for a few high priority messages The control system on
399. ystem Fuel consumption since last reset gt Press button or repeatedly until you see the first function of the trip computer menu gt Press button EAN or Keg repeatedly until you see the following message in the left multifunction display From Reset Cm 3 31 1 Distance driven since last reset 2 Average speed since last reset 3 Time elapsed since last reset 4 Average fuel consumption since last reset 65 MPH O 140 3 20 30H 3 3 MPG Resetting fuel consumption statistics gt Press button or repeatedly until you see the first function of the trip computer menu gt Press button JM or Keg repeatedly until you see the reading that you want to reset in the left multifunction display gt Press and hold the reset button in the instrument cluster gt page 114 until the value is reset to o The fuel consumption statistics reset auto matically to o when either of the following values is exceeded e distance covered 99999 miles e time elapsed 9999 hours Distance to empty gt Press button or repeatedly until you see the first function of the trip computer menu gt Press button EAN or Keg repeatedly until you see this message in the left multifunction display Range The calculated remaining driving range based on the current fuel tank level ap pears in the right multifunction display Your driving style will affect the accuracy of the calculated range lt q

Mercedes-Benz 2006 SLR McLaren Operator`s manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents